Laboratory Design Guide,

Laboratory Design Guide

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Laboratory Design Guide Third edition For clients, architects and their design team The laboratory design process from start to finish

Brian Griffin B Arch (Syd) FRAIA MDIA ARIBA Architect and Laboratory Design Consultant www.briangriffin.com.au

AMSTERDAM • BOSTON • HEIDELBERG • LONDON NEW YORK • OXFORD • PARIS • SAN DIEGO SAN FRANCISCO • SINGAPORE • SYDNEY • TOKYO Architectural Press is an imprint of Elsevier

Architectural Press An imprint of Elsevier Linacre House, Jordan Hill, Oxford OX2 8DP 200 Wheeler Road, Burlington, MA 01803 First published 1998 Second edition 2000 Third edition 2005 Copyright © 1998, 2000, 2005, Brian Griffin. All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced in any material form (including photocopying or storing in any medium by electronic means and whether or not transiently or incidentally to some other use of this publication) without the written permission of the copyright holder except in accordance with the provisions of the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988 or under the terms of a licence issued by the Copyright Licensing Agency Ltd, 90 Tottenham Court Road, London, England W1T 4LP. Applications for the copyright holder’s written permission to reproduce any part of this publication should be addressed to the publisher Permissions may be sought directly from Elsevier’s Science & Technology Rights Department in Oxford, UK: phone: (⫹44) 1865 843830, fax: (⫹44) 1865 853333, e-mail: permissions @ elsevier.co.uk.You may also complete your request on-line via the Elsevier homepage (http://www.elsevier.com), by selecting ‘Customer Support’ and then ‘Obtaining Permissions’ British Library Cataloguing in Publication Data A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library Library of Congress Cataloguing in Publication Data A catalogue record for this book is available from the Library of Congress ISBN 0 7506 6089 9 For information on all Architectural Press publications visit our website at http://books.elsevier.com Typeset and Edited by Integra Software Services Pvt. Ltd, Pondicherry, India www.integra-india.com Printed and bound in Great Britain

Working together to grow libraries in developing countries www.elsevier.com | www.bookaid.org | www.sabre.org

I dedicate this book to the client who gave me the inspiration to develop designs for maximum flexibility in laboratories Professor Ian Thornton Dr Allan Marshall Dr Allan Wright Peter Berry Department of Zoology, La Trobe University, Australia

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Contents

List of figures xiii List of colour plates xv Acknowledgements xvii

Introduction xix Summary of recommendations xxi Chapter 1 – Design brief 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10 1.11 1.12 1.13 1.14 1.15

1

Initiating the brief 2 Generic laboratories 4 Type and function of the laboratory 4 Staff 7 Hazards 7 Work space, benches and services 9 Storage 9 Equipment 11 Work environment 12 Staff facilities 12 Meeting rooms 13 Car parking 14 Visitors 14 Security 14 Case studies 14

Chapter 2 – Design methodology 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4

15

Project team 16 Project meetings 16 Project programme and budget 17 Returning the brief 17

2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8

Design synthesis 19 Design development 19 Contract documentation 19 Construction management 22

Chapter 3 – Site and buildings 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7

23

Location 24 Site planning 25 Building design 25 Interior design 31 Special laboratories 37 External bulk storage 37 Teaching laboratories and the virtual experiment 37

Chapter 4 – Laboratory furniture and services 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6

Workbenches 40 Storage cupboards and drawers 45 Non-joinery items of furniture 45 Glass wash facilities 47 Laboratory services 47 Recent technology 49

Chapter 5 – Special cabinets and benches 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 5.10

39

51

Fume cupboards 52 Local exhaust ventilation 55 Biological safety cabinets 56 Laminar flow cabinets 56 Down-draught benches 56 Flammable liquids cabinets 56 Decanting benches 58 Anti-vibration benches 58 Equipment/instrumentation benches 58 Workbenches for disabled staff 59

Chapter 6 – Laboratory computers, instrumentation and equipment 61 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5

Computers 62 Instrumentation for analysis and testing 63 Centrifuges 63 Ovens and autoclaves 64 Incubators 64

viii Contents

6.6 6.7

Refrigerators and cool rooms 64 Access for large equipment 65

Chapter 7 – On completion 67 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8

Commissioning equipment 68 Security 68 Emergency procedures 69 Services controls and emergencies 69 Building manual 69 As-built drawings 69 Joint final inspections 70 Publication 70

Chapter 8 – Maintenance 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7

71

Bench tops 72 Flooring 72 Filters 73 Waste disposal 73 Safety stations 73 Laboratory services and equipment 74 Laboratory audits 74

Chapter 9 – Environmental design: Internal courtyards as an element of ESD 75 Matthew Jessup, BE (Hons), Senior Environmental Analyst and Su-fern Tan (BE, BA, DipEngPrac), Environmental Analyst, Advanced Environmental Concepts 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5

Introduction 76 Design elements 77 The benefits of internal courtyards 78 A simple concept 78 Conclusion 79

Chapter 10 – Occupational health and safety 81 Caroline Langley BSc M Safety Sc Grad Dipl Occup Hygiene MSIA, Director, Injury Prevention & Management, Hobart,Tasmania 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5

Introduction 82 Design Hazard Review 82 Hierarchy of control 84 Sources of information in Australia 87 Conclusion 88

Contents ix

Chapter 11 – Hydraulic services 89 Livio Chiarot, Dip Tech MIE Aust AHSCA APPA, Director of Acor Consultants, Engineers, Managers, Infrastructure Planners 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6

General 90 Sanitary drainage and plumbing 90 Water systems 91 System features 91 Materials selection 94 Waste disposal 95

Chapter 12 – Mechanical services 97 Robert Lord, BE Mechanical (Hons) Grad Dip Management RPEQ, Senior Engineer Lincolne Scott 12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4 12.5 12.6 12.7 12.8

General 98 Decoupled design approach 100 Integration with other consultants 102 Air quality systems 103 Thermal control systems 107 Acoustic considerations 110 Energy considerations 110 Future proofing considerations 112

Chapter 13 – Electrical services 113 James McPherson, BE (Elec) MIE Aust, Manager, Building and Industrial Services, GHD Pty Ltd., Newcastle 13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 13.5 13.6 13.7

Introduction 114 Relevant Australian codes and standards 115 Power supply and reticulation 115 Bench electrical services 117 Electrical safety 119 Hazardous zones 120 General lighting 121

Chapter 14 – Project cost control 125 Ken McGowan, FRICS FAIQS, Senior Partner of the WT Partnership, Quantity Surveyors Chapter 15 – Post-occupancy evaluation 133 Doug Pottrell, Manager, School of Molecular and Biomedical Science, University of Adelaide 15.1 15.2

Introduction 134 Brief 134

x Contents

15.3 15.4 15.5 15.6 15.7 15.8 15.9 15.10 15.11

Layout 134 Flexibility 135 Laboratories 135 Air conditioning 135 Features 136 Security 136 Space in demand 136 Room for the future 136 Summary 136

Case studies 139 This is a selection of laboratory buildings and projects including university teaching and research, product quality assurance, research and development, testing laboratories, pathology services and medical research. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

Biology Teaching and Research Building, University of Wollongong, NSW 143 Biological Sciences & Biomedical Engineering, University of New South Wales, Sydney, NSW 150 Children’s Medical Research Foundation,Westmead, NSW 154 Centenary Institute of Cancer Medicine & Cell Biology, Sydney, NSW 158 SmithKline Beecham International Laboratories, Consumer Healthcare, Ermington, NSW 160 Life Sciences Building, Ciba Pharmaceuticals Division, Summit, New Jersey, USA 162 Pacific Power Research Laboratories, University of Newcastle, NSW 167 CSIRO McMasters Laboratories, Prospect, NSW 172 ANSTO Radiopharmaceutical Laboratory, Lucas Heights, NSW 175 Garvan Institute of Medical Research, Sydney, NSW 178 ACTEW Corporation Laboratories, Fyshwick, ACT 181 Camelia Botnar Laboratories, Great Ormond Street Hospital, London 188 Institute of Medical Science,The University of Aberdeen, Scotland 191 Heritage Medical Research Building, University of Alberta, Canada 195 Balgownie Technology Centre, Aberdeen Science Park, Scotland 200 St Michael’s Science Building, University of Portsmouth, UK 204 Eli Lilly and Co. Product Development Research Laboratories, Indianapolis, USA 207 Australian Geological Survey Organisation, Canberra, ACT 211 Sir Alexander Fleming Building, Imperial College, London, UK 216 Trinity College Dublin, East End Development, Dublin, Ireland 220 Strathclyde Institute for Biomedical Sciences, Glasgow, Scotland 224 Hunter Water Australia, Newcastle, NSW 228 Analytical Research Laboratories, Napier, New Zealand 232 Biomedical Building, ATP, Sydney, NSW 235 New Science Building, University of Adelaide, SA 241 Contents xi

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Center for Clinical Sciences Research, Stanford University, USA 245 Laboratory Design Competition at the University of Newcastle, NSW 248 Laboratory Design Competition at the University of Queensland, Australia 253 Institute of Medical Sciences: Phase 2, University of Aberdeen, Scotland 257 CSIRO Molecular Science and Food Science Australia, North Ryde, NSW 260 Liverpool Biosciences Centre, University of Liverpool, UK 264 Kadoorie Biological Sciences Building, University of Hong Kong 269 Institute of Laboratory Medicine, St Vincent’s Hospital Campus, Sydney 279 Life Sciences Building, University of Newcastle, NSW 283 Hunter Area Pathology Services (HAPS), John Hunter Hospital Campus, Newcastle, NSW 288 Mine Safety Technical Facility, NSW Department of Mineral Resources, Maitland, NSW 292 Dow Corning Research, Macquarie Technology Park, Sydney 294 National Marine Science Centre, Coffs Harbour, NSW 296 CSIRO Energy Centre, Steel River, Newcastle, NSW 300 Boehringer Biological Research Institute, Biberach, Germany 308 James H Clark Center, Stanford University, California, USA 313 Institute of Health and Biomedical Innovation, Queensland University of Technology, Brisbane, Queensland 319 30 The Bond, Bovis Lend Lease Head Office, Sydney, Australia 326

Appendix A – Notes on laboratory construction 329 Appendix B – Australian Laboratory Standards 333 Index 341

xii Contents

List of figures

(The list of figures given below are related only to the chapters) 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4

Schedule of accommodation pro forma 3 Typical workflow diagram 5 Typical space relationship diagram (bubble diagram) 6 Variety of accommodation spaces 10

2.1 Room Data Sheet example 18 2.2 Typical scheme plan showing an example of the first attempt to achieve the desired relationship between the various laboratory spaces 20 2.3 Typical developed laboratory floor plan showing the final layout of the example in Figure 2.2 21 3.1 The laboratory module which can be adapted to a variety of functions 26 3.2 Typical cross-section of a laboratory building showing the sub-floor area and accessible roof space to install and maintain services to the laboratory floor 28 3.3 Peristitial space 29 3.4 Typical single- and double-corridor plans 32 4.1

Floor-standing services bollard with movable benches showing the most flexible arrangement particularly suitable for the automated laboratory 42 4.2 Typical laboratory with services bollards, equipment and movable benches showing the modular spacing of bollards at 3 m 42 4.3 Services spine with movable benches and movable over-bench shelves showing the laboratory services on bollards and not on fixed reagent shelves 43 4.4 Adjustable height bench/desk showing one of the several workbenches or equipment benches which can be part of a laboratory bench layout.The provision of some of these benches is required for disabled staff 43

4.5

4.6 4.7

4.8

5.1 5.2

Fixed benches with bench-mounted services bollards and movable under-bench cupboards and drawers showing the same movable reagent shelves as in Figure 4.3 with fixed benches for wet laboratories 44 Anti-vibration bench showing the frame kept clear of the wall to allow space for service pipes 44 Fume cupboard support frame showing the frame kept clear of the wall to allow service pipes and open in front for knee space, access for the disabled and storage cupboards 44 Multi-purpose teaching laboratories showing how students’ benches can be arranged to suit laboratory practical work, lectures or examinations in laboratories fitted with services bollards and movable benches 46 (a) Typical fume cupboard exhaust duct locations 53 (b) A typical fume cupboard with a scrubber 54 Down-draught bench showing the exhaust ventilation duct from the sink below the dissection board 57

11.1 Laboratory drainage concept 92 12.1 12.2

The mechanical engineer is tasked with providing these benefits 99 An example of laboratory AHU plant schematic 101

13.1

Services spine details 118

14.1 14.2 14.3

Cost planning and budget monitoring – procedure flowchart 127 Bills of quantities (B of Q) – production flowchart 128 Post-contract administration – procedure flowchart (monthly cycle) 129

xiv List of figures

List of colour plates

(The list of colour plates given below are related only to the chapters) 1 Typical floor-standing services bollard showing the flexible connections from the bollard to the movable sink bench 2 Typical arrangement of equipment, movable benches and services bollard showing the electronic data and power cables draped between connections, off the bench 3 Typical Laboratory with pendant bollards servicing instrumentation showing the high degree of flexibility with no fixed elements on the floor 4 Typical laboratory with floor-standing bollards, showing the flexibility of movable benches and floor-standing or bench-mounted equipment 5 Typical laboratory with instrumentation on movable benches showing the variety of movable units 6 Compactus design without floor track can be relocated 7 Filtration recirculatory fume cupboard (Chapter 5) 8 Local exhaust (Chapter 5) 9 Fireproof floor penetration of services 10 Door with hinged panel for extra width access for large equipment 11 Island benches with escape corridor in high hazard laboratory 12 Glass doors to cool room for easy access by staff 13 Exposed services in medical research laboratory for ease of change (Chapter 3 and Case study 4) 14 The Space Lab Kit-of-parts laboratory system furniture: (a) fixed services spine and bollards 15 The Space Lab Kit-of-parts laboratory system furniture: (b) add Movable benches as required 16 The Space Lab Kit-of-parts laboratory system furniture: (c) add reagent shelves as required 17 Microscopy requires adjustable height benches 18 Student computer resource centres need to be available in the evening

19 Gas cylinders installed on service balconies adjacent to the laboratories on each floor 20 All services exposed for changing requirements of Proteome research instrumentation 21 Sketch development of the buoyancy ventilation concept.The figure shows provision of low-level inlets and the incorporation of 1 volume and high-level outlets to relieve hot air (Chapter 9) 22 Further sketch development of the buoyancy ventilation concept.The figure shows the incorporation of atrium destratification devices to prevent hot air infiltration into the open plan offices at the upper levels (Chapter 9) 23 Computer simulation of glare (Chapter 9) 24 Computer simulation of daylight availability (Chapter 9) 25 Computer simulation of visual environment (Chapter 9) 26 CFD study of containment (Chapter 12) 27 CFD study of interaction of air diffusion patterns with laboratory users and furniture (Chapter 12) 28 Options for water-based cooling systems on display (Chapter 12) 29 Indirect shadowless lighting (Chapter 13)

xvi List of colour plates

Acknowledgements

I would like to thank the following for contributing their own chapters: Matthew Jessup, Senior Environmental Analyst and Su-fern Tan, Environmental Analyst, Advanced Environmental Concepts Pty Ltd (Chapter 9) Caroline Langley, Director, IPM (Chapter 10) Livio Chiarot, Director, Acor Consultants (Chapter 11) Robert Lord, Senior Engineer Lincolne Scott (Chapter 12) James McPherson, Manager, Building and Industrial Services, GHD (Chapter 13) Ken Mc Gowan, Senior Partner,WT Partnership (Chapter 14) Doug Pottrell, Manager, School of Molecular and Biomedical Science, University of Adelaide (Chapter 15) I would also like to thank the architects and their clients for contributing the 43 international case studies The following photographers are credited for the listed colour plates: Rob Viglino of Camera Vision for Plates 1, 4, 6, 7, 9–17, 19, 20, 30, 31, 36, 37, 43–46, 49–53 Eric Sierins of Max Dupain & Associates for Plates 32 and 33 Mike Chorley for Plate 3 Richard Glover for Plates 38, 54–56 Gerrit Engel for Plates 57–59 Morley von Sternberg for Plates 39 and 40 Stuart Woods for Plates 41 and 42 James Terry of Mooki Media for Plates 47 and 48 John Marmaras for Plates 62–64 Brian Griffin for all other Plates

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Introduction

As the title suggests this book will guide clients, laboratory staff, architects, engineering consultants and project construction managers through the design process for a laboratory project. The following represents an approach to the design of laboratory buildings, particularly the interior layout and furniture, which I have developed as a specialist laboratory design consultant. As I believe that safety in laboratories is one of the most important design criteria, I became involved in the Australian Standard AS 2982 ‘Laboratory Design and Construction’ as a committee member representing the Australian Institute of Architects. I also lecture on this subject and always stress the importance of the safety aspects in laboratory design. Another important design criterion is the ergonomics of the workplace to provide the best possible working environment for the laboratory staff. In the past scientists have been frustrated by their old facilities.Their efficiency is impaired and their fixed benches are like a straitjacket! So laboratory facilities should be designed for maximum flexibility in arranging the equipment and movable workbenches. With the assistance of a specialist joinery company, KPD Pty Limited, I have designed a laboratory furniture product, Space Lab, now manufactured in Australia and Europe. Feedback from completed installations over the past ten years has provided invaluable user advice for improving the furniture product. Equipment and instrumentation manufacturers try to keep up with changes in laboratory practice. As facility designers we also have to respond to the new requirements. I have used some of my commissions to illustrate my design philosophy and methodology. The examples selected are designs which were not compromised by site, building or other constraints. I have also included a number of case studies to illustrate the designs by other architects who have described their design solutions to a variety of briefs and contributed their drawings and photographs.

Regulations and standards are being revised continually. You must obtain the current editions. Likewise laboratory equipment, water and gas fittings are continually being improved by their manufacturers, so I have not included any technical data. Manufacturers are very willing to supply their current trade literature. While laboratory regulations/standards and laboratory products/equipment are changing and vary from country to country, good design principles are universal and are the subject of this book. Since the research into laboratory facilities by the Nuffield Foundation for Architectural Studies (1961) titled ‘The Design of Research Laboratories’ published by Oxford University Press and later the more significant research work by the Laboratories Investigations Unit (LIU) published in 13 Papers from 1969 to 1981 by the UK Government Department, I have undertaken my own research into user requirements and describe my design solutions and recommendations in the first eight chapters. I have not included special-purpose laboratories as the client will be a specialist, will be fully informed on the requirements, and the brief will be more prescriptive than for the general laboratories. While Chapter 1 is principally directed to the Laboratory Client and Chapters 2–15 are directed to the Design and Construction Team, everybody should benefit by reading all the parts. Since the first and second editions were written there have been several significant developments in laboratory design. Some of these were mentioned as trends and prophesies. Most have now materialised, and we have addressed these issues in this third edition. While the first edition was primarily written from an architect/laboratory design consultant’s viewpoint based on 15 years of design consultancy in the industry, I have realised the need for other members of the laboratory design team to be represented.The members I have selected to contribute the new chapters are those who can have a significant effect on the building design. Other members of the design team are also essential, and I believe the trend of engaging more specialist consultants, such as IT consultants, can only improve the development of best practice in laboratory design. We now have 43 case studies from around the world; some completed, some under construction, some at design stage, and even two competition entries that were not selected. All the case studies are significant and contribute in one way or another to the advancement of laboratory design.

xx Introduction

Summary of recommendations

I would like to make special mention of the following design issues which are described in more detail in the text and case studies.

Design for change All design decisions should be made on the premise that the function, space, staff and location will change.

Design for the computer More and more tasks are undertaken with computers – computer modelling, data acquisition, data analysis and the virtual experiment, all have huge impacts on facility design.

Break down the barriers The trend now is for scientists from different disciplines to work together.They used to be scattered across the university campus but are now being brought together under one roof. On a smaller scale, open planning can encourage professional interaction between disciplines.

Facilitate scientific creativity Architects can bring scientists together. Chance encounters can spark new directions in research. Small spaces at high traffic nodes such as staircase landings can allow colleagues to take time off for a chat. Shared facilities is another opportunity for informal meetings.

Design generic, not specific The laboratory design should be generic, rather than specific.The design of both the building structure and internal spaces will be based on the ‘laboratory module’ which is adaptable to either laboratory workbenches or any of all the other functions.

Permanent structures All fixed structures such as stairs and lifts should not be an obstruction within the laboratory/support/workstations’ flexible space.

Connectivity Inter-floor stairs in a covered atrium enhance the sense of being part of a scientific community.

Green Room A balcony meeting room is ‘green’ because it is both outside and also a similar casual meeting room as the Green Room back stage.

Chilled ceilings Apart from the advantages of providing cool air to a laboratory without draughts, chilled ceilings or chilled beams reduce the height of the building and the capital costs.

Building energy rating systems Most countries have some form of rating the energy of the building design.The Australian Building Greenhouse Rating (ABGR), the LEED system in the USA and the BREEAM system in the UK are examples but unfortunately all refer to office buildings.They encourage energy efficient design whether they are mandatory or voluntary.

Decentralised air handling To avoid cross-contamination and allow detoxification if needed the whole building should not have a central air-conditioning system. Decentralised air conditioning should be done for each floor, parts of each floor or even for each individual laboratory, to suit the laboratory needs. xxii Summary of recommendations

Peristitial space The provision of services to a single-storey laboratory poses few problems but multi-storey laboratory buildings need very careful planning unless a peristitial space or interstitial space is designed.

Reticulated services The reticulation of piped services (gases, water, etc.) and liquid waste plumbing should not be enclosed in vertical ducts or false ceilings as they cannot be identified, maintained, changed or replaced without structural alterations. In emergency the isolating valves need to be found quickly and shut off. Gas lines in confined spaces can in time create an explosive mixture.

Standards and regulations As laboratories can contain hazardous substances, flammable liquids and many other lifethreatening risks, all aspects of laboratory design need to create a safe working environment. Standards and building regulations are the essential reference for the design team.

New technology Both laboratory owner and design professionals need to acquaint themselves with the new building technologies which have proved to be successful and visit laboratories which have installed them. Some of these installations are illustrated and described throughout the book, such as glass doors to coolrooms, auto retrieval of consumables, chilled beams and ceilings, specimen conveyor systems, compactus systems without floor tracks and recirculatory filtration fume cupboards.

Zero emission to the environment Community concerns for the environment are increasing the need for community involvement in a consultative process before proposals for a laboratory project become firm in terms of a building design particularly if zero emissions are not proposed.

Energy-efficient designs An awareness of energy efficiency and reduction in greenhouse gas emissions has led to the integration of the principles of ecologically sustainable design. Exploiting the characteristics of convection, prevailing breezes, solar energy, heat banks and even subterranean heat exchange are all evolving technologies with particular implications for laboratory building designs. Summary of recommendations xxiii

Professional interaction The need for laboratory planning to facilitate, indeed encourage, professional interaction is recognised as ideas can spring to mind when informal interaction occurs.

Movable laboratory benches With more automation, particularly in pathology and other high volume routine testing, movable benches are appropriate.There are several case studies to illustrate this design, in addition to the details in chapter 4. My particular interest in laboratory furniture design, which I continue to develop as new user requirements are presented to me, stems from the fact that the laboratory furniture is the interface between user and the building.

Shadowless lighting Visual acuity is enhanced by shadowless indirect lighting with improved energy conservation.

Laboratory services to the benches Services such as power, data and gases should not be reticulated in a duct above the bench as this horizontal fixture will be an obstruction to large bench-mounted equipment. Reagent shelves should be removable so that they too are not an obstruction over the bench.

Sound attenuation A new noise attenuating fabric covered with very thin washable plastic can reduce the problem of noisy equipment.

Safe work environment Design a safe work environment not relying on the minimum standards and regulations and also considering all conceivable situations resulting from change. For example, a stationery store room with no mechanical ventilation should have an air-quality monitor because the room may become a store containing a substance creating oxygen depletion.

xxiv Summary of recommendations

Chapter 1 Design brief

1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10 1.11 1.12 1.13 1.14 1.15

Initiating the brief Generic laboratories Type and function of the laboratory Staff Hazards Work space, benches and services Storage Equipment Work environment Staff facilities Meeting rooms Car parking Visitors Security Case studies

1.1 Initiating the brief The brief for a new laboratory or laboratory alterations is the description of the owner/users’ requirements.This brief, known as the program in the USA, should be as complete as possible or there will be serious consequences later, in terms of arguments, extra costs and redesign, even reconstruction. As an architect and laboratory design consultant, I generally find my clients have been waiting a long time for their new laboratory and cannot believe that the project has really been funded. So they are not well motivated to find time in their busy work schedule to prepare a complete brief. A good technique I use to extract the information is to show examples of laboratory briefs I have received from other clients and which have been successful. These examples jog their memory and prompt contradictions which lead them to formulate their own brief. I cannot stress too much the need to impress on those responsible for the brief the importance of their task. It has been said so often, because it is so true, that the building design is only as good as the brief. To avoid overwhelming your staff with a huge questionnaire, start the process by having them summarise staff lists, description of laboratory type and function. Meet to review that summary and then build on it with more and more detail until you have a complete document of all your requirements. This summary is the Schedule of accommodation and will be continually updated through the design briefing process (Figure 1.1).

2 Laboratory Design Guide

CLIENT or JOB NAME: PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE OF ACCOMMODATION

Page No:

Laboratory group/section/sub-compartment: Staff in lab: Partitioned spaces

Floor area

Total floor area of enclosed spaces

Equipment and manual benchwork

Dimensions – length × depth × height in cm

Description

m2

Extra bench length

Total length of benches & equipment in general laboratory

Laboratory services – gas, water, power

cm

Figure 1.1 Schedule of accommodation pro forma

Design brief 3

1.2 Generic laboratories If the brief is prepared by asking each member of the laboratory to state their individual requirements and then passing all this information to the laboratory designer to incorporate into the building, you may satisfy the existing staff but are unlikely to satisfy any new staff. Alterations to the laboratory spaces and furniture to suit future staff will be costly. Extreme cases of individual choice can leave you with ‘white elephants’ that other staff cannot use. By all means follow the first step above, but then somebody has to rationalise the various requirements. This operation needs diplomacy but a sense of resolve. A laboratory development committee can sometimes do this job with more authority and impartiality. Whoever undertakes this task may not realise all the options available in terms of new generation furniture and servicing systems. Better that the laboratory designer is introduced at this early stage, before the staff have their new dream laboratory space firmly entrenched in their mind. So basically do not follow the individual with extraordinary requirements but seek a compromise which will satisfy most of the needs and will also suit the next staff to work in that facility. This design concept is called generic laboratories. Rationalisation does not have to take away the individual’s right to choose for themselves. From my experience a successful technique was to show the laboratory staff a ‘family’ of compatible modular workstations and storage units from which they selected their individual needs. As this series of units had been designed to cater for a variety of laboratory functions the staff had no problem and there was no vexed process of rationalisation. Examples of generic laboratory furniture systems are illustrated in Chapter 4.

1.3 Type and function of the laboratory The laboratory manager needs to describe the type and function of the laboratory in lay terms as the brief will be read by architects and engineering consultants who may not be familiar with all the scientific vocabulary. When writing the description, keep the reader in mind; you are not writing this for your colleagues. Your description of the functions can take the form of a workflow – for example, in a pathology laboratory: receive specimens, record data and relabel specimen, load into trays, separate in centrifuge, reload in separate trays, distribute to laboratory departments, test specimens and report, return to data entry. Figure 1.2 shows a typical workflow diagram. On the other hand, you may describe a procedure or practice which does not have a workflow but several associated functions. The description of the laboratory functions should be accompanied by a space relationship diagram, also known as a ‘bubble diagram’ (Figure 1.3). In your bubble diagram show a thick line between bubbles when functional spaces need to be directly adjacent, a medium line when spaces need to be close but not adjacent and a thin line when access by corridor is sufficient. 4 Laboratory Design Guide

CYTOGENETICS

INTERNAL REPORTS CUSTOMER SERVICE

EXTERNAL REPORTS COURIER

MOLECULAR GENETICS ANATOMICAL PATHOLOGY

DATA ENTRY

BLOOD COLLECTOR

COURIER/ESKY

CYTOLOGY SPECIMEN RECEPTION

SPECIMENS PORTER/TUBE

INTERNAL/ OTHER STAFF

MICROBIOLOGY

VIROLOGY SPECIMEN PREPARATION

CORE LABORATORY

IMMUNOLOGY

SPECIAL CHEMISTRY COURIER/ ESKY

BLOOD TRANSFUSION/ CROSS MATCH SAMPLES IN SAMPLES OUT

Design brief 5

REPORTS OUT

Figure 1.2 Typical workflow diagram

Break-out Barbecue Area

Reference Library

Staff Dining

Conference Room

Technical Manager

Toilets

Admin. Staff Office

Samples to be Tested & Despatched

Sample Prep. Crushing Noisy Equipment

Electrical Assessment & Investigation

Wet Chemistry Material Testing

Investigation Dust Explosion

Breathing Apparatus Gas Monitor

Occupational Hygiene

Bulk Chemical & General Stores

Balances & Microscopes

Gas Analysis Workshop

Stores In/ Waste Out

Gas Mixing

DMR Garage

Mobile Labs

Direct Connection Direct Relationship

Figure 1.3 Typical space relationship diagram (bubble diagram)

6 Laboratory Design Guide

Gas Cylinder Storage

open planned laboratory

Entry

open planned laboratory

Meeting Room

Lab Staff Offices

The design team will use the client’s bubble diagram to arrange the various spaces in the most desirable relationship to one another.

1.4 Staff The list of the laboratory staff should include a brief job description of each member. Each staff member’s responsibility will also be related to a functional space, so it will be necessary to decide if their write-up workstation is to be part of the functional laboratory space or separate, and how separate. From my experience there seems to be three schools of thought when it comes to locating staff.The three locations are: A. Adjacent to a dedicated laboratory workbench and generally at the window end of the bench, unless the workbench is a hazardous area. B. Within the laboratory space but not immediately adjacent and partitioned, generally shared with other staff in the same laboratory. C. Not within the laboratory group but separated by a dividing corridor. Option A appears to be favoured by staff who are working on an individual project and who need to keep an eye on their work but which is not particularly hazardous. Option B appears to be favoured by both staff and management. Staff feel they are close enough to their work and management feel that staff are safer if write-up time is not spent within the relatively hazardous laboratory environment. Management also appear to be wary of staff becoming too territorial, particularly if the function of the laboratory is quite dynamic and likely to change. Option C appears to be favoured for safety and for energy conservation.The laboratory environmental requirements of controlled temperature, humidity and clean air cannot be achieved without high energy consumption. On the other hand, the office environmental requirements can be achieved with relatively low energy consumption, particularly if the architect designs the building envelope to the principles of passive energy, maximising solar energy and prevailing breezes (see Section 1.9 – Work environment). From the point of view of occupational health and safety Option A is not recommended as it can never be guaranteed that the benchwork will not be hazardous.

1.5 Hazards The hazards associated with the laboratory need to be clearly defined and should be listed with their location. Hazards in laboratories are generally the subject of standards and regulations which should be called up in the design brief, under each item. Some hazardous laboratory operations will result in chemical waste, biohazard waste, laboratory sharps, fumes and other by-products which need to be removed.These wastes Design brief 7

and their methods of disposal need to be described in detail as provision will have to be made in the building design. The following examples are by no means an exhaustive list of hazards but all laboratory users will know the particular hazards within their laboratory function and list them accordingly. a. Procedures involving toxic, noxious, flammable and corrosive chemicals requiring the provision of a ‘fume cupboard’ to protect the operator from harmful airborne contaminants, splashing and minor explosions. b. Procedures requiring a down-draught workbench, such as in anatomical dissection and decanting chemicals to exhaust the vapour downwards and away from the operator. c. Laboratory procedures requiring protection of the operator from biological hazards such as bacteria, virus, pathogens, etc. and provision of a ‘biological safety cabinet’. d. Procedures, typically in pharmaceutical manufacturing laboratories, which require a supply of clean air where a product can be handled without fear of contamination.This is the function of a ‘laminar flow cabinet’.These procedures can also be carried out in a ‘clean room’. e. Flammable liquids to be stored within the laboratory requiring the provision of a ‘flammable liquids safety cabinet’.The estimated maximum volume of litres/m2 needs to be given in the brief as it will have considerable effect on the ‘hazard rating’ of the laboratories and the maximum allowable floor area for each hazard-rated laboratory. f. Corrosive chemicals to be stored within the laboratory are a hazard to instruments and other equipment. The requirements should be for an externally ventilated cupboard. g. Equipment which tests the compressive or tensile strength of materials and which could propel part or all of the equipment or materials being tested, requires special benches with screens to protect the operator. h. High voltage equipment with its special operator-protective requirements. i. Procedures involving radioactive materials. j. Radiation, ionising and non-ionising. k. Visitors to the laboratory are a hazard to staff, equipment and themselves. Remember that a hazard will be recognised as such by staff who are familiar with it, but may not be by visitors or new staff. The laboratory owner has a legal duty of care to staff and visitors.Visitors should always be accompanied by staff designated in the visitors’ book at the security entry desk. If visitors should not be exposed to particular unsafe procedures or hazards it will be necessary to contain these hazards within a ‘restricted area’, clearly signed ‘No entry unless authorised’. Another approach is to have a visitors’ gallery overlooking the laboratories for public relations, particularly educational but also to provide a positive physical barrier to protect visitors. The importance of considering the employer’s duty of care to visitors cannot be overstressed and needs to be addressed in the brief.

8 Laboratory Design Guide

1.6 Work space, benches and services The design brief should list the various areas of accommodation. Some areas will be quite simply an office for an individual but others will be larger to accommodate a number of staff performing various duties. So, typically, we will have several individual partitioned spaces for executives, laboratory managers, administration managers, meeting rooms, staff lunch rooms, shower/change rooms and toilets. There will be small laboratory spaces requiring partitions for environmental control, prevention of contamination, sound-proofing or other reasons. Then there will be the larger laboratory spaces which are open-planned. Finally there will be all the support spaces such as cold rooms, store rooms, glassware wash-up and others. This variety of accommodation is illustrated in Figure 1.4. The individual offices will be the easiest to define in the brief because the floor space allocation for offices is well established.The other individual spaces such as cold rooms, store rooms, etc. are also easy to define but the laboratories, both individual and open-planned, are the areas requiring the most work for both laboratory staff and laboratory designer. Over the years I have developed a design technique, which will be described in Chapter 2 – Design methodology. This technique has proved itself on numerous commissions, so I commend it to you for your consideration. The brief for the laboratory spaces should be defined as follows. List all laboratory functions in a Schedule of Accommodation (Figure 1.1). Under each functional space list the equipment on the left hand side of the page. Opposite each item, indicate the length of bench or floor space required for each item, including any associated bench space required. In other words, if an item is 0.6 m across the front and you need 0.5 m on the left for, say, a samples tray and 0.7 m on the right for, say, write-up purposes the length of bench is shown as 1.8 m. When you are listing each item of the equipment, state the services you will require for that equipment, such as AC power, natural gas, nitrogen, etc., and the type of gas outlet. The two types are quick-connect and push-on hose fitting. The latter is only suitable for low pressure and vacuum. If the bench-mounted or floor-standing equipment is deeper than, say, 600 mm you will need to mention this on the list. Later, in Chapter 2, I will explain how your bench lengths are used to calculate the floor area requirement for each laboratory.

1.7 Storage Storage is often poorly considered, even forgotten. To avoid benches being used for storage your storage requirements need to be detailed carefully in your brief. It is absolutely critical to have adequate provision for storage of hazardous substances, equipment and consumables to ensure good housekeeping and therefore safe laboratory operations.

Design brief 9

Safety equipment

Lockers Coolroom

Shelves

WET/DRY LAB MODULES Partitioned only where required (PC3, Micro)

CT cabinets

ENTRY/EXIT

Freezer

COOL RM/CT CABINETS

Safety Cabinet

WORKSTATIONS (Computer Modelling)

Compactus

LAB WRITE-UP

CONSUMABLES

COMPUTER 'HOT DESK' (Internet Cafe) BALANCE ROOM

OFFICE PARTITIONED

NOISY EQUIPMENT

GROUP LEADER

CASUAL MEETINGS

SCHEDULED MEETINGS

Figure 1.4 Variety of accommodation spaces

10 Laboratory Design Guide

EQUIPMENT (Not in use) STORE

Consider how you receive your chemicals, glassware, plasticware and paper.You may need a receiving area for unpacking if you do not have supplies delivered directly to their destination. Some users like to store supplies in the original packaging to save decanting or to make re-ordering easier. In that case your shelving requirement is likely to be open, widely spaced and deep to accommodate the large packages. If, on the other hand, you break open the packaging and distribute the contents onto shelves or drawers, you need to specify the sizes to fit the size of the articles. For safety and good ergonomics I always recommend narrow shelves to avoid stacking bottles behind each other and always full-height cupboards to avoid bending down and reaching into deep under-bench cupboards. Ergonomically, drawers under workbenches provide easier access than cupboards. So if you decide to specify drawers, make sure you also specify the clear height within the drawers to accommodate your requirements. With the increasing use of equipment and instrumentation on benches, storing reagents on shelves behind benches is to be avoided. If in chemical and pathology laboratories there is a requirement for shelves adjacent to manual work, be sure to specify that you require the reagent shelves to be movable. If the workbench changes from a manual area to a location for large instrumentation such as auto-analysers, the reagent shelf can be lifted off to provide more depth on the bench. As with workbench requirements, your storage requirements should be expressed in terms of shelf length in metres and drawer sizes.Your brief should subdivide your requirements also into open shelves, closed shelves, closed with glass doors, open in separate store room and specify locations for each storage requirement. Later, in Chapter 2, I will explain how the designer can take your requirements and calculate the floor space requirements of your storage. The latest technology in storage systems which have been installed in our projects are illustrated in the colour section. Glass doors to the cool room provide easy access for staff (Plate 12).The Metro compactus has no floor track so can be easily relocated (Plate 6). The Kardex VCA Vertical Carousel System not only stores consumables but provides automatic retrieval by staff at the upper laboratory level (Plates 50 and 51).

1.8 Equipment For purposes of writing the design brief, the category of equipment can include all floor-mounted items which are not workbenches or storage cupboards.These items are generally refrigerators, freezer cabinets, incubators, ovens, centrifuges, mixers, and now, increasingly, large auto-analysers and other combined instrumentation. When listing your laboratory equipment, the size of the equipment in the brief should include the clearance space required for servicing which is recommended by the supplier. The laboratory designer may not be familiar with some of your equipment and all the relevant information should be supplied in the brief. Design brief 11

1.9 Work environment Probably more important than for any other work area, the laboratory has special environmental requirements which need to be carefully considered at the design brief stage. The high costs associated with providing the ideal environment can be reduced if there is a passive energy building design philosophy.Your brief, however, is not going to provide the design solution but you should express your views on the subject. The brief should list your requirements in terms of temperature and variation limits, humidity control and, most important, the percentage of recirculated air. Some laboratories cannot tolerate any recirculated air and require 100% fresh air. Your requirements for temperature and humidity will be relatively easy to accommodate but if you require 100% fresh air, because you cannot tolerate air returning to the laboratory through the system, this will add greatly to the project costs and should be carefully considered. The reasons for not recirculating air are generally to avoid accumulating hazardous airborne contaminants or to avoid cross-contamination. You may also have hot and cold rooms, in which case you will specify the temperature and humidity ranges required. The mechanical engineering consultant designing your ventilation systems will have to calculate the total heat load generated by the laboratory equipment. The heat load is available from the supplier of the equipment. Another important factor affecting the design of the air conditioning is the quantity, type and estimated frequency of use of fume cupboards. If the fume cupboard manufacturer is selected during the preparation of the design brief, the mechanical engineering consultant will be given the best information to work on. In selecting the manufacturer you should consider quality, performance, energy saving and compliance with the fume cupboard standards. If you decide to have recirculatory filtration fume cupboards to protect the environment, reduce greenhouse gas emissions and save energy it is all the more important to select your fume cupboard manufacturer carefully. Under most standards, users have to complete a questionnaire so that the manufacturer can select the filters and ‘scrubbing’ to provide zero emission.The mechanical engineer will also need to know if recirculatory fume cupboards are selected as he will not have to provide the ‘balance’ air which otherwise would be extracted by the fume cupboard and ducted to the exhaust stacks.The air-conditioning costs are substantially reduced. See Case study 32 for the best example.

1.10 Staff facilities Unlike other work environments the laboratory is a potentially hazardous area, but in a well-managed and well-designed facility hazards can be kept under control. Regulations and standards for occupational health and safety cover the laboratory work place quite thoroughly and the design team will necessarily have to be conversant with all 12 Laboratory Design Guide

the requirements for both the work place and facilities. A professional OH & S consultant should be part of the design team (see Section 2.1 – Project team). The design brief will need to include the staff rooms and equipment required for your particular laboratory size, type and staffing.This will include a first-aid room, lunch room with drinking water, locker room and toilets with showers. Access for the disabled needs to be addressed in the brief. If you express a preference for a single-storey laboratory the provision of access for disabled staff and visitors will of course be easy to facilitate. If, however, the building needs to be multi-storied the problem of egress by the disabled escaping from a fire on an upper storey can be solved but with great difficulty.

1.11 Meeting rooms The last but by no means the least important functional space requirement in the laboratory design brief are the meeting rooms. Depending on the type and size of the laboratory building, and on the particular needs, there may be a requirement for small meeting rooms, medium-size conference rooms and a seminar auditorium. An example is a research organisation which has 200 staff. They are satisfied with their variety of meeting rooms which are three small meeting rooms to seat 8–10, a conference facility to seat 40 with an operable partition and a sloping floor auditorium to seat all staff. Meeting rooms need to be sound-proof and this requirement can only be achieved in divisible conference facilities with the best operable walls to an acoustic consultant’s specifications. Facilities for teleconferences may be required in the small meeting rooms and electronic whiteboards are useful for recording proceedings. Overhead projectors may be appropriate for the conference rooms which should have a level floor allowing various seating configurations. In the auditorium, film projection and TV monitors have been replaced by computer and video projectors which produce bright, clear definition images displayed on large screens at the front visible from the rear seats. Video cameras with zoom lenses in booths at the rear can record proceedings for transmission to other sites but mainly for the laboratory’s own resource collection. Toilets need to be adjacent to the auditorium to avoid visitors searching for them through the building. Essential for the proper function of participant interaction is an adjacent space, adequate in size to accommodate the auditorium capacity standing in small groups for discussion and light refreshments. Noticeboards to display the seminar programme and information should be located away from external and auditorium doors. Direct entry for visitors separate to Design brief 13

the building entry may be desirable particularly if the facilities are let out to the community at large. As laboratories are a smoke-free environment, you will have to comply with the law in your country or state regarding provision of smokers’ facilities.

1.12 Car parking The design brief should include the space required for staff car parking and selection of covered or open space. Car parking for visitors should also be included. Some laboratories have couriers delivering specimens/samples for testing and their access to the laboratory is an important part of the workflow. In any event, check with the local building authority for their car parking regulations.

1.13 Visitors Some laboratories encourage visitors to inspect their operation as part of their public relations programme. Others exclude all visitors except those who are involved in their operation, such as trade representatives and service personnel.You will need to consider and specify the access, waiting space, reporting-in and visitors’ toilets in your design brief.

1.14 Security As laboratories are a hazardous work environment the staff know the risks and follow the proper safety behaviour. However visitors, particularly intruders, are not aware of the hazards and are a danger to themselves and to the laboratory. Security has to be considered as one of the most important design problems. The solution can generally be designed into the scheme but it does deserve respect. The design solution which is a simple physical barrier with the minimum of entry/exit points is generally better than relying on complicated human behaviour and electronic wizardry. It needs to form part of the design brief or will be difficult to achieve later.

1.15 Case studies Finally, the case studies in this book show a wide variety of laboratories, both in function and size.Your project may be similar to one or more, and your staff could compare the designs and relate them to the brief for your own project. The case studies can also be interesting as a checklist, showing all the elements that made up the completed laboratories.

14 Laboratory Design Guide

Chapter 2 Design methodology

2.1 Project team 2.2 Project meetings 2.3 Project programme and budget 2.4 Returning the brief 2.5 Design synthesis 2.6 Design development 2.7 Contract documentation 2.8 Construction management

2.1 Project team The professional team to be assembled for a laboratory building should be selected from consulting architects, designers, engineers and quantity surveyors who have had recent experience and developed expertise in the design and construction of laboratory buildings. Specialist consultants in laboratory design, occupational health and safety, environment and energy, lighting, acoustics and IT provide the essential expertise which the primary consultants, as general practitioners, may not have. Most major firms will claim to have had relevant experience but laboratories are not like other industrial or academic buildings and require very considerable recent experience in the field. Insist on having the names of the individual professionals who are nominated to work on the project. The individuals who were responsible for the nominated previous experience may no longer be with the firm. They should all have a proven track record and should preferably have worked together before on laboratory projects, as laboratory design requires very close cooperation within the project design team. The client should inspect the completed laboratory buildings nominated by the prospective professionals before selecting the team. Chapter 10, contributed by Caroline Langley, describes how essential it is to have a specialist OHS & E Consultant as part of the project team.

2.2 Project meetings At the first project meeting the project design team will be introduced to the client’s representatives. It is very important to establish right from the outset the lines of communication. As soon as the client has completed the brief, having covered at least all 16 Laboratory Design Guide

items in Chapter 1 – Design brief, copies should be distributed to all design consultants. Questions on the brief will come quickly as the project design team will want to have a clear understanding of the client’s requirements. The laboratory staff responsible for the brief should use lay terms if possible but technical terms may sometimes be unavoidable and may need clarification. The first meeting should determine the frequency of project meetings, usually weekly and the day of the week which suits everybody. The first few meetings will probably be the most important and should be attended by all. Later, when a pattern is established and members become more interactive outside meetings, the main players may be the only permanent members. The importance of minuting the decisions of each meeting, corrected at following meetings if necessary, with an ‘action’ column cannot be overemphasised. There has never been a brief prepared which has not been amended and expanded. New members to the committee need to be informed of decisions made prior to their joining the team. It is helpful to the project design team to ‘illustrate’ the descriptions in the brief of laboratory functions and laboratory equipment by touring the client’s existing laboratory. It will be an opportunity to explain the deficiencies and inadequacies of the present facility and why indeed they have to refit or build a new laboratory building. It is sometimes appropriate for the meeting to adjourn to other laboratory buildings, both well-established and recently completed, to illustrate good design or to show what not to do.

2.3 Project programme and budget The design brief should only describe the laboratory users’ requirements. If the client has target dates and funding limits the client should issue a separate document to instruct the project design team on the design and construction programme and the project budget.

2.4 Returning the brief After completing their analysis of the brief, target dates and budget, the design team should ‘return’ the brief to the client with their recommendations as specialist consultants, for which they were employed. The client will agree with some of their recommendations, not with others, and the brief is amended accordingly. The architect’s submission generally takes the form of function/room data sheets in the design team’s own format, without changing user requirements. The term ‘needs analysis’ is sometimes used for this format (see Figure 2.1). At this time, it may be appropriate for the design team to take the client to completed laboratories to illustrate their recommendations. Design methodology 17

Room Data Sheet Room/Space Name:

Room No:

Occupants:

Area (m2):

Function:

Adjacent to:

Physical Containment Category: PC2 PC3 PC1

Electrical Power GPOs 3-Phase Stand-by UPS Clock Lighting 500 lux Natural Special

Equipment Balance benches Refrigerators Freezers Cool rooms Autoclave Centrifuge Biological cab. Laminar flow

N/A

Mechanical Air condition comfort Temperature Humidity Air only Exhaust Fume cupboards Perchloric

Furniture Benches (900 high) Workstations (750 high) Underbench Cupboards Drawers Shelves Overbench Cupboards Shelves Cupboards (2100 high) Shelves (2100 high) Filing cabinets Safety cabinets

Additional Information: Compressed Air, Vacuum

Figure 2.1 Room Data Sheet example

18 Laboratory Design Guide

Hydraulic Potable water Lab water Hot water RO water Milli-Q Sinks Safety shower Hand basin Glass washer

Finishes Partitions Solid Glass Floors Vinyl Tiles Ceiling Lab type Acoustic Blinds Brown out Black out

Data & Comms Phone Intercom Modem Fax Data (LAN)

Gases Natural gas Oxygen CO2 Carbogen Nitrogen Other

Security Card entry Key entry Alarm

2.5 Design synthesis Having analysed the design brief, the specialist laboratory design consultant will commence the process of assimilation and synthesis. My design philosophy has always been to develop the building design from the interior, the work place as illustrated in Figure 1.4. The various functional spaces are assembled in the relationships shown by the client’s Space Relationship Diagram or ‘Bubble Diagram’ (Figure 1.3).The floor area in square metres for each functional space is estimated at this stage by multiplying the length of workbenches and floor-standing equipment by a factor of 1.75. If, however, you want to allow for unforeseen and future requirements, and if the budget allows, multiply by a factor of up to 2.00.The length of workbenches and floor-standing equipment is shown in the Client’s Schedule (Figure 1.1). At the same time, one has to keep in mind several other considerations, not least of which are the building regulations, codes of practice and standards of one’s country. The design synthesis is a very complex process of amalgamating all the many parts of the laboratory into a whole.The conception may produce more than one design solution and these alternative designs need to be tested against all the user requirements until a preferred scheme is selected. This stage is called the scheme plan and an example is illustrated in Figure 2.2. At this stage we are looking only at the ‘big picture’. Only the main laboratory areas are shown, with the general circulation corridors and the internal laboratory circulation.This diagram will of course reflect the building regulation requirements in terms of fire egress.

2.6 Design development Having agreed on the scheme plan, the design is then developed in more detail particularly with regard to the laboratory workbenches and laboratory services infrastructure as illustrated in Figure 2.3. It is important for the developed design to be complete in all detailed requirements and agreed as the ‘final’ design before the ‘client approved’ plans are passed on to the architects’ contract documentation team.Their responsibility is to take the design drawings and turn them into another form of drawings called ‘building contract documentation’ which can be readily understood by those who will prepare a tender price and have sufficient information to use it later for construction purposes. The contract documentation team will want all design decisions to have been made or their work is delayed by questions and answers.

2.7 Contract documentation The building contract between laboratory owner and building contractor will include the agreement, the contract drawings and the specification. The agreement can take many forms, none of which is the subject of my design guide. The same can be said of the specification except that I will mention a number of design recommendations in later chapters which will form part of the specification. Design methodology 19

20 Laboratory Design Guide Figure 2.2 Typical scheme plan showing an example of the first attempt to achieve the desired relationship between the various laboratory spaces

Design methodology 21

Figure 2.3 Typical developed laboratory floor plan showing the final layout of the example in Figure 2.2

I recommend that the laboratory furniture including benches, workstations, balance benches, equipment frames, storage cupboards and shelves should be manufactured and installed by a joinery subcontractor specialising in laboratory furniture.The subcontractor should be selected after the client has inspected the work of available specialist joiners and obtained designs and quotations from each firm. The selected firm is nominated and their quotation included in the contract documents as a ‘provisional sum’ to be allowed by the main contractor in their tender. I also recommend that essential equipment, such as fume cupboards which are so important to the proper function of the laboratory, should be selected from the available products for their performance and suiting the client’s requirements rather than the lowest tender. The selected manufacturer can be nominated in the tender documents with a provisional sum equivalent to the quotation with a 2-year service agreement.

2.8 Construction management I have assumed in my text that the laboratory building will be designed by a professional design team co-ordinated by the principal consultant, the architect, who will call tenders from building contractors and administer the building contract to completion of construction and the defects liability period. Most of the case studies were delivered by this traditional method. An alternative method of delivery of a project is to appoint a construction manager, who will arrange separate ‘trade packages’ for the separate trades who construct the building. One of the advantages I see in this method is the opportunity to select at the outset an individual who has successfully managed the design and construction of comparable laboratory projects. He or she will have had the relevant experience which is so essential in knowing what to expect and how to deal with the many problems encountered in possibly the most complex of building types, a laboratory. The other advantage is that under this method the tenders for the specialist trade packages, such as the laboratory furniture, fume cupboards, clean rooms, etc., will be from the construction manager’s selected specialist companies. Under the traditional method, the tenders for the whole project are very competitive and may not be based on quotations from specialist subcontractors.

22 Laboratory Design Guide

Chapter 3 Site and buildings

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7

Location Site planning Building design Interior design Special laboratories External bulk storage Teaching laboratories and the virtual experiment

3.1 Location Co-location has become the preferred option for research and development.The university campus, as a traditional example of co-location has been joined by Science & Technology Parks, which fall into two categories. The true Technology parks restrict their tenants to those who are developing their innovative scientific research and need to do this in a creative scientific community with support from finance, venture capital and legal firms who are on site too. While relationships and technology transfer can be forged on line many prefer the face-to-face opportunities to meet and talk in a co-location situation. These small businesses are generally called ‘Incubator or start-up laboratories’. One of the best examples is Case study 31, Liverpool Biosciences Centre, University of Liverpool, UK. The other category is more of a Business Park where anyone can locate, without any criteria for entry. This category is however suitable for routine testing laboratories if they are not QA and R&D laboratories attached to a manufacturing business. Laboratories are classified by the local planning authority in their zoning of the different land uses. Having selected a particular district it is essential to visit the local planning authority to inspect the zoning plan to determine the areas in that district which have been allocated for the laboratory classification. Referring to Section 1.5 – Hazards, it is necessary to discuss the laboratory effluents (liquid, airborne, etc.) described in the brief with the relevant local authorities to check if they have any objections and to receive their instructions for installation of control strategies such as dilution pits and airborne contaminant extraction locations. 24 Laboratory Design Guide

At the same time, the design team should obtain copies of the local planning and building regulations, which may have special conditions in addition to the country or state building code and regulations. It is best to get the neighbours on your side by relieving their anxiety at the prospect of having a laboratory in the immediate vicinity. Better that they learn the facts from you, and your concerns for them, than from the media.

3.2 Site planning Before commencing site planning it is necessary to obtain copies of all relevant regulations governing the location of dangerous or hazardous stores including laboratory gas cylinders and the access for vehicles. These regulations have considerable implications on planning. If the laboratory is not a stand-alone building but is associated with other buildings such as manufacturing, warehousing, administration, engineering, staff cafeteria/amenities and public access showroom, there are building regulations governing the physical separation of the laboratory from all other buildings. This separation can take the form of either a fire-rated isolation wall construction or a given distance of open space between the buildings. Other considerations in site planning will be posed by matters of security and vehicular access both of which are better controlled with physical planning than elaborate electronic devices, subject to control of staff behaviour and accidental human error. Vehicular access is normally restricted to deliveries of laboratory supplies and samples or specimens for testing. From the outside any confusion by visitors can be reduced if the visitors’ entrance is obvious and clearly signposted. This eliminates the possibility of visitors wandering around the site and makes unauthorised visitors more conspicuous. The site plan should be as simple, orderly and regular as possible. It should allow for expansion of the laboratory as an extension of the plan and avoid having to turn into an L-shape, or worse, a separate building. An L-shape extension generally produces confusion at the junction where the linear planning turns the corner. A separate building is not easy to access but can be successful if it is a separate laboratory function.

3.3 Building design My design philosophy is based on looking at the various work places first and systematically building up a picture of the whole work environment – the building. I avoid having any preconceived images of the building. I was once asked at the first briefing session at a university, ‘what will the building look like?’. I just had to admit that I had no idea at all, but quickly explained why I had to go through the design process before any images would start to emerge. Another major flexible design philosophy is to adopt a laboratory module of 3 m which will suit not only wet laboratory benches, instrumentation split-benches but also other functions (see Figure 3.1). Site and buildings 25

26 Laboratory Design Guide

STRUCTURAL GRID 6000

6000

6000

2000

6000

3000

3000

CORRIDOR

SENIOR SCIENTIST 3000

INSTRUMENT LAB 3000

3000

2-MODULE LABORATORY 3000

3000

LABORATORY MODULE

Figure 3.1 The laboratory module which can be adapted to a variety of functions

SENIOR STAFF

MEETING ROOM

CONSUMABLES STORE

3000

3000

3000

Laboratory work calls for controlled environmental conditions. These conditions can be provided by expensive, energised, high-tech equipment or by what is known as passive energy design. The former solves problems created by building designs which are conceived without regard to conservation of energy and the latter, which is fortunately becoming mandatory by some clients and the design philosophy of most architects and mechanical engineers, uses to advantage solar energy and energy generated by the laboratory equipment and occupants. The architects’ role in energy conservation is mainly in the orientation of the building to expose the minimum wall area to solar energy, to use indirect natural sunlight where possible, in, say, non-laboratory spaces, and to design the wall and roof fabric of the building to insulate heat exchange from outside to inside and in reverse, depending on climatic conditions. Direct sunlight onto benches should be avoided as some chemicals can become unstable if exposed for an extended period. Some instruments cannot tolerate direct sunlight. As the design team leader, the architect can encourage the engineering consultants to follow an energy conservation policy recommended by the specialist environmental design consultant on the team (see Chapter 9). Standards recommend levels of illumination at bench level, quality of power supply, quality of laboratory gases, room temperature variation and humidity controls and these recommendations should be followed even if they are not mandatory. More and more standards are becoming mandatory and most clients are adopting these standards as company policy. Figure 3.2 shows a cross-section through a laboratory building which has many desirable features. Firstly, the laboratory is on one level allowing maximum flexibility in rearrangement of departments, level transport of chemicals, glassware and other supplies on trolleys and staff convenience generally. Secondly, the laboratory water, waste, gas and power services can be reticulated in the accessible sub-floor area and supplied to the benches through the floor. Thirdly, the roof space directly over the laboratory can accommodate the air-conditioning equipment and ducts, local exhaust fans and ducts.The ceiling height should be selected to suit the laboratory function and may very well be determined by building regulations. Opinion varies on floor-to-ceiling heights but the lower height, if suitable for the laboratory function, has energy conservation advantages in the reduced volume of conditioned air and electrical power needed for illumination. If the building is multi-storied, an interstitial services floor between the laboratory floors can be a solution to the problem of providing services which are accessible outside the laboratory, but it can be a costly solution (see Case studies 6C and 6D). Figure 3.3 illustrates an external services zone, which I call a peristitial space. The main advantages of a peristitial space as an alternative to an interstitial space, besides the cost saving, is the convenience of changing and maintaining the service equipment and reticulation at the same level as the laboratory it serves without entering and disturbing the staff. Window cleaning is another advantage. In Australia we have to protect the laboratory from direct sunlight under AS/NZS 2982 Part 1 1997 Laboratory Design and Construction. Site and buildings 27

28 Laboratory Design Guide Figure 3.2 Typical cross-section of a laboratory building showing the sub-floor area and accessible roof space to install and maintain services to the laboratory floor

Peristitial space width to suit services Sunscreen to AS/NZS 2982.1 Suspended indirect/ direct lighting View through sun screen

LABORATORY 2700

4000 CLEAR

Laboratory or Roof

Gas/Water and Waste services Dry Bench

Wet Bench

Air-Handling unit for each laboratory

Laboratory or Slab on Ground

PERISTITIAL SERVICE ZONE Services are reticulated externally below and between windows through wall to benches

Suspended indirect/ direct lighting Sunscreen to AS/NZS 2982.1

LABORATORY 2700

4000 CLEAR

Laboratory or Roof

Preferably 2100

Wet or Dry Bench

Wet Bench

Air-Handling unit for each laboratory Gas/Water and Waste services

Sub-Floor space

Ground level varies

SUB-FLOOR SERVICE ZONE Services are reticulated below laboratory floor and through floor slab to benches

Figure 3.3 Peristitial space

Site and buildings 29

One system of sun shading which I recommend is a stainless steel louvered mesh as at the University of Newcastle. The view from the laboratory is not blocked out as with solid louvers.The mesh screen is supported on a light metal frame which also supports the mesh floor and equipment. Fume extraction ducts, A/C ducts, power distribution boxes and reticulation of laboratory power, water, gases and data are fixed to the external wall of the laboratory (see Plate 45). The building facade is a perforated sun screen on metal framing. The equipment and ducts are only visible at night (see Plate 46). Another example of a peristitial space is Case study 42. If the laboratory building is a single storey with floor slab on the ground, a peristitial space can still be the best option as illustrated in Figure 3.3. Figure 3.3 also shows the service ducts and light fittings exposed and not within a false ceiling. I recommend this design for several reasons, which are outlined by Jeff Crosby, Resources and Facilities Manager/Safety Officer of the Centenary Institute of Cancer Medicine & Cell Biology, which is Case study 4, as follows: ‘Our laboratories have sound reducing panels fixed directly to the ceiling slab above, with all fittings hanging off “unistrut” channels also fixed directly to the ceiling slab. (a) There are two main advantages to this system: 1. All fittings, electrical and data cable trays, etc. are exposed, which means we can change/repair services with minimal cost or disruption to the laboratory. We made our first cabling changes one week after we moved in, with no disruption to the laboratory at all! (see Plate 13) 2. By hanging things off the ceiling noise problems are reduced, as the sound waves are prevented from bouncing freely all over the lab. We don’t have problems with echoing, etc. and noise levels are generally lower than they otherwise would have been. (b) Accumulation of dust on exposed fittings has not been a problem. All air into the building is filtered to reduce dust buildup and whilst dust does still accumulate on any exposed surface the amount collecting on ceiling fittings is relatively small.We have not had to clean the fittings since we moved in (1994). (c) In our experience the advantages of having exposed services/fittings far outweigh the issue of potential dust buildup. (d) The labs have been inspected on several occasions by AQUIS (Australian Quarantine Inspection Service) and OGTR (Office of the Gene Technology Regulator) and passed without any problems.’ One of the disadvantages of a multi-storied building is the need for vertical service ducts. Vertical service ducts have in the past contributed to the spread of fire through multi-storied laboratory buildings, so regulations are likely to require these ducts to have fire-rated enclosures. The horizontal reticulated gas services from the vertical ducts to the laboratory benches at each floor should not be covered. If enclosed, gas leaks can build up within the confined space and create an explosion hazard. Standards or regulations require such ducts to be ventilated. If the gas lines are fixed neatly to the wall, they should not be considered an eyesore but a design for easy maintenance and identification if location is needed in a hurry.

30 Laboratory Design Guide

Other disadvantages of a multi-storied building are the need for goods lifts for the safe transportation of flammable liquids, laboratory wastes, bulky stores, and heavy laboratory equipment. Fire-isolated stairs for safe egress of staff escaping from a fire and smoke are an additional cost to multi-storied buildings. The laboratory floor should not be graded to floor wastes but should be level to provide a level surface for movable workbenches, under-bench storage cupboards and drawers and floor-standing equipment. If there is a risk of water overflowing onto the floor from sinks, water baths and equipment it is more effective to install gratings at the door than have a floor waste. Exceptions to the above would be animal rooms and laboratories requiring to be washed, when the wastes should be located in a corner furthest from the door. Laboratories are not washed down as they used to be before due to the current practice of using smaller volumes of liquids with fewer spills. Floor wastes are sometimes installed under safety showers, but for the reasons given in Section 3.4 – Interior design this has some disadvantages. To achieve a clear rectangular laboratory floor space the structural columns should not impinge on the laboratory floor space, so external columns should project outwards and internal columns project into the corridor space.

3.4 Interior design The trend in architecture to irregular, sometimes curve-shaped, spaces, away from the modernist square or rectangular spaces is not suitable for laboratory spaces. Laboratory benches and equipment are rectangular and do not fit into irregular shapes. Alternative floor plans with more than one central corridor are shown in Figure 3.4. The dual corridor plan is generally selected when there are a large proportion of laboratory support facilities such as bulk store rooms, cool rooms, isolation rooms, dark rooms, special instrumentation rooms, autoclave washing facilities, etc. These areas, which can be windowless as staff are not working in there constantly, can be successfully arranged in the central ‘core’, as it is known, between the two corridors. The staff workbenches are then arranged between the two corridors and window walls. A disadvantage of this arrangement is that access to the facilities from the laboratories is across the corridor. The single corridor plan is generally favoured, however, as it is more flexible. The areas on both sides should be the same width for maximum flexibility, so the single corridor should be central. In the past, a plan with central structural columns and an off-set corridor was popular, but with the trend towards more open combined laboratory areas, the unequal widths became restrictive in the allocation and reallocation of spaces. The laboratory support facilities in this plan can be arranged immediately adjacent to the laboratory they serve. If the building shape is irregular, one can still design the plan with the basic principles of the single or dual corridor plans. In at least two instances, to my certain knowledge, architects have designed new laboratory buildings with a central corridor wide enough to accommodate refrigerators! In both cases

Site and buildings 31

32 Laboratory Design Guide LABS

SUPPORT CORRIDOR SUPPORT

LABS

MODEL 1 – SINGLE CORRIDOR

Figure 3.4 Typical single- and double-corridor plans

LABS CORRIDOR

SUPPORT

CORRIDOR

LABS

MODEL 2 – DOUBLE CORRIDOR

Site and buildings 33

Figure 3.4 (Continued)

34 Laboratory Design Guide LABS INTERNAL CORRIDOR SUPPORT

INTERNAL CORRIDOR LABS

MODEL 3 – DOUBLE CORRIDOR, PARTLY WITHIN LABS

Figure 3.4 (Continued)

they claimed to have come to the conclusion that this design was desirable because they had seen wide corridors full of refrigerators and other laboratory equipment during their ‘research’. I was able to explain to the architect that the equipment was in the corridor only because the laboratories were fitted out with fixed benching with no space for floor-standing equipment, so they had no choice but to put the equipment in the corridor. The need for space in laboratories for equipment is mentioned under Section 4.1 – Workbenches. The width of the main central corridor should conform to the building regulations but should not be less than 1500 mm. If it is much wider, there is a temptation to place objects in the corridor and even if they are only temporary they can be an obstruction to the required fire egress width. Corridors should be clear for rapid egress so obstructions of any kind should be avoided. Doors opening into corridors should be recessed. A good rule in laboratory interior design is to arrange the workbenches at right angles to the window walls. This arrangement creates quiet work ‘bays’ free from through-traffic. Also, working at the benches one is neither casting a shadow on the bench nor looking up into the glare from the window. The workbenches can be fitted to the window wall or can be separated from the window wall by a walk aisle. I adopt the latter plan for high risk laboratories such as oils laboratories, where there is a higher risk of fire and an alternative escape is provided by the aisle at the window. The workbenches at right angles to the window walls are called ‘peninsula benches’, and when separated from the wall are called ‘island benches’. If you are considering island benches you have to realise that services will have to come up through the floor or down from the ceiling. Drainage from island benches has to go down through the floor, unless you adopt a pump-out or vacuum extraction system up through the ceiling. Peninsula benches can be serviced from the wall to which they are attached. I try to avoid planning benches against partitions. Facing the wall the worker will not see what is happening in the laboratory, which may be dangerous and the worker is preventing supervision of the bench work. Also the worker may not realise that fellow workers have left the laboratory, and is working in isolation which is not recommended. Under Section 1.4 – Staff, I describe the three options for the relationship of staff write-up space to benchwork space. Option C is preferred by OH & S professionals with option B as their second choice. Regulations and standards control the minimum widths of work aisles, circulation aisles and other spaces. See Figure 2.2. For maximum flexibility laboratory functions should be combined into shared open spaces. However, some functions cannot be shared. Those which need separation due to the nature of the hazard, e.g. ionising radiation, carcinogens; the need for speech privacy, e.g. supervisor’s office; to minimise disruption, e.g. centrifuge noise; or need special environmental conditions. Obviously most of the laboratory support facilities mentioned above will be partitioned. If laboratory work areas are partitioned for each department, when any one department expands or contracts it is either cramped or wasteful of Site and buildings 35

space. Open planning allows departments to be reallocated space without demolishing partitions. Plan for storage space, preferably adjacent to the main circulation for easy access by staff replenishing supplies. Too often storage is an afterthought or at best very inadequate and one of the chief failings of a design. Laboratory work requires a higher level of illumination at the workbench, generally 500 lux, and to conserve energy it is best to have light coloured walls, ceiling, floor and furniture surfaces. Prismatic diffusers under fluorescent tube fittings should be avoided as they create ‘reflective glare’ on the bench surface. To make the best use of available light sources, high efficiency luminaires with mirror louvres, electronic ballasts and automatic dimming with daylight sensors can provide energy savings of up to 75%. However recent research has established that visual acuity is enhanced by shadowless indirect light and consequently the lux level can be reduced with energy conservation. Wall and ceiling surfaces should be impermeable, non-porous and smooth for easy cleaning. Laboratory floors should be level. If there is a particular requirement to wash down the floor as in, for example, an autopsy laboratory, floor waste gully traps will have to be installed. If the floor is not washed down regularly, the water trap may evaporate exposing the laboratory environment to the contaminated air from the drains.This situation can be prevented by filling the gully from an adjacent water fixture which is being used regularly. Floor coverings should be pre-finished sheet vinyl or equivalent material manufactured specifically for the laboratory use with welded joints, taken 150 mm up the walls. Abrasive-surfaced materials should not be used as they will collect dirt from shoes and are difficult to clean. Laboratories are not the wet areas they used to be, with good management insisting on spills being dried as soon as they occur. However, some laboratories such as for autopsy are washed down and need non-slip floors. If there is a risk of flooding from water baths, wash-up sinks, etc. floor wastes will not prevent the water escaping as floors have to be level and not graded to floor wastes. However, grates can be provided at the laboratory door openings. Laboratories should include the provision of a safety station consolidating all equipment for fire fighting and accidents at the regulation maximum travel distance from any point on the laboratory floor. This facility would include the safety shower, face and eye wash so that the user has a choice. Laboratories with large amounts of corrosive material should have drench shower enclosures. The safety station should not be installed outside the laboratory, for example in the corridor, as the laboratory door is an obstruction to easy immediate access. The shower should not be located in a recess which might become a convenient space for storage but at a point which forms part of the essential circulation, such as the aisle near the laboratory entry door. Architects often provide floor wastes under safety showers, but this can lead to the water in the floor waste trap evaporating, exposing the drain and polluting the laboratory atmosphere. Instead of a floor waste one can test the safety shower by holding a bucket under the shower head. 36 Laboratory Design Guide

3.5 Special laboratories Laboratories used for special functions, defined in the design brief as radioactive, pathogenic, tissue culture, animal, etc., cannot be accommodated in the multi-purpose general laboratory spaces described above but must be purpose-built. The design brief for these laboratories should be prepared by OH & S specialists, e.g. radiation safety officer and microbiological serving officer, but still may not be complete in terms of all the client’s requirements and may not include all the regulations of the authorities having jurisdiction over the particular specialised laboratory function. It will therefore be of paramount importance that all the contractors responsible for the installation of the special laboratory are aware of all the planning and construction requirements. These requirements are subject to change and the current regulations should be obtained and held on site for reference. The special laboratories are best located in the ‘support’ facilities space so that they do not interrupt the large continuous ribbon of general laboratory space at the perimeter of the building. A common mistake by architects is to provide only standard doors to these rooms when a much larger access is required for large equipment such as an electron microscope, large autoclave, etc. Access to these laboratories is, in cases such as animal laboratories, an important planning study and needs careful coordination.

3.6 External bulk storage If bulk storage facilities for hazardous substances are sited at a convenient distance from the laboratory building with all-weather covered concrete path access, suitable for trolleys and carts, without stairs, staff can be encouraged, if not instructed, to keep only small quantities of hazardous substances such as flammable, corrosive and poisons in the laboratories. Unless small containers are purchased, safe decanting benches with effective local exhaust ventilation and designed with ergonomic criteria will be required at the main storage location. The same OH & S criteria apply to the facilities for delivery to the bulk storage by road transport. All bulk storage facilities have to be designed to the regulations of the authorities having jurisdiction over the hazardous substances. Documentation of designs have to be submitted to the authorities for approval before construction and inspected by authority representatives and approved before occupation.

3.7 Teaching laboratories and the virtual experiment Traditionally teaching laboratories have been designed specifically for subjects such as Chemistry, Biology, Botany, Zoology and Physics. More recently, universities have asked their architects to design generic laboratories to suit all subjects to improve the utilisation of these costly resources. Site and buildings 37

In the 1960s, closed circuit television (CCTV) was introduced to the audio-visual (AV) techniques of overhead projection, slide projection and 35 mm movies. At that time I was undertaking research into the space requirements for teaching by CCTV at the University Grants Commission (UGC) in London. The conclusion of my research into the students’ opinion of teaching was that they criticised the AV techniques, not the lecturers or their material. They just could not see or hear most of it. Fortunately for me I received a Ford Foundation Grant to study in the USA, at the Rensselaer Institute Research Group where I was able to continue my research in a country which had already developed design solutions for CCTV. Back in Australia I designed teaching laboratories and lecture theatres with rear projection of slides and movies but also with television screens. At Sydney University I designed a production studio for staff to create their own videos. Now this facility has been replaced by a library of commercially produced science videos. The science teaching videos has of course made an impact on planning facilities for teaching. Laboratories have become even more generic and are fitted with TV monitors, data projectors or laptop computers for each student. Case study 38 is a good example of teaching by the virtual experiment. From an OH & S viewpoint, the virtual experiment, particularly in the introductory years in science, reduces the risk to junior students of accidents with sharps, explosive atmospheres and hazardous substances. From the teaching staffs viewpoint, they may want to display unique samples from their archives, display underwater subjects and other ‘field work’ subjects not available to the students except by the virtual experiment. Staff tell me that the current generation with so much experience with television see the virtual experiment as reality. Staff also like the students’ attention being focussed on the subject in the monitor which does not happen in the practical laboratory where inevitably there are distractions.

38 Laboratory Design Guide

Chapter 4 Laboratory furniture and services

4.1 Workbenches 4.2 Storage cupboards and drawers 4.3 Non-joinery items of furniture 4.4 Glass wash facilities 4.5 Laboratory services 4.6 Recent technology

4.1 Workbenches The brief to the design team should describe the function of each laboratory so that an appropriate bench design can be submitted for their consideration. Laboratory functions were performed manually on benches in the past. Some tasks are still performed in much the same way but more and more tasks can now be performed more accurately, faster and with greater safety to the operator by equipment that uses modern technology. The scientist has an ever-increasing range of automated, electronic, mechanical and robotic equipment to select for tasks which were previously performed manually. The effect of the introduction of this new instrumentation into laboratories has been the need to create new designs and arrangements of benches and desks. The new equipment comes in many shapes and sizes. Although most equipment is designed for bench-mounting, some are larger and are floor-standing. Both are having an impact on bench design and the need for benches at all. As an example, high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) is a group of analytical and recording instruments which are interconnected and placed either in line or stacked one above the other. If placed on an island or peninsula bench the rear of instruments is more accessible than if they were placed against a wall. If the room plan allows only wall benches, trolley benches for instruments improve access to the rear of instruments for connection and servicing. Another design solution is to split the peninsula or island bench into two benches with a narrow access aisle between them. This aisle is used only for connecting, disconnecting and servicing the rear of instruments.

40 Laboratory Design Guide

Floor-standing equipment requires a radical change in bench design. Traditionally laboratories have been completely fitted with wall benches and peninsula or island benches – no allowance was made for the introduction of floor-standing equipment. When freezer cabinets, larger centrifuges and the like became available and were required, they had to be placed on the only available floor space, the corridor! The solution to this problem is to install movable benches. If benching is movable, the laboratory can be rearranged to accommodate the floor-standing equipment and other changed requirements. Maximum flexibility can then be achieved. This design solution is illustrated in Figures 4.1 and 4.2 and Plates 1 to 5. When shelving for reagents and other supplies is required convenient to movable workbenches, the shelving can be supported on ‘services bollards’ which stand on a services spine. This design is illustrated in Figure 4.3 and mentioned under Section 4.5 – Laboratory services. Manual work is, of course, still performed in laboratories and recent technology has improved facilities for manual tasks in terms of the work surface material and the height of the surface. Generally, new surface materials are resistant to chemicals such as acids, dyes and stains as they are impervious and the dried chemical can be rubbed off the surface with an abrasive pad without damage to the ‘solid surface’ material. When selecting bench surface materials, the design team should obtain samples of materials from the suppliers. The client can then apply the chemicals and test the stain removal procedure recommended by the suppliers. I believe this is a more direct approach than relying on so-called ‘laboratory tests’ supplied by manufacturers. Other tests by the client may include heat, impact, cold (liquid nitrogen) and abrasion. One of the many advantages of movable benches is that the height of the work surface can be adjusted to suit the tasks and the body dimensions of the individual staff using the bench. This can be achieved only with movable benches which can have a mechanically driven or gas-operated bench height adjusting mechanism (Figure 4.4). The foregoing applies to laboratories with mainly dry processes. Laboratories employing wet processes need continuous fixed workbenches to contain spills, as illustrated in Figure 4.5. Some degree of flexibility can still be achieved by benches being supported on their own metal frame and not on the cupboards and drawer units. The cupboard and drawer units are stand-alone and being movable they can be placed anywhere under the benches. For undergraduate teaching laboratories I recommend a design which will promote a higher use of available resources. Some university clients are now insisting that the various departments agree on a laboratory design which is practical for teaching all disciplines. If courses offered or student enrolments change, a redistribution of teaching laboratory resources can be made with minimal alterations.

Laboratory furniture and services 41

Figure 4.1 Floor-standing services bollard with movable benches showing the most flexible arrangement particularly suitable for the automated laboratory (continued overleaf )

Figure 4.2 Typical laboratory with services bollards, equipment and movable benches showing the modular spacing of bollards at 3 m

42 Laboratory Design Guide

Figure 4.3 Services spine with movable benches and movable over-bench shelves showing the laboratory services on bollards and not on fixed reagent shelves (continued overleaf )

Figure 4.4 Adjustable height bench/desk showing one of the several workbenches or equipment benches which can be part of a laboratory bench layout. The provision of some of these benches is required for disabled staff

Laboratory furniture and services 43

Figure 4.5 Fixed benches with bench-mounted services bollards and movable under-bench cupboards and drawers showing the same movable reagent shelves as in Figure 4.3 with fixed benches for wet laboratories

Figure 4.6 Anti-vibration bench showing the frame kept clear of the wall to allow space for service pipes

Figure 4.7 Fume cupboard support frame showing the frame kept clear of the wall to allow service pipes and open in front for knee space, access for the disabled and storage cupboards

44 Laboratory Design Guide

One of my designs for multi-purpose laboratories is illustrated in Figure 4.8. The Practical Mode shows the movable benches in the traditional arrangement of double-sided benches with students facing each other across the bench which has power and gases available at the ‘services bollard’. The Lecture Mode shows the benches, which would now be adjusted to desk height, arranged so that all the students are facing the lecturer. The third plan, Examination Mode shows the desks spaced out sideways for the necessary separation for written examinations.

4.2 Storage cupboards and drawers Storage of laboratory supplies and small equipment has traditionally been accommodated under the workbench, on shelves at the back of the workbench and in full height glass-fronted wall cabinets. More recently an increase in safety awareness in laboratories has resulted in a reduction in the user requirements for reagent shelving and the quantity of under-bench cupboards in favour of full height wall storage cabinets. Reaching over and across the instruments on benches for reagents is considered hazardous for both personnel and instruments. Bending down to reach into deep under-bench cupboards is also considered hazardous to the individual and to those passing by. Standing at full height cabinets to access supplies is safer and good ergonomic practice. Compactus storage might be ideal for office files and supplies but may be hazardous in laboratories. The moving shelf units can spill and break glass chemical bottles and the concentration of chemicals created by the compactus system may violate the standard for maximum allowable volume of chemicals to be stored in the laboratory. However many consumables can be stored safely in compactus storage and Plate 6 illustrates the Metro design which does not have floor tracks but has overhead guide rails and each shelf unit moves across the floor on wheels. This allows for relocation, promoting flexibility. Storage systems which coordinate the main central bulk store with the in-laboratory storage reduce material handling. By storing bulk supplies in drawers which stack into floor delivery carts and then fit into under-bench drawer cabinets, supplies are only handled at the initial delivery and unpacking and sorting into drawer units. One of our pathology projects has a new system for automated retrieval of consumables. Plates 50 and 51 illustrate the Kardex Vertical Carousel at the ground floor storeroom where it is loaded and the laboratory floor where staff can call up the item they require. The computer keeps a record of retrieval and orders replacements.

4.3 Non-joinery items of furniture Apart from the basic benches and storage the design brief will include special items of furniture and equipment described under Chapter 5 – Equipment, such as anti-vibration benches for balances and microscopes. Figure 4.6 shows a design which has a heavy steel frame,‘solid surface’ bench top and elastomeric bearings which isolate the bench top from structure-borne vibrations.The size of the bench should be mentioned in the brief. Laboratory furniture and services 45

Figure 4.8 Multi-purpose teaching laboratories showing how students’ benches can be arranged to suit laboratory practical work, lectures or examinations in laboratories fitted with services bollards and movable benches

46 Laboratory Design Guide

Analytical and other equipment benches need to have adjustable height to suit various shapes and sizes of the equipment. If access is needed to the top of equipment it may have to be lower. Fume cupboards are best supported on a metal frame, as illustrated in Figure 4.7 so that access to the underside of the fume cupboard for repairs and cleaning is possible. Although it is convenient, flammable liquids should not be stored under the fume cupboard which is an ‘ignition source’. The space under the fume cupboard is needed by seated operators for good ergonomics. Flammable liquids storage cabinets should comply with the relevant code or standard and nominated in the brief. Not all cabinets are manufactured with insulation between the inner metal and outer metal linings to protect the flammable liquids from fire.

4.4 Glass wash facilities In many new laboratories centralised glass washing facilities for the whole laboratory have replaced the old-style large double bowl sinks and drainers at the ends of peninsula benches. Used glassware is collected on trolleys and taken to the mechanical wash machines and autoclaves, which have special trays for laboratory glassware. Small sinks in the laboratory can be used for rinsing prior to placing on the trolley. This central facility has meant wash sinks no longer take up valuable bench space and avoids the problem of water splashing onto benches. The need for water supply and liquid disposal can still be provided by drip cups or small sinks which take up less space and would be better located closer to the task. However, if the client has asked for glass washing facilities within the laboratory, a facility should be located with minimum disruption to the workbenches and provide the required sink bowl size and depth, the draining area if needed, wall-mounted drying racks, soap dispensers, hot and cold taps, etc. If the wash-up sinks are to be on the peninsula workbenches try not to locate them on the end, as users will be vulnerable to accidental collision with through-traffic. Sinks in the workbenches are likely to receive concentrated chemicals so their material is more critical than for wash-up sinks. As with the bench top materials samples of sinks for the laboratory should be tested by the client rather than relying on product sales literature.

4.5 Laboratory services Hydraulic, Mechanical and Electrical consultants have contributed whole chapters on these important building services with details of the latest technology for laboratories. The old traditional installation of laboratory services to fixed workbenches was to reticulate below bench level with outlets spaced at regular intervals along the back of the bench top. This method has the disadvantage of a services infrastructure which is hard to change. Horizontal reticulation above floor level prevents the rearranging of bench layout. Laboratory furniture and services 47

If, on the other hand, services are reticulated below the laboratory floor and rise at regular intervals on the laboratory grid, aisles and benches can be rearranged to suit changing requirements without interrupting the services infrastructure. This better option is of course only available in single-storey laboratories, buildings with interstitial service floors and where there is no objection to services in the floor below. I recommend where possible the reticulation of services below the laboratory floor if access to services is available as illustrated in Figure 3.2. In the early 1980s I designed and patented a ‘bollard’ system, providing laboratory services to movable benches. The bollards provide power, gases, water and drainage for sinks. Spaced at regular intervals of, say, 3 m in both directions, this grid of bollards provides all laboratory services to movable benches, including sink benches, in any desired layout. The benches can be either in small island formations or in long lines incorporating more than one bollard. Aisles can be planned in either direction and changed if the original layout proves unsatisfactory. Furthermore floor-standing equipment such as freezer cabinets, large centrifuges and robotic analysers can be incorporated into the bench layout. Figure 4.2 and Plates 1 to 5 show some of my completed bollard system laboratories. In the past laboratory services were incorporated into the reagent shelving. It was all right then, because bench work was performed manually. Now that more and more work is automated, space has to be provided for the instrumentation and sometimes very large machines. The bench depth may not be sufficient to accommodate some machines so the fixed reagent shelving is restrictive. My solution to this design problem is to install services ‘bollards’ on a services spine as illustrated in Figure 4.3.The reagent shelves no longer have services in them so can be removed if the extra bench depth is required. The design of services installations is performed by engineering consultants who should have had extensive and recent experience in laboratory buildings. Fire detection and suppression services have to be carefully considered in laboratory buildings. Hence the need for experienced consulting engineers. Water supply is a service in which the local supply authority take a particular interest to avoid the laboratory contaminating the town water. Isolating the laboratory with a ‘break tank’ on the roof is one solution. The town water drops into the tank preventing any possible transmission of contaminants. Water gravitates to the laboratories or can be pumped for higher and more reliable pressure. Back flow prevention devices in lieu of or in addition to break tanks can also be installed to prevent contamination back to the domestic water supply. These are certified and calibrated every 12 months to ensure their effectiveness. The engineering consultant will advise on this matter. Laboratory liquid wastes are connected to a dilution pit through chemical resistant pipes such as glass, polypropylene or a material to resist the waste being discharged. The disposal of solvents down the sink and through waste pipes is prohibited in many jurisdictions so the engineering consultant will advise on this matter. Laboratory sinks can be installed in island benches even when the waste cannot be discharged down through the floor. Both pump-out and vacuum extraction systems have

48 Laboratory Design Guide

been installed successfully allowing wastes to extend vertically from the sink to the ceiling above and thence horizontally to the service duct. The design of the laboratory waste management is one of the most important issues and needs to be determined at an early stage. It will have many implications on space requirements. The hardest decision in laboratory services design is the extent of the initial provision. Do you provide services only to the outlets requested or to the whole building? We generally design the building structure to accommodate a services infrastructure and install the main lines and as many branch lines as necessary for initial requirements.

4.6 Recent technology The designs for laboratory furniture and services are continually improving with new technology. System furniture manufacturers have grown with the demand by users for generic laboratory furniture that is modular and able to be re-configured to their changing requirements for laboratory layouts. Improved storage systems have been designed to accommodate the ever-increasing instrument manuals, standards, journals and copy paper, and the laboratory consumables, which have increased in volume with the greater throughput of test samples. An example of a sliding storage cupboard designed to be convenient to laboratory workbenches by taking up very little space is shown in one of my designs, Case study 11 (p. 186). The automated storage and retrieval systems that have been common in warehouses are now being installed in laboratories. If necessary, they can be enclosed in a controlled atmosphere. An example of the Kardex Vertical Carousel is illustrated in Plates 50 and 51. Specimens being tested in some pathology laboratories are now being distributed from the Central Specimen Reception and Processing area not by trolley but by pneumatic tube or robotic carriages on tracks, which can travel vertically between floors or horizontally across large floors. Examples of the Lamson pneumatic tube and the robotic specimen transporter are illustrated in Plates 43 and 44 at one of our pathology laboratory projects.

Laboratory furniture and services 49

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Chapter 5 Special cabinets and benches

5.1 5.2

Fume cupboards Local exhaust ventilation 5.3 Biological safety cabinets 5.4 Laminar flow cabinets 5.5 Down-draught benches 5.6 Flammable liquids cabinets 5.7 Decanting benches 5.8 Anti-vibration benches 5.9 Equipment/ instrumentation benches 5.10 Workbenches for disabled staff

5.1 Fume cupboards Operations involving the use or generation of flammable liquids, gases, airborne irritants, poisons or sensitising agents, etc. should be carried out in a fume cupboard to contain the hazard. Their manufactured design and installation is controlled by standards and regulations. While manufacturers are aware of these requirements it is essential for those responsible for arranging the position of fume cupboards also to be aware of all the regulations, including the location of fume cupboards in relation to workbenches, doors, columns, etc. As the materials handled within fume cupboards represent one of the highest fire risk elements in the laboratory, fume cupboards should not be located on the fire escape routes, should be furthest from exits and therefore ideally located at the perimeter window wall. In this location the exhaust ducts can be external which has advantages in terms of fire control. The location of exhaust ducts to the roof, stack location and height are a site environment issue and the local building and health authorities will have to approve the design. In fact some local building authorities now prohibit fume exhaust to the environment and this prohibition is likely to spread in all countries who want to protect the environment from CO2 and other toxic emissions. The alternative design of fume cupboards are those which do not exhaust fumes to the environment but filter the contaminants and return the air to the laboratory (see Plate 7). These fume cupboards are called recirculatory filtration fume cupboards.The advantages of this design are not only that they provide zero emission to the environment but they provide cost benefits by returning the conditioned air to the laboratory. In terms of flexibility, the recirculatory filtration fume cupboards, which are placed on a bench or metal stand can be relocated quite simply by the laboratory users, much like a biohazard cabinet. Users I interviewed nominated mobility as the main advantage. Figures 5.1(a) and (b)

52 Laboratory Design Guide

Figure 5.1 (a) Typical fume cupboard exhaust duct locations

Special cabinets and benches 53

Figure 5.1 (b) A typical fume cupboard with a scrubber. The scrubber can remove up to 98% of perchloric acid fumes before they enter the main extraction ductwork. The traditional method of fitting sprays throughout the entire run of the extraction ducting is inefficient and expensive to install.The duct washing method requires inspection of each spray nozzle throughout the extraction system, and this can be hazardous in itself. All services to the unit are contained within the fume cupboard and its support unit, with easy access to pump, tank, etc. The unit consumes less water when the closed circuit recirculating wash system is installed. Before discharging and draining the washing solution from the recirculating tank, it can be tested to ensure compliance with the requirements of the various authorities.

54 Laboratory Design Guide

show typical installations of ducted fume cupboards. One of the main costs in laboratory buildings with ducted fume cupboards is the provision of make-up air to balance the air exhausted to the atmosphere.To maintain physical containment (PC) is a complex problem as there is no control on how laboratory staff use the ducted fume cupboards, so there is no regular measurement of the make-up air required. Other capital costs of ducted fume cupboards include the ducts in a fire rated enclosure or externally supported to the roof, an accessible fan roof installation exhaust stacks which can be required as high as 10 m and substantial steel structures to withstand wind loads. The problem of penetrating upper floors to install the exhaust ducts to the roof for additional fume cupboards in existing laboratory buildings has been solved by the alternative design of filtration fume cupboards. Filtration fume cupboards have a history of early products which were not satisfactory but since the 1980s the new technology of activated carbon filters has proved to be successful and is now replacing the ducted fume cupboards in both new laboratory buildings and also in existing laboratories. I recommend that the design team should contact all manufacturers and have their representatives describe the various features of their designs to ascertain which design suits the laboratory use. Some of the features which are favoured by laboratory staff are: a. A level worksurface as opposed to one which is graded to a sink. b. Allowing adequate knee space for working close to the cupboard, which is only available if the water and gas controls are on the side frame. c. Good lighting within the cupboard as recommended by the fume cupboard standard in the country. d. A steel frame supporting the cupboard to allow access to the underside of the cupboard for maintenance and alterations and access for wheelchair operators as illustrated in Figure 4.7. e. A walk-in fume cupboard for tall apparatus such as for distillation. Energy conservation can be achieved in fume cupboard design with Variable Air Velocity (VAV) to control the velocity of the air flow across the sash at all sash positions to the minimum safe capture velocity stipulated by the fume cupboard standards.

5.2 Local exhaust ventilation It is better in terms of occupational health, safety and energy conservation to extract hazardous airborne contaminants, e.g. fumes, dust, mists, vapours, etc., at the source before it dissipates into the laboratory environment. Once it has spread it will have to be removed from the general laboratory exhaust air. There are proprietary products with adjustable hoods and flexible ducting which can be installed within reach of the workbench where the extraction is needed. These products Special cabinets and benches 55

can exhaust contaminants to the outside air or be portable with filters to recycle the extracted air. Lateral exhaust ducts can be built behind dedicated benches to provide excellent operator access and contaminant control. Local exhaust ventilators are not an alternative to fume cupboards.

5.3 Biological safety cabinets Biological safety cabinets are designed to contain material, often living microorganisms, and thereby protect the laboratory user from exposure to aerosols produced from handling the material. The cabinets contain fans which pass the recycled air through HEPA filters. There are several products available and the company representatives can advise on their product performance and cost. Draught-free locations are essential.

5.4 Laminar flow cabinets Laminar flow cabinets provide a clean space within which a product can be handled without fear of contamination to that product by introduced agents. Typical applications include pharmaceutical products and packaging, media preparation, food technology, electronics assembly and plant research. Laminar flow cabinets are manufactured by the same suppliers as biological safety cabinets. Draught-free locations are essential.

5.5 Down-draught benches The small scale dissection of human and animal tissue which has been fixed or preserved, e.g. in Formalin, is an unsafe task if the formaldehyde vapour is inhaled by the operator. By exhausting this vapour downwards below the specimen being dissected, exposure to the tissue fixative is controlled. Figure 5.2 shows a design for a down-draught bench which I have used in anatomical pathology. Other designs are also based on the same principle that local exhaust ventilation should not exhaust airborne contaminants towards or past the operator’s nose.

5.6 Flammable liquids cabinets Special proprietary product cabinets are made for storage of flammable liquids within the laboratory. They conform in their capacity and construction to standards and regulations and should have their certification displayed on the cabinets. 56 Laboratory Design Guide

Figure 5.2 Down-draught bench showing the exhaust ventilation duct from the sink below the dissection board

Special cabinets and benches 57

Because of the potential fire hazard these cabinets should be used only when essential for the storage of chemicals within the laboratory, when a bulk store has not been provided adjacent to the laboratory and when storage facilities outside the laboratory would lead to unnecessary risks in carrying chemicals back and forth or the store material is required on a daily/weekly short-term basis. One solution is a trolley cabinet, wheeled out into a fire resistant store overnight. Minimum cabinet spacing and proximity to ignition sources are defined by standards and regulations.

5.7 Decanting benches There is a risk of accidental exposure when decanting from a large container to smaller bottles for laboratory use. If the decanting is done on a bench similar to the bench as described under Section 5.5 but with local exhaust ventilation, the vapour will not affect the operator. If there is a spill the liquid will fall directly into the sink bowl which should have at least the capacity of the largest container supplied.

5.8 Anti-vibration benches Some equipment and instruments need to be placed on a bench which is isolated from structure-borne vibrations, e.g. micro balances. Typical vibrations are those created by heavy road or rail traffic, air-conditioning plant and, in material testing laboratories, mechanical hammers and tensile testing machines. Microscopes and balances are both sensitive to vibrations, although the trend in design is for these instruments to have built-in vibration isolating bases. Figure 4.6 shows a design for an anti-vibration bench which has three main components, a heavy bench top, pure rubber elastomeric pads and a steel frame. The very heavy components can be carried separately, making the bench as movable as any other workbench. The bench top thickness allows for knee space if the operator is seated.

5.9 Equipment/instrumentation benches Some equipment needs to be supported at a different height to normal 900-mm high workbenches. For example, some large bench-mounted auto-analysers have controls and vision panels at the top and need to be supported at a level to suit the various heights of laboratory staff. Biohazard cabinets are best mounted on lower benches which allow the bench height within the cabinet to be level with adjacent benches. Both these examples call for an adjustable height bench. Figure 4.4 shows a typical adjustable bench which can be mechanically wound up and down between 900-mm and 750-mm height. 58 Laboratory Design Guide

Adjustable workbenches are useful to provide staff with the option of working at desk height or bench height and for disabled staff. These desk/benches are used in conjunction with adjustable height chairs/stools.

5.10 Workbenches for disabled staff While you may not have permanently disabled staff in your laboratory, accidents do occur in the workplace and during recreation. In Australia, employers are required by legislation to provide equal opportunities to their staff. In effect, this means that adjustable height benches (Figure 4.4) and fume cupboard support frames (Figure 4.7) have to be provided to allow staff to return to work after an accident.

Special cabinets and benches 59

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Chapter 6 Laboratory computers, instrumentation and equipment

6.1 Computers 6.2 Instrumentation for analysis and testing 6.3 Centrifuges 6.4 Ovens and autoclaves 6.5 Incubators 6.6 Refrigerators and cool rooms 6.7 Access for large equipment

6.1 Computers One of my clients said the role of computers in laboratories is constantly evolving and computers are used for more and more tasks. This increasing dependence on computers means that access to them needs to be everywhere, all the time, for most if not all staff. Apart from providing suitable stations for computer use, provisions must also be made for all elements of the computer network, including rooms for housing centralised equipment (e.g. powerful servers, storage devices) as well as peripherals such as printers and scanners. If portability of online workstations is required, it may be worth using a wireless local area network. Computing hardware and infrastructure is likely to be the most frequently replaced equipment in the building. Computers have long been used in the research environment for data acquisition and analysis. This continues to be their core function but the list of other functions is constantly increasing. In some cases, computers are making specialised pieces of equipment redundant. Computers are also making whole laboratory spaces redundant as researchers find that they can do more and more of their research by numerical simulation or modelling rather than by traditional experimentation in the physical world. Another of my clients advised ‘computers have made a huge impact in the way we do molecular genetics these days. Besides the way in which they have allowed us to analyse large molecular data sets more quickly and efficiently, they have also led to a large shift away from time spent on wet-laboratory experiments to more time spent on dry-laboratory-based research. Most of the research activity in our department is now computer-based in one way or another. A number of our researchers work only on computer-based research (data capture, data storage, data analysis and modelling). Of the rest, nearly all make more use of computer-based research in conjunction with wet-laboratory studies. 62 Laboratory Design Guide

Our department has a networked computer system involving a central facility with many processors and hard disks. All of the researchers are connected to this system and use ordinary PCs as terminals and most of our offices are used for computer-based research. Analytical equipment in traditional wet-laboratory areas is also networked such that control of experiments and capture of molecular data can be done remotely from a dry-laboratory or office area. Another significant shift has been that the traditional wet-laboratory areas (designed for handling biologicals, chemicals and radioactive material) have tended to become organised as common areas for research groups. In the past, individual research groups had separate wet-laboratory areas in which the bulk of the research activity was carried out. So the need for everyone to have wet-laboratory areas is no longer as important as having access to dry-laboratories with computer-based workstations’.

6.2 Instrumentation for analysis and testing The design brief will describe the laboratory instrumentation proposed for the new laboratory. Some will undoubtedly be existing in their present premises, so these can be examined for support and services. The rest will be new so details of the support benches and services required can be obtained from brochures and the supplier’s representative. Under Section 4.1 – Workbenches, I mentioned the benches designed to support HPLC instruments. The design of laboratory analysers and test equipment is changing constantly and their accommodation needs to be adaptable to facilitate the changes. The trend is also unpredictable from the present trend of combining several functions into one very large floor-standing machine, to robotic design or to miniature components. Manufacturers are trying to keep up with the constant demand from scientists for equipment to perform new tasks. Some of the new equipment is several metres in length, calling for very flexible laboratory space. Under Section 4.1 and Section 4.5 – Laboratory services, I describe a ‘bollard’ system I designed for maximum flexibility. Plates 1 and 4 and Figure 4.2 show a laboratory with floor-standing instrumentation and movable benches assembled around a bollard to which the instruments are connected for their power and gas needs. Plate 3 shows another laboratory where a services ‘pendant’ is suspended from the ceiling and the instruments are connected to it in much the same way. This design obstructs a clear view across the laboratory and I have found that laboratory staff do not favour a ‘cluttered’ appearance.

6.3 Centrifuges Centrifuges revolve at variable speeds to separate components by centrifugal force and can be quite noisy. The larger models which are generally floor-standing are sometimes accommodated in separate rooms to insulate the sound and vibration. They are used for Laboratory computers, instrumentation and equipment 63

separations and clarifications. Blood specimens are now smaller and consequently centrifuges have become smaller and are now bench mounted. They are also less noisy and can be placed within the laboratory and not in a separate noisy equipment room.

6.4 Ovens and autoclaves Ovens and autoclaves are used in a variety of laboratories and the different models are manufactured to suit the particular requirements of the laboratory work. Improved models do not radiate the heat of earlier designs as more efficient insulating material has become available to the manufacturers. However, the client may want to install old equipment in the new laboratory. It is good practice to locate ovens against a wall, away from the general workbenches or even in a separate room as they can still generate very high heat loads. If the oven has a flue it is easier to install the flue against a wall. High temperature ovens, muffle furnaces and autoclaves ideally need to be located under canopy hoods to remove heat load and odours, and also shielded to prevent radiant heat.

6.5 Incubators Normally in microbiology laboratories with a clean air environment and sometimes used for seed germination, growth and culture experimentation, incubators are designed for specific laboratory work. They are generally floor-standing but under-bench models are also available. Free air circulation to the cooling/heating equipment is required especially if located close to or under workbenches. Walk-in incubator rooms are also common.

6.6 Refrigerators and cool rooms Refrigerators for laboratories are designed to fit under workbenches or may be large floor-standing cabinets with solid or glass doors. The design brief will nominate the type. However, if these large cabinets are located within the laboratory they will generate unwanted heat. The alternative cool room design which is illustrated in Plate 12 is a collocation alternative which is favoured by our current clients. The shelves are shared and name stickers are used to indicate shelf material. The heat generated by mechanical plant is ducted away. The collocation is of course one of the strategies to encourage professional interaction. Cool rooms and freezers for laboratories are generally standard models of prefabricated insulated panel construction with or without glass doors. However, the design brief may call for more sophisticated equipment with better temperature and humidity controls which will be specially assembled for the laboratory. The shelving required will need to withstand the harsh conditions of the atmosphere in the coolroom. 64 Laboratory Design Guide

6.7 Access for large equipment While it is not always possible to forecast the large equipment that may be required to be accommodated, one can assume that there will be a need eventually. It is wise therefore to provide a route from outside the building to all areas on laboratory floors. This route should be at least 1500-mm wide, unless there is a specific reason for it being larger, with each laboratory space having a door for regular use and a hinged panel that can be opened by releasing barrel bolts to provide a 1500-mm clear opening. Plate 10 illustrates a typical example of a laboratory door and hinged panel.

Laboratory computers, instrumentation and equipment 65

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Chapter 7 On completion

7.1 Commissioning equipment 7.2 Security 7.3 Emergency procedures 7.4 Services controls and emergencies 7.5 Building manual 7.6 As-built drawings 7.7 Joint final inspections 7.8 Publication

7.1 Commissioning equipment A commissioning meeting(s) should be held at the equipment location and attended by the supplier/installer to explain the operation of the equipment to the laboratory staff and client’s maintenance engineers. Most of the equipment will be installed by the supplier. They will have provided all the necessary information on the services to be connected to the equipment by the electrical, mechanical and hydraulic subcontractors. The supplier may insist on making the final connections to the equipment or the connections may be left to the subcontractors, who should also attend the commissioning meeting. The laboratory staff should be shown how the equipment operates and what are their responsibilities for its proper use and maintenance. It is the supplier’s responsibility under Quality Assurance to describe common failure of the equipment and the remedial action to be taken by staff. Suppliers have statutory obligations to disclose and supply safe operating procedures. The equipment manual should be studied by the staff and any questions put to the supplier at the commissioning meeting.

7.2 Security The degree and extent of security will be described in the design brief as mentioned in Section 1.14 – Security. Staff should be thoroughly familiar with the security system which should be shown and explained to them by both the security system installation contractor and the company’s own security staff. The alarm drill should be acted out so that all staff have experienced a break in security and performed the appropriate counter-action. 68 Laboratory Design Guide

7.3 Emergency procedures The evacuation plan in the event of fire, chemical spills, bomb threat, medical emergency, etc. should be developed as part of the design process, fully documented and displayed in all laboratories showing the alternative escape routes from that particular laboratory to the assembly points outside the building. The displays are best designed with the consultation of the relevant authorities and produced by the client or building owner on a copy of the building plan. As soon as the building is initially occupied, staff should be fully informed of their responsibility in the event of an emergency, observing the source of a fire or when the alarm has been sounded by others. The fire extinguishers installed in the laboratories and elsewhere, as recommended by the fire prevention authority, should be demonstrated to all staff by the supplier. When all staff are thoroughly conversant with fire procedures the management should arrange in cooperation with the fire brigade a fire drill exercise when they know that all staff will be present.

7.4 Services controls and emergencies Provision will have been made in the reticulation of laboratory power, gases and water for isolation of sections of the installation in the event of an emergency or routine maintenance. These control valves and circuit breakers should be clearly identified and shown to all staff on occupation of the site. The reasons for their provision should be explained to them by discussing possible scenarios when the staff will have to activate the shutdown control.

7.5 Building manual The building contractor should supply to the building owner a manual containing all the technical information provided to them by equipment and material suppliers, and subcontractors. If the manual is not complete to the building owner’s satisfaction he should insist on the contractor obtaining the missing data. Apart from the obvious items, such as laboratory equipment which has been mentioned under Section 7.1 – Commissioning equipment, it is necessary to know the supplier of all the building components such as filters, fluorescent tubes, etc. so that matching replacements can be reordered from the same supplier.

7.6 As-built drawings The building contractor should supply to the building owner ‘as-built’ drawings. These drawings will be the original drawings for the building contract but will have been revised to reflect the many variations which are inevitably made during the course of construction. On completion 69

Contractors try to avoid this onerous responsibility if the tender documents call for as-built drawings to be provided, and need a reminder or two. The building structure may not have been altered much but the mechanical services, air-conditioning duct work, hydraulic lines, etc. will have been altered considerably from the tender documents where they are frequently only diagrammatic. From my experience, building owners rarely have building plans, and if so, they are seldom up to date, as the laboratory is altered continuously, often in an ad hoc manner.

7.7 Joint final inspections When the builder has completed all of the above, all building and equipment defects and malfunctions have been rectified, local authorities have given permission for occupation and the builder is ready to hand over all the premises, a formal joint meeting or meetings must be held. Official representatives of the architects, engineering consultants, main contractor, all services subcontractors, all suppliers/installers of equipment should walk around the building with the client, services manager and maintenance staff and explain everything they need to know for the proper function of the building. These meetings would include items mentioned under Sections 7.1–7.6 and 8.1–8.5. At this time a list of contact names and telephone numbers for emergencies should be given to the client.

7.8 Publication You may like to consider producing a press release to inform the scientific community of the completion of your laboratory, and you may also like to write an article for the laboratory journals. Your architect would be pleased to assist you with plans and other illustrations and photographs. Many of the case studies were in fact reproduced from articles published in laboratory and architectural journals.

70 Laboratory Design Guide

Chapter 8 Maintenance

8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6

Bench tops Flooring Filters Waste disposal Safety stations Laboratory services and equipment 8.7 Laboratory audits

8.1 Bench tops There are no bench top materials which do not require periodic cleaning. The degree and frequency of cleaning will depend on the type of bench top material. The resistance to the sort of use, be it abrasive as in material testing laboratories or chemical spills, will have been taken into account in the selection at the design stage. It now becomes the management’s and staffs’ decision on how to maintain the bench tops clean. Most laboratory managers insist on chemical spills being wiped off immediately before they stain. Turning the cold water on before emptying chemicals into the sink will also reduce staining. A client of mine decided, with the staff, that each member would clean their own benchspace every Friday night, thereby maintaining a very high degree of cleanliness. The process takes, on average, only a few minutes. The manual referred to in Section 7.5 – Building manual, should include instructions by the bench top manufacturer for cleaning their particular product.

8.2 Flooring Access to laboratories by cleaning staff needs careful consideration. Laboratories using radioisotopes, for example, should not be cleaned routinely but by special staff. Other laboratories to be cleaned by staff or contractors need also to be given clear instructions on what spaces they can clean and what wastes they can empty. The flooring in laboratories is mentioned under Section 3.4 – Interior design, and if a pre-finished vinyl sheeting has been installed the cleaning will be quite easy. As the laboratory is air conditioned there will be only the dust and fibres brought in on clothing. A fine spray 72 Laboratory Design Guide

of detergent and a clean wipe with a floor mop should be all that is required each night. The manual referred to under Section 7.5 – Building manual, should include instructions by the flooring product manufacturer for cleaning the particular flooring installed. If cleaning contractors are involved it is most important to instruct them accordingly, otherwise they will use the heavy rotary scrubbers which can remove the polyurethane finish on the flooring.They may also apply a polish which is unnecessary and will collect dirt. The floor is easier to clean if under-bench cupboards and drawer units are movable and not suspended above the floor. The storage units can be pulled out into the aisle leaving plenty of space to clean right through under the bench. Cleaning staff should also be informed of the hazards they are likely to encounter in the laboratories.

8.3 Filters There are filters in air-handling equipment such as biohazard cabinets, recirculatory filtration fume cupboards and clean room filters which need to be monitored and replaced when exhausted. These are another item which should be included in the building manual.

8.4 Waste disposal The systems for disposal of waste will typically include laboratory liquid waste from sinks to the dilution pit prior to release into the authority’s sewers, having prior approval from that authority. Other systems of waste disposal include containers within the laboratory for infectious waste, sharps, protective clothing for laundering, etc. which are carried out by specialist waste management contractors. Solvent waste is one of the most hazardous, requiring experienced professional design and may be disposed of by one of the following two alternatives. The waste can be discharged into a dedicated sink and gravitate to a collection tank with both tank and waste mechanically ventilated to prevent an explosive atmosphere. Alternatively solvent waste can be returned to winchesters and placed in a solvent store for collection by a contractor. Either way, appropriate maintenance for collection will be essential. The proper maintenance of laboratory waste systems is probably the most important maintenance responsibility of the laboratory staff.

8.5 Safety stations The health and safety equipment at the safety stations in laboratories needs routine maintenance and replacement if necessary. For instance, safety showers should be regularly activated with a bucket under the shower head and use-by dates checked on fire extinguishers. Maintenance 73

8.6 Laboratory services and equipment There are a number of other laboratory services and equipment that require maintenance. Some examples are fume cupboards, luminaires, vacuum and air compressors, demineralised water and local exhaust ventilation systems. The design team needs to be aware of the complexity of laboratory maintenance issues and seek the client’s instructions at the briefing stage. I recommend that a 2-year service agreement is included in the contract with equipment suppliers.

8.7 Laboratory audits While your laboratory management will have periodical safety maintenance procedures in place, these may not include all amendments to standards and regulations. You may like to consider engaging an independent laboratory auditor to carry out a thorough examination of your laboratory practice, instrumentation and facilities, with particular attention to safety issues. OH & S regulations are being continually updated in response to incidents and greater concern for safety in the workplace.

74 Laboratory Design Guide

Chapter 9 Environmental design: Internal courtyards as an element of ESD

by Matthew Jessup, BE (Hons), Senior Environmental Analyst and Su-fern Tan (BE, BA, DipEngPrac), Environmental Analyst, Advanced Environmental Concepts 9.1 Introduction 9.2 Design elements 9.3 The benefits of internal courtyards 9.4 A simple concept 9.5 Conclusion

9.1 Introduction Laboratories, by their very nature, have exacting services requirements.These requirements, coupled with often intensive usage, make laboratories comparatively large users of energy. All energy used contributes to greenhouse gas emissions.This is ultimately a contributor to global warming unless renewable power sources are utilised. Integrated, interdisciplinary design is required to achieve the essential balance between a functional brief and operational efficiency. In laboratory design, such interdisciplinary communication becomes of greater importance when we consider how widely published and accepted passive design strategies suit the functionality of laboratories. Passive design is the term used to describe environmental control by virtue of built form. A lot of passive design strategies utilise direct solar gain for heating benefits in winter months.This can also mean direct sunlight, which is unacceptable in many instances. Other passive strategies utilise cool night air to pre-cool a building in summer; again this can be inappropriate for laboratories where 24-hour conditioning is required. In order to derive benefits from good building design, the accepted rules of thumb cannot be relied upon; instead a first principles approach is more appropriate. Other areas within the building, including the offices and atrium are more open to passive means which are able to improve indoor air quality (IAQ) and hence have a large impact on minimising energy consumption. Minimising demand through efficient servicing is increasingly common. Many energy saving initiatives can be implemented with minimum impact to the cost plan by utilising design ‘smarts’. Energy savings result directly in reduced operational costs and reduced emissions from the power generation source. 76 Laboratory Design Guide

Ecologically Sustainable Design (ESD) within a laboratory building is not limited to just saving energy. Consideration is also being made for the health and well-being of the occupants and developing solutions that not only save energy and associated greenhouse gas emissions but also provide better thermal comfort, better access to natural light and ultimately better connectivity to the outdoor environment. Such initiatives within can be beneficial in all modes of laboratory, from incubator spaces where rapid development is demanded through to academic facilities and ultimately full production laboratories.These benefits range from aspirational opportunities such as providing spaces for social interaction to measurable productivity elements such as increase throughput in production environments. Productivity benefits generated by ESD design initiatives can be financially significant. For instance, if a technician produces on average 12 diagnostics kits an hour, a 2% increase in productivity could result in an extra 460 kits per year. If each kit retails for $150 this could mean an extra $72 000 in production per technician. Over a simple 5-year payback this could justify an investment of over $300 000 per technician in creating spaces with access to natural light, fresh air and better thermal comfort. Whilst the above example is simplistic, it demonstrates the opportunity that is presented through an integrated and wholistic approach to ESD.

9.2 Design elements There are a number of key elements to the integration of ESD into the laboratory environment.These include: Light – Lighting solutions for laboratories can be critical with tasks being generally intense and of fine detail.The provision of both direct and indirect light solutions both from artificial light and natural light presents significant benefits. Air – Air-conditioning systems typically recycle 80% of the air supplied into the space. Whilst this air is filtered, the filters are only designed to remove large particulates, not gases or small particulates such as endotoxins. Increasing access to fresh air is clearly going to provide a benefit in health and well-being of the occupants of the facility. Comfort – Thermal comfort in a space is influenced by not only air temperature but also radiant temperatures and humidity. A typical design will treat air temperature however some 60% of thermal comfort is influenced by the other two factors cited. With the increasing use of external facades for service access and flexibility (peristitial spaces), the outer envelope of the building is no longer feasible as a means of providing effective natural light, especially in a deep footprint building.This makes an internal courtyard an attractive design element to not only improve vertical circulation but also improve access to natural light, fresh air and passive radiant cooling and heating. Environmental design: Internal courtyards as an element of ESD 77

9.3 The benefits of internal courtyards 9.3.1 Energy Energy benefits are derived from nature providing light and ventilation which would otherwise be supplied via artificial means i.e. air conditioning and artificial lighting. Energy savings, from an economical point of view means cost reduction. From an environmental perspective however, it implies greenhouse gas emission reduction. Through natural ventilation alone, for example, a building can reduce its energy requirements by approximately 40%, and make a similar significant reduction in carbon emissions and costs.

9.3.2 Productivity The introduction of natural light and fresh air provide other significant economic benefits which are not energy savings based.These economic benefits take the form of improved productivity outcomes which result from a healthier working environment.The key factor motivating environmental characteristics in facility design is mounting scientific evidence of improved medical outcomes. An internal courtyard in a laboratory facility represents a functional environment which has supportive characteristics for staff. Other characteristics of a supportive and healthy building environment include aspects such as fresh air, daylight, natural vegetation, views and sound.

9.3.3 Communication, circulation and congregation The internal courtyard space in laboratory buildings is an excellent space which can be used for communication, circulation and congregation. It provides laboratory workers with an enjoyable work space which is a break from typically enclosed office and traditional laboratory surroundings.

9.4 A simple concept As the reliance on external facades to provide natural light or natural ventilation decreases, an internal courtyard within a building space can be used to supplement this. Plate 21 shows how an internal courtyard within a building can utilise natural light and ventilation.Through allowing sunlight penetration from the roof, daylight levels can be introduced into the space. The concept, developed at sketch phase can be rapidly prototyped. Plates 21 and 22 show the evolution of the design. Computer Prototyping allows accurate resolution of design spatials.The figure below shows the sizing of the inlets and outlets as a function of floor area.The simulations show that an inlet equivalent to 4% of floor area and an outlet of equal size is optimal for the space. 78 Laboratory Design Guide

Number of hours that PMV exceeds 0.5

Free Window Area vs PMV For Natural Ventilation

170 160 150 140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 0

1

2

3

4

5

% Total Floor Area

Computer simulation is also applied to provide draft control.The table indicates that a permanently open entrance equal to 2% of floor area will provide acceptable draft control. Entrance area (proportion of courtyard floor area) Maximum air velocities (m/s) Proportion of working hours when air velocities exceed 0.25 m/s

1%

2%

3%

4%

5%

0.27 0.7% (14 hours)

0.27 1.25% (25 hours)

0.3 3.6% (72 hours)

0.32 6% (120 hours)

0.35 6.85% (137 hours)

See Plate 23 – Computer simulation of glare. To allow daylight but reduce glare, simple concepts like a translucent light box can be explored. An example of how effective this particular method can be is shown in Plate 24. Daylight levels on the courtyard floor are strong during a typical mid-season day just through the provision of a translucent light box three levels above used to diffuse daylight. Plate 25 gives us a more human perspective and simulates how it feels to be standing in this naturally lit courtyard.

9.5 Conclusion Courtyards as an ESD feature within laboratory building are valuable items in not only providing circulation space and a social meeting place but also as essential elements in introducing natural light and fresh air into the heart of the building. The benefits of this are twofold. Firstly, such design can be used to drive efficiencies within the building services design. Secondly, ESD initiatives are key drivers for improved Indoor Environmental Quality (IEQ).The existence of a direct link between improving access to natural light and fresh air, and the improvement in both accuracy and productivity in detail-based tasks has been shown. Environmental design: Internal courtyards as an element of ESD 79

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Chapter 10 Occupational health and safety

by Caroline Langley BSc M Safety Sc Grad Dipl Occup Hygiene MSIA, Director, Injury Prevention & Management, Hobart, Tasmania 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4

Introduction Design Hazard Review Hierarchy of control Sources of information in Australia 10.5 Conclusion

10.1 Introduction Laboratories are buildings that perhaps most symbolise the age in which we live. Good laboratory design is an integral part of safe laboratory practice. Poor design and poor maintenance either directly or indirectly results in laboratory accidents and occupational disease. Many laboratory staff are involved in the design process for a new facility only once or twice in their professional lives.Whilst they have considerable knowledge regarding laboratory health and safety, they may not always have adequate time to provide input or fully understand the design processes and constraints. The design phase is the most cost efficient and effective time to control many laboratory hazards at their source. During the short development of a new facility, architects, engineers and other consultants have a unique opportunity to positively influence workplace health and safety for the life of the facility.

10.2 Design Hazard Review A Design Hazard Review (DHR) is a risk identification and assessment process that should be incorporated into every project involving the design of new or refitted laboratory facilities. A DHR is an essential part of the ‘homework’ done by the client to prepare a quality laboratory design brief.

82 Laboratory Design Guide

The DHR involves four discrete steps: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Describe the processes being undertaken. List the raw materials or inputs and the products generated or outputs. Detail the size and the type of equipment in use or proposed to be used. List the known hazards, assess the risk and identify possible control options.

A DHR is best undertaken on a laboratory project by project basis by laboratory team in consultation with facilities management and persons with OHS & E expertise. A DHR may also be equally useful in planning laboratory support facilities such as libraries, administration, engineering and stores areas. A DHR has many advantages including: • • • • •

systematic consultative – encourages staff input at all levels proactive allows hazard controls to be reviewed together provides information for use later in detailed design work.

10.2.1 Describe the process, procedures and practices that will be undertaken by the laboratory team Describe all of the processes, procedures and practices that will be undertaken by the laboratory team e.g. sample receipt, sample preparation, sample analysis, report write-up. This ensures everyone involved can visualise the range of activities proposed and facilities required. This step also helps to illustrate the relationships between different parts of the laboratory e.g. sample reception/registration, laboratories and sample storage.

10.2.2 List the inputs and outputs This will include inventories of hazardous substances and dangerous goods (classes/ classifications, volumes) to be used; laboratory consumables and durables; reticulated services such as gases, water, power, etc. required; and the outputs generated e.g. intermediate products, chemical and biological waste, emissions to atmosphere, trade waste. This step also highlights dangerous goods and hazardous substances’ storage and manual handling requirements. Storage is often overlooked in laboratories – storage space for laboratory consumables and durables, samples before and after analysis or examination, travel boxes and instrument cases, field equipment, and files and notes. Lack of adequate storage space creates many unsafe laboratory work practices e.g. storage in exit routes, accumulation of combustible packing in laboratories, manual handling injuries. Strategies to facilitate safe movement of heavy, awkward or fragile equipment and materials is also an important safety consideration e.g. the movement of gas cylinders and drawers.

Occupational health and safety 83

10.2.3 List the size and type of equipment used This includes all bench and free-standing equipment and equipment used infrequently that may need storage for extended periods.There is a continuing trend towards reliance on the use of expensive and sensitive instrumentation with special requirements for cleanliness, climate control, reticulated services, sample preparation, etc. For example, modern analytical mass balances require vibration isolation, minimal airflow and good temperature control. A well-designed laboratory will be capable of adapting to ‘house’ new techniques and equipment and even major changes in research directions. Flexibility is one of the hallmarks of good modern laboratory design.

10.2.4 List the hazards, assess the risk and identify possible control options Laboratory hazards may be associated with the workplace, systems of work, and equipment and substances used.The hazards associated with each project space should be listed. To assist staff to identify hazards it is often useful to provide a checklist.Table 10.1 is an example. The following is a possible list of hazards that may be associated with the laboratory workplace, methods or procedures, and equipment and substances used. For each hazard identified, an assessment of the risk is required. Australian Standard AS 4360 Risk management provides a tool for conducting a risk assessment using a matrix of probability and consequence.The risk assessment process ensures that high priority hazards are considered first. Where hazards are identified and the risks are high or significant then controls need to be put in place. Controlling risk exposure can be accomplished by a number of methods. These methods form what is known as the ‘Hierarchy of Control’.

10.3 Hierarchy of control The hierarchy of control consists of six stages in decreasing order of priority and effectiveness: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Elimination Substitution Isolation Engineering controls Administrative controls Personal Protective Equipment.

84 Laboratory Design Guide

Table 10.1 Laboratory hazards checklist

1. Mechanical (Plant) 1.1 Vehicles 1.2 Machinery or equipment in motion 1.3 Compression/tension of parts 1.4 Noise 1.5 Vibration 1.6 Pressure equipment (high/vacuum) 2. Radiation 2.1 Ionising (note different types) 2.2 Ultraviolet 2.3 Infrared 2.4 Laser 2.5 Radiofrequency 2.6 Electromagnetic fields 2.7 Extremely low frequency 3. Fire and Explosion 3.1 Flammable/combustible substances 3.2 Explosives 4. Temperature 4.1 High temperature materials 4.2 Cryogenic fluids 5. Hazardous environments 5.1 Confined spaces 5.2 Areas with restricted access/egress 5.3 Working at heights 5.4 Hot or cold environments (thermal stress) 5.5 Hot work (welding, grinding, brazing, cutting, etc.) 6. Electrical 6.1 High voltage equipment 6.2 Live electrical equipment 6.3 Static charge

7. Biological 7.1 Biological materials 7.2 Allergens 7.3 Irritants 7.4 Genotoxins 7.5 Zoonoses 7.6 Handling of small animals 7.7 Handling of large animals 7.8 Handling of human samples 8. Chemical/Hazardous substances 8.1 Carcinogens 8.2 Sensitising agents 8.3 Corrosive agents 8.4 Irritants 8.5 Genotoxins (mutagens, teratogens) 8.6 Toxic/harmful substances 8.7 Generation of gases, vapours, mists, smokes, fumes, dusts, fibres or odours 8.8 Asphyxiant atmospheres 9. Personal 9.1 Manual handling 9.2 Striking and grasping including cuts 9.3 Slips and trips 9.4 Fixed posture, e.g. microscopy 9.5 Repetitive and/or overuse movements, e.g. keyboard, pipetting 9.6 Working alone 9.7 Working out of hours 9.8 Management of visitors 10. Others? 10.1 Security

Occupational health and safety 85

10.3.1 Elimination of the hazard If the hazard can be removed from the workplace by process or substance removal then this is the definitive means of reducing risk. For example: • Freezing of biological samples rather than the use of tissue fixatives such as formaldehyde (an allergen and probable human carcinogen). • Specifying slip-resistant flooring where ever liquids are handled.

10.3.2 Substitution with safer fixtures, fittings, equipment, substances or processes Substitution offers a range of ways for controlling health hazards. For example: • Use of seamless wall and floor finishes that eliminate entrapment of contaminants and allow easy cleanup of spills. Specifying smooth paving on outdoor paths and double leaf doors to facilitate moving equipment. • Ensuring chemical stores are ergonomically designed to facilitate handling breakable packages – shelf height, depth and design loading, adequate aisle width for trolleys, trolley access over bunds. • Specifying good access to building services for maintenance.

10.3.3 Isolation of the worker or the hazard using distance and/or enclosure Isolation of the hazard or the laboratory worker can be achieved using distance, a physical barrier or time. For example: • Segregation of a sample preparation area to isolate airborne contaminants and noise from other laboratory operations. • Specifying bulk chemical storage linked to but separate from laboratory occupancies to limit chemical storage in the laboratory.

10.3.4 Engineering controls Engineering controls minimise risks by controlling hazards at the source of generation. Engineering controls are fundamental to ensuring laboratory airborne contaminants are maintained at levels that are safe and without risk to health. For example: • Fume cupboards are one of the most common engineering controls used in laboratories. However many clients specify fume cupboards when other local exhaust ventilation options such as ventilated benches will provide adequate contaminant control at reduced installation and maintenance costs with improved facility flexibility. • Use of access interlocks and contaminant monitoring in spaces where asphyxiant atmospheres may be generated such as cool rooms.

86 Laboratory Design Guide

10.3.5 Administrative controls Administrative controls rely on staff to adopt strategies to reduce risk including standard operating procedures, management of shifts, job rotations and heightened skills and awareness through training and supervision. For example: • Limiting time spent working in freezers and cool rooms. • Use of a permit to work for maintenance working such as welding or other hot work in a laboratory. • Two-person lift when handling equipment.

10.3.6 Personal Protective Equipment Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) is equipment worn to isolate a person from a hazard present in the workplace.The use of PPE should be restricted to situations where other control measures are not practicable such as emergency situations, or where PPE is being used in conjunction with other control measures e.g. laboratory coats, covered footwear and safety glasses are routinely worn in a laboratory in addition to the use of a fume cupboard. The Hierarchy of Control should be used by selecting the highest ranked reasonably practicable control measure. In some cases a laboratory hazard may require use of a combination of two or more control measures e.g. use of local exhaust ventilation as well as PPE. In most cases, the controls that the laboratory design team will select are related to higher order strategies such as substitution, isolation and engineering controls. The range of controls proposed should be reviewed to identify controls that can be combined and rationalised and to ensure new hazards have not been introduced. The DHR process must be documented – it will provide valuable information during later detailed design work.

10.4 Sources of information in Australia A large amount of information exists on laboratory hazards and their control. There are many informative internet web sites e.g. the National Occupational Health and Safety Commission [www.worksafe.gov.au], Office of the Gene Technology Regulator (OGTR) [www.health.gov.au/ogtr], Australian Radiation Protection and Nuclear Safety Agency (ARPANSA) [www.arpansa.gov.au]; professional bodies e.g. the Australian Institute of Occupational Hygienists (AIOH) [www.aioh.org.au]; as well as industry and technical networks whose participants have high levels of expertise (e.g. Laboratory Safety [email protected]).

Occupational health and safety 87

10.5 Conclusion Occupational health and safety input into the laboratory design process is crucial to ensuring a functional, safe and efficient laboratory facility. A DHR is an essential preparation that should be completed by the client to prepare a quality laboratory design brief.The DHR process will ensure that laboratory hazards are systematically identified and as many as possible are controlled during the design phase using the principles of the ‘Hierarchy of Control’. The DHR process should be conducted by laboratory project teams with input and support from Design Consultants, Facilities Management and OHS & E professionals.

88 Laboratory Design Guide

Chapter 11 Hydraulic services

by Livio Chiarot, Dip Tech MIE Aust AHSCA APPA, Director of Acor Consultants, Engineers, Managers, Infrastructure Planners 11.1 General 11.2 Sanitary drainage and plumbing 11.3 Water systems 11.4 System features 11.5 Materials selection 11.6 Waste disposal

11.1 General Laboratories, including research laboratories undertaking projects with short lifecycles, must consider investment in facility flexibility. Considerations should include: • • • • • •

making rapid changes to the facility minimising disruption to adjacent areas and ongoing experiments provision of an adequate supply and drainage capacity reconfiguration of existing systems provision of adequate waste treatment facilities that will not require augmentation provision to allow easy maintenance.

11.2 Sanitary drainage and plumbing New developments in modular laboratory layouts with prefabricated systems along with the requirement for flexibility provide a special combination of client needs.These needs include a plumbing system that is able to achieve Code compliance, and: • • • • • • • •

can accommodate the modular laboratory arrangement does not require venting through upper floors for the addition of isolated fixtures provides coverage to drain 100% of the building area complies with the relevant standards is cost effective has the option to be installed in multilevel facilities and can accommodate additional levels is constructed out of materials that are easily reconfigured embodies the principles of ESD in its design, manufacture, construction and final recyclability.

90 Laboratory Design Guide

Such a drainage system has been developed by particular application of the aerial drainage system in accordance with AS 3500.This system is in fact a plumbing riser that is able to ‘snake’ up the building over three floors without venting, and over four and further floors by venting only the uppermost levels (Figure 11.1). This system is capable of draining fixtures within a 10-m radius of the riser; however, for practical purposes the radius is limited to 8 m, allowing a further 2 m to rise through the floor to the fixture trap.

11.3 Water systems The reticulated water supply comprises three types: 1. Potable 2. Non-potable 3. Analytical grade. Generally the components of a laboratory water system are not placed in multiple locations. However, a central system is typically designed to comply with lower-grade water standards suitable for glassware washing and non-critical reagents. The potable system reticulates hot and ambient temperature water to public amenities, safety equipment and fire hose reels.The hot water is generally circulated from centralised ecologically sustainable units; common units include solar heat pumps or direct solar-boosted electric units.The water temperature is modified in facilities for the handicapped and in ablution areas by using tempered missing valves.The warm water outlets discharge at 40 °C in amenities for the handicapped, to minimise the risk of scalding in areas accessible by the public. The non-potable system reticulates hot and ambient temperature water to the laboratory fixtures.The hot water is recirculated at 65 °C. The analytical grade water is also recirculated at ambient temperature to each laboratory and to satellite polishing units in individual laboratories, to achieve higher grades of pure water to designated areas.

11.4 System features Each water supply system outlet is fitted with a flow control device to: • • • •

conserve water eliminate water hammer provide reliable and predictable flow control at the tap allow consistent tapware throughout the facility.

The consequential effects will reduce maintenance costs, consumables used in treating the water supply, and the effluent discharged. Hydraulic services 91

92 Laboratory Design Guide Figure 11.1 Laboratory drainage concept

Controls of systems will require protection from blockage by filtration of the supply prior to its entering the building.The filtration unit should ideally be fitted with an automatic blowdown system, and be capable of filtering to between 30 and 50 microns depending on water quality. All water systems are reticulated in inert materials such as polypropylene (PP), and the jointing is carried out using a proprietary electrofusion technique. However, the stabilised version of the PP pipe is required for hot water.This pipe is jacketed with a glass composite in order to stabilise the pipe expansion and provide an appropriate life span for PP operating under elevated temperatures. In order to offer long-term benefits and add value to the project, a system must incorporate the following points. 1. Operation and maintenance: • materials must be corrosion resistant • the system must produce relatively far less noise than the metal alternatives for similar flows and pipe sizes • modification without the use of flame or hazardous substances must be possible • the system must match previously installed systems, therefore assisting in the maintenance • it is recommended that main hot-water runs are insulated. 2. Installation features: • it must be a proven system, readily, efficiently and cost-effectively installed throughout the industry • installation must be simple and clean, with little risk of ‘collateral’ damage • it must be aesthetically pleasing, light and easy to install • it must be environmentally friendly, recyclable and manufactured from non-polluting materials. 3. Material and technology: • the system must be dimensionally stable • linear expansion should be comparable to that of metal pipe • it must be relatively easy to achieve a faultless quality system • material used must be inert and impenetrable and not develop algae, making the system ideal for distributing processed water. 4. System layout: • isolation valves for the potable and non-potable reticulation for hot and cold water should be located outside the laboratory, and provided for each of the branches serving a laboratory zone or model; minor relocations of fixtures within existing bench locations can be handled with individual under-bench isolation valves provided at each fixture • main isolation valves should be located outside laboratory areas. Although the newer systems have a premium to be paid over traditional systems, economies of scale do apply with sufficient quantities and the premium is much reduced. Hydraulic services 93

With this approach, the architectural uses will be: • maintaining flexibility • minimising costs associated with change • minimising any disruption to the remainder of the facility. The processed water should be continuously circulated up to the outlet of each fixture, as this will reduce the risk of contaminating the water stored and carried in containers from a central unit. Furthermore, the down time of carrying out this exercise is clearly inappropriate in an operational sense in world-class facilities.The reticulation system is not amenable to disruption.The manufacturer’s requirements for the generation of this water stipulate that each point shall be taken from a continuous loop with an absolute minimum dead leg to the tap. Special tapware is available to ensure that processed water is not held in the delivery place. To maintain water quality in the loop, the processed water is recycled through the treatment system. However, the PP reticulation system will ensure that disruption is minimised due to its ease of modification and cleanliness. Recent trends reticulate de-ionised water rather than reverse osmosis (RO) water, because of the flexibility offered in terms of capacity to carry out special tasks where RO water simply would not be adequate.The additional cost over the whole processed water system would be in the order of 10% for an enhanced laboratory capability. Decisions such as this should be subject to whole life analysis, which includes operational factors and special requirements.

11.5 Materials selection Material selection for piping and components for laboratories is becoming increasingly more important as the demand for the delivery of uncontaminated fluids at more outlets increases and recurrent costs of the system become more important. Conduits for pure water and gases, including specialised gases, are required to be totally inert so that no contamination occurs to the product prior to use within the laboratory. Similarly, tapware selected should be of the highest quality.There is little point in designing a plumbing system to convey a pure product if it is only to be contaminated at the outlet. Inert pipework materials and fittings that may be considered for use with specialised water and gas services include: • • • •

Polypropylene ABS piping Refrigeration-grade copper tubing Stainless steel.

Refrigeration-grade copper tubing may be used when delivering high quality gases such as NO2 or CO2. Construction using this type of tubing requires special soldering techniques including filling the pipe with an inert gas prior to soldering to prevent pipe scale. 94 Laboratory Design Guide

Stainless steel small bore pipework up to 50 mm is increasingly used in laboratories to deliver processed water and lower grade pressurised water. Although the material supply is costly, the installation is very rapid making the total cost very competitive.The system uses a crimping mechanism and is capable of withstanding very high pressure. Other considerations when selecting materials include the materials used for different types of sinks within the laboratories or within fume cupboards. Sinks should be resistant to a wide variety of corrosive liquids and gases that may come into contact with the sinks. Suitable materials include ceramic, epoxy coating and ABS. Waste pipes, traps and fittings should be selected on the basis of being able to carry the type liquid being discharged, and at the varying temperatures that may be expected from neighbouring equipment such as autoclaves. Discharges of hydrochloric acid will break down plumbing components if neighbouring equipment high-temperature discharges raise the temperature of the acidic waste to 15 °C. Materials that may be considered for drainage include: • • • •

ABS piping High density polyethylene Vitrified clay with acid-resistant neoprene ring joints (inground) Pyrex lass with stainless steel couplings.

Of primary importance with all services within laboratory design is the need to provide flexibility of the system to allow for adaptation for new experiments throughout the life of the building. Pipe sizing should allow spare capacity to be able to cope with varying types of usage, including temperature changes within the discharging pipework system. Adequate provision for pipework expansion is a key issue when considering the temperature of various discharges. Laboratories are considered a high hazard by water authorities, and therefore require individual zone- and site-protection in order to ensure that the potable water supply system is not susceptible to contamination. Inter-laboratory protection of the non-potable system may be required, depending on the type of experiments performed; this ensures that contamination from one experiment does not affect others in the facility’s laboratory operations.There is still a requirement for potable water to be supplied within the laboratories for eyewash units/safety showers and handbasins. All non-potable outlets are to be marked as such, in accordance with AS 3500. Identification of services is important for all laboratories, AS 1345 (Identification of Pipes and Ducts) indicates the correct method of identification. All piped services outlets are to be identified using the colour chart associated with that particular service as identified in the DIN Standard.

11.6 Waste disposal Laboratories are generators of considerable waste and effluent. Increasing pressure on environmental sustainability has led to waste management systems being integrated into the design. Hydraulic services 95

These systems include: • Container management and disposal • Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) disposal • Effluent treatment and disposal. Generally, the sustainable approach is embodied in an Environmental Management Plan of which the water and waste management procedures form a major part. The sustainable laboratory treatment begins at design phase, which minimises waste by careful attention to building configuration.This reduces abortive work or wastage related to reconfiguration of services and building fabric to accommodate new or reorganised laboratories. Fundamentally, this process refers to material selections, inbuilt flexibility in building services, modular walls and fittings, and flexibility in connected hydraulic fixtures and coupling systems. The sustainable laboratory treatment continues in the operational phase, which further minimises waste production via implementation of waste minimisation procedures.The trend is for an on-site treatment prior to discharge into the sewer systems depending on the type and nature of effluent. Sustainable treatment trends include filtration and rapid-spray evaporation, reducing effluent to reusable water and loose salts which are easily handled and removed from site. The power for such systems could be recovered heat from air-conditioning plant or more appropriately a vertical axis (non-blade) wind-powered generator.The system can be cost-effective when trade waste disposal charges are considered.

96 Laboratory Design Guide

Chapter 12 Mechanical services

by Robert Lord, BE Mechanical (Hons) Grad Dip Management RPEQ, Senior Engineer Lincolne Scott 12.1 General 12.2 Decoupled design approach 12.3 Integration with other consultants 12.4 Air quality systems 12.5 Thermal control systems 12.6 Acoustic considerations 12.7 Energy considerations 12.8 Future proofing considerations

12.1 General 12.1.1 Purpose The modern laboratory building provides some extraordinary challenges to the mechanical engineer. It is the purpose of this chapter to present design approaches that address those challenges without technical compromise, whilst satisfying the vast array of stakeholders typical in the design and construction of a new laboratory building. This chapter focuses on recommended design approaches, not specific technical details.There are excellent technical details available in a variety of texts and the application of those details varies tremendously depending on site, applicable codes and client requirements. This chapter is written drawing upon international and local design experiences and is intended to be non-specific in relation to a country’s practice or terminology. It is envisaged that the readers are able to apply a competent interpretation of the following design concepts that are compliant to relevant codes.

12.1.2 Scope The mechanical engineer is tasked with providing the benefits illustrated in Figure 12.1. These benefits are not the sole responsibility of the mechanical engineer; rather the responsibility is shared with the architect.The tasks require a high level of integration with other design elements if the benefits are to be successfully provided.

12.1.3 Extent The benefits mentioned above can be distilled into the following extent of work. 98 Laboratory Design Guide

Thermal Control (Temperature and Humidity)

Air Quality

Cleanliness

Containment

Draft-Free Air Movement

Mechanical services 99

Figure 12.1 The mechanical engineer is tasked with providing these benefits

User controls

Stability

Comfort

User controls

12.1.4 Air quality Provision of : 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

cleaned air within the laboratory appropriate extraction systems air diffusion to avoid drafts appropriate pressure differentials appropriate intakes and discharge systems and their locations user-activated controls in addition to automatic systems.

This extent of work is the possible extent; the actual extent will vary from project subject to relevant codes and client desire.

12.1.5 Thermal control Provision of : 1. 2. 3. 4.

reliable, stable temperature control reliable, stable humidity control systems that can provide alternative conditions when requested by users systems for specimen storage.

12.2 Decoupled design approach 12.2.1 Decoupled vs coupled design Many mechanical systems are coupled (i.e. when they operate, they affect more than one parameter of interest). An example is a system where additional cooling requires additional cold air which in turn affects humidity, air pressure and air movement detrimentally. Figure 12.2 incorporates an example schematic for a conventional laboratory AHU plant utilising 100% outside air. Note that the equipment operates in series and variations in temperatures or humidities upstream can affect delivery of thermal control systems. The coupling of services enables one piece of plant to do several tasks in a non-critical fashion and is appropriate for non-critical applications such as comfort systems for offices or apartments. Laboratory environmental control is often critical.The compromise of service in using a coupled system in a laboratory often requires complicated controls and accessories to achieve desired performance. A decoupled system is one where each parameter is controlled by a piece of plant in parallel with other services, such that their delivery does not affect other parameters. An example may be a laboratory where make-up air is ‘heat-neutral’ such that the opening of the fume cupboard and subsequent provision of make-up air does not compromise thermal control. (Note:The term fume cupboard is used in this chapter. Depending on country of origin, the reader may 100 Laboratory Design Guide

VSD

ROOM PRESSURE

100% OUTSIDE AIR

M

M

COOLING

REHEAT

ROOM ROOM HUMIDITY TEMPERATURE AND ROOM TEMPERATURE

Figure 12.2 An example of laboratory AHU plant schematic

Mechanical services 101

be more familiar with the expression fume hood. Similarly the reader is directed to interpret comments for fume cupboards as applicable to fume cabinets within the appropriate context.) Decoupled design has the following advantages over ‘coupled design’: 1. The service can be optimised for performance without the compromises of conventional systems. 2. It is easier to provide a controllable service. 3. It is easier to provide an energy-efficient service. 4. It is easier to provide a stable service. 5. It is easier to accommodate alterations in equipment used, operating hours, ventilation needs, tasks and layouts. Note that in a decoupled design, each piece of plant operates in parallel with each other and steps are taken to ensure they do not affect other parameters. Each parameter has only one controller.When individual choice is provided to the users, some minor coupling often becomes inevitable.The engineer needs to evaluate the extent of minor coupling and determine whether there is value in corrective measures.

12.3 Integration with other consultants 12.3.1 The need to integrate When reviewing the benefits required from the Mechanical Services, it is apparent that integration is required to achieve the best technical results and that there are various levels of integration.

Level of integration

Field

Example

Philosophical

Comfort Operation and control Energy efficiency Indoor air quality Future proofing

Role and selection of glazing Extent of operating hours and degree of ‘ownership’ by various groups Use of passive design and systems that do not fight nature Pressure differentials and required construction types Type and use of laboratory

Trade

Boundaries Procurement

Laboratory spaces by different contractors Prefabrication of cool rooms or onsite construction

Spatial

Plant Service routes Intake/discharges

Location and maintenance Riser locations Separation distances and quality of intake air

Detail

Fire rating Air diffusion

Penetrations Locations to avoid draft and prevent containment problems

102 Laboratory Design Guide

In most instances, the design team will benefit from the overt definition of areas of integration and the measures to be undertaken to ensure the best technical result.

12.3.2 ‘Forgotten’ areas of integration Some key areas of integration that are costly to rectify if forgotten, and yet are often overlooked include: 1. Detailing of air leakage paths to ensure desired pressure differentials can be maintained and if required altered. 2. Assessment of the architectural materials and installation for their impact upon provision of comfort. 3. Fire rating and acoustic details for penetrations. 4. The extent of future proofing. 5. Location of air diffusion to prevent draft on work spaces.

12.4 Air quality systems 12.4.1 Intake air systems Intake location is the key planning initiative when considering the air quality of the laboratory building. Generic recommendations for consideration include: 1. To be 15 m away in plan view from any other noxious discharge. 2. To be at least 4 m above a major road, car park or bituminised space (where the bituminised space is part of a new development, advise your client of the risk of entraining ‘new works’ off-gassing). 3. To be at least 4 m below the roof deck where the laboratory exhaust systems discharge. 4. Notwithstanding the above the intake should be 12 m below the laboratory exhaust discharge location. 5. To be located on the prevailing wind-side of the building. These guidelines are to be applied in conjunction with relevant local authority guidelines and with consideration to the ‘upstream’ quality of air that may be affected by adjoining properties. Assuming a high quality of intake air is achieved by the location, the only process for the intake air is typically one of particulate filtration.Whilst laboratory types may have specific needs, a performance of high quality deep-bed disposable filtration with appropriate dust holding capacity is a recommended minimum for outside air treatment. Filter condition monitoring should always be installed. Intake air systems ideally will have preconditioning fitted. Preconditioning isolates the laboratory from the significant swings and range of thermal conditions experienced in outside air. Most importantly, preconditioning outside air should lower relative humidity (RH) in the duct systems below 65% RH to minimise the risk of mould growth.This may be achieved with the use of heat pipes, run around coils or sensible energy exchange wheels. Mechanical services 103

Supply ducts ought to be constructed to SMACNA standard for medium pressure and leak-tested prior to commissioning. Delivery of intake air is generally into the mixing plenums of Air Handling Units (AHUs).Where delivery of outside air is direct into the laboratory space, it needs to be done with care to avoid disturbing air patterns in the work space or near the fume cupboard.

12.4.2 Extraction systems Extraction systems are the key safety elements within the laboratory space. Generic rules for consideration include: 1. Exhaust as close as possible to the pollutant source within the laboratory. 2. Separate extraction systems to the greatest extent possible, firstly on the basis of duty, then on the basis of laboratory numbers. 3. Locate discharges to be on the dominant leeward-side of the building. 4. Locate discharges to be vertical, ideally between 18 and 20 m and at least 3 m above the roof deck. 5. Depending on the level of containment, the use of HEPA filtration of exhaust may be required by codes. 6. When specifying extraction systems, provide capacity flexibility through the use of variable speed drives and belt driven assemblies. The modern laboratory benefits greatly from the use of ‘snorkel’ exhaust systems which allow a wider variety of activities in the work space. Snorkel systems do not eliminate the need for fume cupboards, but rather increase the productivity and safety of the bench space. Within the laboratory, there will be several exhaust systems that ought to be separated. Exhaust system

Comment

Fume cupboard Chemical storage Pressure differential systems Snorkel exhaust General exhaust

Variable air flow, variable operation (50–500 l/s) Constant air flow, constant operation (50 l/s typical) Variable air flow, constant operation, rate subject to leakage path calculations Constant air flow, variable operation, 100 l/s typical per head Constant air flow, constant operation, rate subject to laboratory risks but in a well-designed laboratory is typically 4 air changes per hour

Often, the fume cupboards incorporate chemical storage compartments within them. Whilst this has been popular to reduce capital costs, it places additional energy costs upon the mechanical design. A more cost-effective system is often to provide pressure differential protection and general exhaust through the oversizing of the chemical storage exhaust system and the provision of set relief ducts into the laboratory. Proper detailing of the air gaps around doors will shift the controllability of the differential pressure back to the 104 Laboratory Design Guide

dampers within relief ducts, allowing easier commissioning and the ability to reset at a later date. All exhaust ducts should be constructed to SMACNA medium pressure standard and leak tested.The route of the exhaust system should be considered carefully as a possible hazard is a leak through duct joints. More discussion of fume cupboards is incorporated in Chapter 5 of this text.

12.4.3 Air patterns Introduction Air movement is of importance as it can distribute pollutant and compromise environment control. Poor air movement could result in the following failures: 1. Some areas of the laboratory possibly suffering higher levels of bacterial growth. 2. Disrupted entry conditions into fume cupboards and possible loss of containment. 3. Uneven temperatures and humidities near sensitive equipment. Generic suggestions include: 1. Locating fume cupboards 600 mm (minimum) away from corners or other obstructions. 2. Minimising the amount of air. 3. The use and generous application of laminar flow diffusion equipment or terminal HEPA units. 4. The air movement of 0.2 m/s should be seen as a suitable design target. 5. The use of snorkel equipment and other appropriate containment devices allows a reduction in total air change rates and hence makes general air management easier. 6. The location of air diffusers in corners should be avoided. Where site constraints provide a ‘less-than-ideal’ situation, some modelling is prudent. Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) is one modelling tool, however other tools are also available (see Plate 26). Plate 27 portrays a CFD simulation of the containment of pollutant within the fume cupboard despite the presence of people adjacent to it and the location of the fume cupboard in a corner.The colours indicate pollutant concentration and that no pollutant escapes the fume cupboard in this instance.The arrows on the right of the image indicate a high velocity has arisen as a result of placing diffusion in that corner.

12.4.4 Pressure differentials Introduction Pressure differential is of importance as it can contain pollutant and compromise environment control. Poor pressure control could result in the following failures: 1. Adjacent areas of the laboratory possibly suffering pollutant contamination. 2. Variations in room airflow. Mechanical services 105

Generic suggestions include: 1. Building a tight construction for the laboratory spaces (walls, windows and doors). 2. Creating a controllable (commission-able) relief path. 3. Controlling the pressures of adjacent corridors etc. and planning these corridors/airlocks as having individual pressure control. 4. Measuring all air entering and leaving the laboratory space. Thermal expansion may be an issue in climates where there is a wide variety of external conditions. Early discussion of door types and seals is often overlooked with the result that the relief airflow is quite small and influenced unduly by external door openings or wind pressures. The use of orifice plates is discouraged unless they are interchangeable. Future alterations of laboratories often affect pressure differentials and it is valuable to be able to alter the pressure loss across the relief path.

12.4.5 User control systems Introduction User control over ventilation systems is of importance as it can upset thermal control containment and experimental activities. Lack of intimacy between users and control systems could result in the following failures: 1. Some restriction in laboratory activities. 2. Disrupted entry conditions in fume cupboards and possible loss of containment. Generic suggestions include: 1. Thorough interview process during design to interpret range of activities and equipment. 2. Discussion with laboratory management about future containment protocols. 3. Provision of an ‘extreme ventilation’ switch adjacent to exit doors.These switches indicate that an emergency has occurred and ventilation at its absolute maximum is requested. Consideration of door pressures and other services systems is recommended. The use of these switches can assist in laboratory recovery and cleanup and reduce the extent of downtime. 4. Where automatic sash closing systems are considered beneficial (from an operating cost or safety perspective), specify the laser eye functions which can determine whether equipment is outside of the fume cupboard boundary. Whilst the author of this chapter recommends the use of automatic sash closing equipment as described above due to the compelling higher levels of safety and reduced ongoing costs, the issue of adoption may require management of staff behaviour.This is an expensive item and obtaining acceptance from users is an activity for the designers to undertake before completing schematic design.

106 Laboratory Design Guide

12.5 Thermal control systems 12.5.1 Reliable, stable temperature control Cooling air Temperature control is of importance as it can affect calibration of sensitive equipment, it could affect reaction rates and create discomfort for laboratory users. Poor temperature control could result in the following failures: 1. Some areas of the laboratory possibly suffering higher levels of bacterial growth. 2. Uneven temperatures near sensitive equipment. 3. User dissatisfaction and a possible increase in human error as a result. Generic suggestions include: 1. Provision of local, independent temperature control (i.e. ⫹/⫺2 °C). 2. Provision of heat-neutral, pre-conditioned outside air. 3. Careful consideration of the architecture to ensure there are no significant solar gains through glazing or orientation. 4. Degree of exposed mass where possible to provide some inertia to temperature movement. 5. Utilisation of high quality temperature sensors. 6. In critical locations, use of ganged temperature sensors is warranted.This is the co-location of three sensors such that drift in one sensor is identified and therefore can be highlighted for maintenance attention. The use of electrical equipment in laboratories poses a particular problem. It is not uncommon to have 1500 watts of plug load heat in use in a small laboratory. It is typical to utilise chilled-water air handling plant to provide cooling to laboratories.This system provides flexibility and access to highly efficient forms of cooling. In order to provide cooling that does not affect humidity levels, it is important to have supply air temperatures above dewpoint.This practice also minimises the risk of local, unwanted spot cooling below diffusers. An unfortunate aspect of this approach is that slightly higher air quantities are required. The use of heat-neutral outside air allows the laboratory plant to focus on events within the laboratory.The ‘upstream’ impacts of the weather outside are then decoupled from affecting the laboratory. Where a coupled design is unavoidable (for example, because of budget or client desire), a good solution is the use of controllable heat pipes or run around coils within the AHU that allow the supply air temperature to respond to the temperature needs of the space whilst the off-coil temperature responds to the dehumidification needs of the space. Two alternative solutions that may resolve this problem are: 1. The use of snorkel ventilation to extract heat from heat sources locally. 2. The use of water-based cooling to minimise if not eliminate the amount of cooling by air.

Mechanical services 107

Snorkels are particularly effective where heat sources are known and localised (e.g. Computer fans). However, the use of water-based cooling has energy and future proofing benefits. Water-based cooling devices can incorporate elements bonded to fixed cleanable ceiling or suspended elements that are fitted with covers to allow cleaning. More information on these systems is included in the thermal control section (see Plate 28). It must be stressed that this task (provision of stable temperature control) requires more interaction with the other members of the design team than any other task. It is imperative that an appropriate degree of modelling of glazing and mass is undertaken and architectural advice provided at the earliest possible moment.The use of technology alone cannot provide as stable an environment as that where the use of technology is integrated with the design of building elements.

12.5.2 Reliable, stable humidity control Humidity control is of importance as it can affect calibration of sensitive equipment and it can influence biological growth. Poor moisture control could result in the following failures: 1. Some areas of the laboratory possibly suffering higher levels of bacterial growth. 2. Uneven humidities near sensitive equipment. The use of dewpoint rather than RH is an important strategy as it separates the required control response into either temperature control or moisture control. RH control is satisfactory for non-critical applications but is unlikely to give an appropriate control response to a critically controlled laboratory space. Generic suggestions include: 1. Provision of local, independent dewpoint control (i.e. ⫹/⫺1 °C). 2. Provision of heat-neutral, pre-conditioned outside air. 3. Careful consideration of the architecture to ensure there are no significant solar gains through glazing or orientation. 4. Degree of exposed mass where possible to provide some inertia to temperature movement. 5. Utilisation of high quality dewpoint sensors. 6. In critical locations, use of ganged dewpoint sensors is warranted. (This is the co-location of three sensors such that drift in one sensor is identified and therefore can be highlighted for maintenance attention.) The use of heat-neutral outside air allows the laboratory plant to focus on events within the laboratory.The ‘upstream’ impacts of the weather outside are then decoupled from affecting the laboratory. It is typical to utilise chilled-water air handling plant to provide dehumidification to laboratories. This system provides flexibility and access to highly efficient forms of dehumidification. In order to provide dehumidification that does not affect temperature levels, it is important to have the means to maintain supply air temperatures whilst dehumidifying.This practice also minimises the risk of unwanted spot cooling below diffusers. 108 Laboratory Design Guide

Two alternative solutions that may resolve this problem are: 1. The use of snorkel ventilation to extract moisture from moisture sources locally. 2. The use of packaged desiccant dehumidifiers to minimise if not eliminate the complexity of controls.

12.5.3 Provisions of user intimacy Recent surveys of office workers demonstrate a higher productivity when provided with control over their own environment.This is equally true for the laboratory user. Intimacy with the environmental systems within the laboratory provide an avenue for better performance and higher levels of safety within a laboratory.The design and construction process is enhanced when a specific education process for laboratory users is incorporated. Generic recommendations include: 1. Provision of independent temperature and dewpoint control. 2. Provision of modes for services. Mode provision allows an engineer to provide higher levels of service temporarily without significant capital cost and ongoing environmental impact. An excellent example is a laboratory capable of operating at a passive mode for ‘set-up’ activities, an experimental mode for non-critical experiments, a critical experiment mode and an emergency mode. The control over temperature in particular has been shown to reduce human accidents and this is a critical safety feature of a laboratory. Limited control only is sufficient.

12.5.4 Systems for specimen storage Specimen storage is critical to the results produced by the laboratory. Key issues for specimen storage include: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Provision of stable thermal control. Provision of continuous ventilation to dilute off-gassing. Provision of spill control ventilation. Provision of sufficient air movement and variety of air movement to minimise mould growth.

Generic recommendations include: 1. A minimum air change rate of 6 air changes in 24 hours, made up by heat-neutral outside air. 2. The use of radiant cooling or heating devices as a form of heat transfer that accesses deep inside the shelving. 3. The use of appropriate packaged desiccant dehumidifier devices. Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) control is required to be fitted to the dehumidifiers to achieve intent. Mechanical services 109

4. Permeable shelving complete with the ability to mount temperature dewpoint sensors within. 5. The location of ‘high spill risk’ specimens underneath an extraction hood that is manually operated in an emergency. 6. The use of well-insulated and vapour-sealed enclosures with conditioned air locks. The use of radiant devices and packaged desiccant dehumidification allows a thermal control response from the plant that ‘slows down’ as it approaches setpoint.This allows the controllers to react and avoid overshoot.The other benefits of these systems is that a very small capacity device can be easily created and utilised, as opposed to the previously conventional AHUs.

12.6 Acoustic considerations Laboratory surfaces are required to be hardwearing and cleanable, and often this will create a challenge in creating a working acoustic environment. Acoustic disruption within a laboratory may be minimised by several methods, namely careful equipment selection, limiting fluid flow velocities and isolation of key mechanical ducting and piping systems. Generic suggestions include: 1. Consider the use of piping systems above ducted systems. 2. Isolate with flexible connections, duct and pipe connections into the laboratory where laboratories are sourced within 12 m of plantrooms. 3. Limit pipe velocity to 2 m/s (maximum). 4. Limit non-exhaust duct velocities to 5 m/s (maximum). 5. Isolate all duct and pipe work serving laboratories with microscopy equipment. 6. Ductwork should be fabricated to SMACNA medium pressure standards. 7. Where floor-mounted equipment is within 12 m of the microscopy laboratory space concrete inertia pads shall be utilised with all rotating machinery greater than 0.55 kW drive. 8. Minimise air quantities where possible. Whilst much acoustic and vibration attenuation is provided by structural design and architecture, these are relatively expensive responses compared to adopting the above suggestions.

12.7 Energy considerations 12.7.1 Introduction Energy use within laboratories is recognised as significant yet necessary. NFPA 45 states that no energy efficiency measures are to compromise the performance of the services within the laboratory. Nevertheless, energy considerations lead to performance considerations and allow the mechanical designer to focus on the life cycle impact of their service. 110 Laboratory Design Guide

Generic suggestions include: 1. Use of recirculating fume cabinets where appropriate or permitted by standards (see Chapter 5). 2. Use of central exhaust fume cupboards where appropriate or permitted by standards. 3. Automatic sash closing on fume cupboards. 4. Snorkel ventilation systems in lieu of generic exhaust hoods. 5. Use of water-based cooling and heating where appropriate. 6. Night/weekend or ‘unoccupied mode’ setback control algorithms that gently relax temperature and humidity setpoints when laboratories are unoccupied. 7. The use of packaged desiccant dehumidifiers mounted within joinery. 8. Provision of heat-neutral outside air systems as make-up for extraction systems. 9. Minimising the amount of air required to be treated, delivered and exhausted. Laboratories can function with natural ventilation and daylight if carefully planned.Whilst this is uncommon, the growing tendency to make laboratory users appreciate the energy and maintenance costs of the laboratory buildings will tend to make laboratory users appreciate passive design systems more over time.The central theme through the design of such a laboratory is to be able to function in several modes and have service provision appropriate for those modes. Past failures in naturally ventilated laboratories have come about when users have insufficient control over the passive elements (e.g. high level openings affecting airflow patterns and conditions during an experiment).This element can save enormous operating costs but requires a carefully integrated approach inviting input from many members of the design team. Often overlooked considerations include security, acoustics and required air quality. Another consideration is the nature of equipment stored exposed on benches. Whilst this is not a good management practice, it is a regular practice. Significant variations in relative humidity or temperature can affect the calibration of sensitive equipment. It is ideal for all stakeholders to have a safe storage facility that is not directly exposed to these elements. An example of the implementation of the energy reduction strategies mentioned above is the US Government’s National Marine Fisheries Laboratory in Honolulu. The design incorporates the following energy saving features: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Radiant cooling. Solar dehumidification and desiccant-disinfected outside air. Decoupled design incorporating heat-neutral outside air. Cooling provided in low load periods by solar-heated chiller. A high degree of intimacy between users and systems. Setback conditions for unoccupied periods. Automatic sash closing fume cupboards. Extensive use of snorkel ventilation systems. Mechanical services 111

The system was analysed using DOE2.2 and determined to have 55% reduction in energy consumption compared to best practice laboratory design.Within the context of Honolulu’s power market, the economic payback of these measures is estimated at eight years.

12.8 Future proofing considerations 12.8.1 Introduction Future proofing can be defined as providing the infrastructure for non-disruptive upgrade or alteration of the services within the laboratory. Generic suggestions include: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Arrange systems with no recirculation of air. Arrange diffusion with laminar flow outlets and terminal HEPA units. Arrange control stations with flexibility for an additional 30% points. Arrange zoning to incorporate future partitioning. A zone size of approximately 40 m2 (minimum) is sufficient. Decouple services design to provide heat-neutral outside air in reaction to extraction systems. Consider the extent of snorkel ventilation trunking duct. Consider the use of radiant heating and cooling panels fixed to the slab to provide temperature control. Consider the use of packaged humidifiers and desiccant dehumidifiers mounted within joinery.

112 Laboratory Design Guide

Chapter 13 Electrical services

by James McPherson, BE (Elec) MIE Aust, Manager, Building and Industrial Services, GHD Pty Ltd., Newcastle 13.1 Introduction 13.2 Relevant Australian codes and standards 13.3 Power supply and reticulation 13.4 Bench electrical services 13.5 Electrical safety 13.6 Hazardous zones 13.7 General lighting

13.1 Introduction Laboratory equipment has always been, by its very nature, at the very forefront of technology yet has become highly specialised and capital intensive. Modern laboratory equipment both enables an operator to provide accurate and fast results but will also need to be in operation when and as often as required without interruption or failure to provide suitable returns on the initial investment. The modern laboratory has thus become a facility heavily dependent on its electrical infrastructure to operate at a high efficiency and provide accurate results. A carefully designed electrical infrastructure will provide a solid basis on which to achieve the best results from the operation of the facility, equipment and personnel. Also along with the high demands that the equipment places on an electrical system, modern laboratories must be flexible enough to change with technologies and consumer demand to retain optimum efficiency and cost effectiveness. Electrical systems must reflect these requirements with inbuilt flexibility to be modified as required with minimal interruption and cost. A designer will therefore need to consider, not only power supply capacity, but also consider the reticulation structure, power conditioning, energy efficiency, reticulation and flexibility to ensure that a laboratory facility is functioning to its fullest potential. 114 Laboratory Design Guide

13.2 Relevant Australian codes and standards When designing an electrical system for a laboratory, as a minimum, the following standards and codes should be referenced: Building Code of Australia; AS/NZS 3000: 2000 – Electrical wiring rules; AS/NZS 2243: 1997 – Safety in Laboratories (All Parts); AS/NZS 2982.1: 1997 – Laboratory Design and Construction (All Parts); AS 2430 – Classification of Hazardous Areas; AS/NZS 2430.3.3 – Examples of Area Classification: Flammable Liquids; AS/NZS 2430.3.4 – Examples of Area Classification: Flammable Gases; AS/NZS 2430.3.6 – Examples of Area Classification: Laboratories including fume cupboards and flammable medical agents; AS/NZS 2293.1: 1998 – Emergency Evacuation Lighting for buildings; AS/NZS 1670 – Fire Detection, warning control and intercom systems; and AS 1680 – Interior Lighting (All Parts).

13.3 Power supply and reticulation As with any commercial facility, a reliable and robust power supply is paramount to providing a high level of operations within a laboratory. The power supply and power reticulation for a modern laboratory must be carefully structured to provide a high level of reliability and ease of expansion or modification. The power supply for a laboratory environment should consist of the following elements: • • • •

Properly rated and protected incoming supply; Spare capacity for system expansion and peak loading; Flexible reticulation systems to ensure maximum usage of laboratory space; and Use of backup power supplies such as diesel generators and uninterruptible power supplies to enable basic operation of the facility during a power failure.

13.3.1 Incoming supply The incoming supply must be of sufficient capacity to provide the demand of the laboratory, to ensure that supply is maintained even during peak demand with high air conditioning, refrigeration and ventilation demands on the system. Power overloads and power failure will cause costly interruptions to operations and possible valuable losses of expensive and irreplaceable stock but also can cause damage to expensive equipment and instrumentation.

13.3.2 Surge protection The incoming power supply will need to be fitted with adequate surge protection in the form of surge diverters or filters. Electrical services 115

13.3.3 Surge diverters Surge diverters will provide a measure of protection from power surges caused by an external fault or lightning strike, however the protection is limited to clamping the voltage spike to a level that still may exceed the limits of electronic equipment causing damage and failure. Additional filters will still be required on selected (if not all) electronic equipment and instrumentation.

13.3.4 Power filters Power filters provide a high degree of protection from incoming power surges. This option of power supply protection is significantly more expensive than the diverter option so protected circuits or equipment should be carefully chosen to maximise the filters’ effectiveness and reduce the upfront capital costs.

13.3.5 Multiple buildings All interconnection copper cables are potential sources of transmitting voltage surges or spikes due to lighting strikes to an adjacent building or the intermediate ground. These surges can cause large amounts of damage to a remote unprotected building. Therefore, where multiple buildings are supplied from a single main switchboard or point of supply, surge diverters and/or surge filters will be necessary to properly protect the site from power surges due to the interconnection of the buildings by the copper cables.

13.3.6 Backup power supply Due to the critical nature of processes and equipment commonly used in the laboratory environment, consideration should be given to the requirement of emergency power supplies including generator backup and uninterruptible power supplies (UPS). Backup services equipment and processes need to be carefully considered and prioritised due to high capital and running expenses to ensure the proposed loads supplied by the backup systems are restricted to those that are critical in nature to the operations of the facility and are sensitive to power interruptions.

13.3.7 Generator backup Generator backup supplies should be utilised to support selected systems and services that can endure a power interruption but are required to be maintained during an extended power failure. Examples of typical systems and services supplied from the generator (or the ‘essential’) power supply may include: • Selected air conditioning and ventilation including fume cabinets, fresh air fans and A/C located in critical operational areas; • Refrigeration and freezers including specimen and blood fridges; • Selected general power outlets (GPOs) supplying essential equipment; and • Selected lighting in required operational areas. 116 Laboratory Design Guide

13.3.8 Cable reticulation Depending on the size of the facility, the cable reticulation systems will vary in complexity but at all times it is important to create a reticulation system that provides maximum flexibility for change and upgrade of the laboratory operations. Cable reticulation is best provided by strategically located cable tray providing access from the distribution boards to the laboratory systems and benches. Distribution boards and cable tray should have spare capacity (if possible) to allow the installation of additional cable at a future date and to also allow deletion and modification of existing cabling systems. Cable tray should be run within the ceiling space to the suspended bollard infrastructure or to benches utilising services poles or similar. Alternatively cabling may be run in the ceiling space below the laboratory level and run up through the floor of the laboratory to the benches located above. This is especially suited to laboratories housed in multi-storey buildings. An example has been illustrated in Figure 13.1and Plate 9.

13.4 Bench electrical services Due to the complex nature of the tasks required to be conducted at most laboratory benches, a high concentration of electrical services will need to be provided to the benches. The services will also require the ability to allow for both the expansion of the services as well as the flexibility to alter the services according to future need. This requirement also will apply to the non-electrical services including water, gas, data and voice communications services. The electrical services will be further complicated if the facility is fitted with Non-Essential, Essential (Generator) and UPS supplies with varying capacities required throughout specific areas within a laboratory (i.e. some laboratory areas may require high levels of UPS due to the sensitive nature of the process and equipment where others of a less critical nature can be unsupported during a power failure). Ideally, the benches should be provided with a dedicated circuit from each type of power supply. This would allow for additional power outlets to be added to any source or for an existing power outlet to be swapped to any alternative source. However this may not be possible in all installations due to additional capital cost and therefore only be provided where necessary with provision for additional circuits to be installed. The bench layout (as discussed elsewhere in this book) will need to be designed to allow the installation of power outlets, communication outlets and gas outlets along the bench for easy access to equipment. Locations of electrical power outlets will need to be coordinated with the locations of sinks and other services to ensure compliance with relevant standards. The outlet types will need to be considered and suitable types used in appropriate locations. The outlet types will need to be compatible with laboratory requirements for cleaning and chemical resistance etc. Electrical services 117

PROMASEAL FIRE RESISTANT MORTAR MINIMUM 2 × 40 mm2 PVC ELECTRICAL CONDUIT

90 mm PROMASEAL ‘GRAFITEX’ SEALANT

PROMATEXT H 9 mm BOARD DIVISION

GROUPED SERVICES PENETRATION DETAIL N. T. S

GPO′S & COMMS DATA OUTLET

COMMS/DATA OUTLETS SERVICES RISER DUCT THROUGH TO SERVICES RISER

GAS OUTLETS

COMMS POWER MOVEABLE UNDER BENCH CUPBOARDS & DRAWER UNITS

ELECTRICAL TRUNKING

40 mm PVC CONDUIT

HYDRAULIC SERVICES

GPO′S

GAS OUTLET

COMMS POWER ELECTRICAL TRUNKING

CABLE TRAY NOTE 1

40 mm PVC CONDUIT CABLE TRAY NOTE 1

SERVICES HOB

SERVICES HOB

WALL BENCHES FIXED

MOVEABLE BENCHES WITH SERVICES SPINE N. T. S

N. T. S

25 mm2 PVC ELECTRICAL CONDUIT

GAS OUTLET

PROCESS GAS

HYDRAULIC SERVICES

ELECTRICAL SERVICES TRUNKING ELECTRICAL CONDUIT SERVICES HOB 90 mm PROMASEAL ‘GRAFITEX’ SEALANT OR SIMILIAR

Figure 13.1 Services spine details

118 Laboratory Design Guide

13.5 Electrical safety Safety in laboratories is an essential issue and needs to be considered in conjunction with the standards detailed above as well as in the laboratory operational guidelines required to be produced by the laboratory facility management. Electrical safety is an important element of this safety regime. There are two requirements under the Australian Standards that are required to provide electrical safety. The first being Residual Current Devices on circuits and the second being the provision of emergency power disconnect switches in the laboratory power supply systems.

13.5.1 Residual current devices Residual Current Devices (RCD) are circuit breaker devices that can detect small leakage currents to earth (30 mA) tripping the circuit and clearing a fault extremely quickly. Currents above this level can be fatal. These circuit breakers should be arranged to protect circuits in the laboratory environment. However, some electrical equipment such as refrigerators, freezers and some electrical heating appliances naturally have small leakage currents. If these are to be connected in a laboratory space and are grouped on one circuit, nuisance tripping may occur under normal operating conditions resulting in the possible loss of valuable stock. It may be that the levels of leakage current may prevent the connection of such devices on a RCD protected circuit. If this is the case then the particular apparatus should be connected to a circuit without RCD protection fitted with a warning label indicating the circuit is not RCD protected.

13.5.2 Emergency power disconnection switches Emergency power disconnect switch requirements are detailed in the Australian Standard for laboratories and their form are detailed in AS/NZS 3000. The emergency disconnect switches should be located in an easily accessible location in an exit path from the laboratory and, when operated, should disconnect all power outlets in the laboratory or respective area. Lighting to the laboratory should not be switched and non-accessible equipment like cold rooms and other plant that is not often accessed by the staff in the laboratory also need not be switched. The emergency switch should be clearly labelled and located to prevent accidental operation.

13.5.3 Location of electrical apparatus The design process can have a direct impact on the safety of the laboratory environment and most design decisions will require a clear understanding of how personnel intend to operate within the laboratory. Placement of electrical outlets near sinks, heat sources, gas outlets, fume cupboards, wash-up areas, etc. can have a direct impact on safety within a laboratory and therefore must be located with care. Electrical services 119

13.6 Hazardous zones Modern laboratories often utilise flammable liquids as part of day-to-day tasks, both on the benches and within the fume cupboards. The locations of flammable liquids, gases and equipment that utilise these substances is subject to Australian Standards and Occupational Health and Safety regulations governing the storage, use and proximity to electrical equipment. As with any commercial facility functional space is a premium that must be efficiently used. If the hazardous zones are not clearly identified and understood by both the designer and the laboratory personnel valuable laboratory space can be zoned off-limits to electrical equipment which, in some cases, can render the space virtually useless.

13.6.1 Flammable liquids storage The storage of flammable liquids within a laboratory can be achieved utilising bulk storage rooms and/or flammable storage cupboards. Each of these storage methods require a defined hazardous zone to be incorporated within the space, around the openings and extending into the work area. The extent of the hazardous zones surrounding the storage areas of flammable liquids is dependent on the type and quantities of the liquids in storage.

13.6.2 Laboratory bench and work space The Australian Standards define that hazardous zones exist around a laboratory bench, floor and work area when flammable liquids are used in excess of 2.5 l. This includes under the benches. Where a hazardous zone exists all equipment must have a classification suitable for installation within the respective zone.

13.6.3 Fume cupboards The Australian Standards also define that hazardous zones exist around a fume cupboard when flammable liquids are used in excess of 2.5 l.

13.6.4 Flammable gases storage The storage of flammable gases such as process gases are also subject to hazardous zones surrounding the storage area.The extent and type of the zone is dependent on the quantities and types of gases stored similar to flammable liquids. Bulk gas stores are generally located outside the building and the design of the store can minimise the required hazardous zones (i.e. increase natural ventilation).

13.6.5 Laboratory bench and work space Current standards do not restrict the use of flammable gases on the bench top utilising standard gas outlets however care needs to be taken when locating ignition sources near flammable gas outlets. 120 Laboratory Design Guide

13.7 General lighting Laboratory lighting, as with all interior lighting, should be designed and installed to the recommendations of AS 1680.1 for Interior Lighting to ensure the work space is safe and pleasant, and provides optimum work conditions suited to the particular tasks being performed within the space. The lighting should be designed to take into account the following factors: • Sufficient lighting levels (horizontal illumination on the work surface) providing a safe and comfortable environment for movement and functional tasks; • Minimising glare on work spaces such as computer and instrument screens; and • Be controlled and have the correct characteristics to perform a specific or specialised task.

13.7.1 Illumination levels The lighting levels within the laboratory should be consistent with the types of work to be undertaken within the various areas with some tasks requiring considerably higher lighting levels than do others. The lighting levels required are governed by characteristics of the specific task such as task contrast, size and complexity. It should be noted that increasing lighting levels will decrease work error but with diminishing return (i.e. doubling the lighting level will not halve task error). AS 1680 provides recommendations for specific interior tasks and provides a guide to the optimum lighting levels. If a specific task is of sufficient detail requiring high levels of light then specific task lighting for the work area or workstation will most often provide the optimum type and levels of lighting required without the added capital expenditure.

13.7.2 Glare control As with any other internal area to be illuminated, careful control of the glare is crucial to ensure the space is functional and provides laboratory staff with sufficient levels of lighting without unwanted and disability glare on instruments and computer screens.

Low glare luminaires The first method of controlling glare is by utilising luminaires that control the glare by virtue of the design of the diffuser or reflector (louvre) to prevent lamp visibility at angles most likely to cause unwanted (disability) glare on reflective surfaces such as PC monitors and instrument panels located at a normal working level. Low glare luminaires include louvre types constructed of both semi-specular (or satin) louvres, specular (mirror) louvres or indirect lighting luminaires where the lamp is completely hidden within the luminaire and the area is lit by indirect lighting only. Electrical services 121

Specular louvres The specular louvre types have very high glare control with very high cut-off angles but tend to produce a gloomy area and one that occupants may find to be uncomfortable for a normal work space. The luminaires tend to appear as ‘black holes’ in the ceiling and tend not provide a balanced form of lighting for general applications. These types of luminaires are especially suited to control rooms and if used general area lighting may be required to balance the room environment.

Semi-specular louvres Semi-specular luminaires can provide a balance between glare control and ambient area lighting and are suited to laboratories with both screen-based tasks and other general tasks by ensuring glare is minimised with some ambient lighting generated to prevent a gloomy area.

Indirect luminaires Indirect luminaires are those luminaires where the lamp is partially or completely hidden within the luminaire itself with the light reflected downwards to the work surface. This form of lighting can provide an extremely uniform lighting with minimal glare, and when implemented properly, can provide efficient and extremely high quality lighting with a comfortable working atmosphere. Most indirect luminaires have been designed to utilise a newer high frequency ‘T5’ triphosphor lamp with electronic ballasts and therefore are very efficient. These luminaires can be utilised to provide high quality lighting while minimising energy consumption. Although more expensive, as the new technology is utilised more frequently the capital cost of these luminaires is reducing to a competitive level.

13.7.3 Lamps The types of lamps used in laboratory lighting is important not only for the efficiency of the facility but also to facilitate specialised tasks involving the matching or close recognition of colours. Most commercial facilities utilise fluorescent-type luminaires for general artificial lighting purposes. Modern triphosphor lamps provide both a relatively high efficiency light source with a long lamp life but also do provide good colour rendering characteristics for specific tasks.The colour rendering properties vary between manufacturer and lamp type so it is important to ensure the most appropriate lamp is utilised to suit the installations’ intended uses. For laboratories associated with hospitals such as pathology labs, the lamps are generally chosen to be compatible with the lamps used within the hospital itself both for colour compatibility and maintenance purposes. It is important for the designer to coordinate the lighting colour requirements with the laboratory representatives to determine the specific lighting requirements.

122 Laboratory Design Guide

13.7.4 Specialised lighting Ultraviolet (UV) lighting UV lighting is used in laboratories such as viral and genetic manipulation laboratories to sterilise the whole room when not in use to prevent cross-contamination. The use of this type of lighting must be managed carefully as it can cause serious damage to eyes and skin if personnel are exposed to the UV light. Options to ensure staff safety include interlocking the UV light switching with an automated security system, movement detectors or door interlocks. The UV tubes are specifically manufactured for this purpose and can be installed in specially modified luminaires for use in standard ceiling grids.

Durinal lighting This form of lighting is important for laboratories where animals are present for extended periods. This lighting simulates the day/night environments that animals are usually exposed to. This form of lighting can be set up to simulate sunrise and sunset by using dimming equipment or be set up with simple on/off time based switching. The time control functions should be available for operational staff to adjust settings to suit particular needs and intended occupation by staff.

Electrical services 123

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Chapter 14 Project cost control

by Ken McGowan, FRICS FAIQS, Senior Partner of the WT Partnership, Quantity Surveyors

Project cost control is the process of designing to or within an agreed budget or a predetermined cost, with the intention that the client can obtain optimum value for money, resulting in the building owner being able to obtain a project tailored to match the budget. When contemplating a project as complicated as a laboratory, it is essential that experienced design organisations are employed. Quite often a cost consultant is not considered at the early stage of design development. However, this is precisely the time to bring in an experienced Quantity Surveyor (QS) so that realistic targets can be set, thus helping to avoid the potential of abortive work and extended design time that often results from a project being over budget (see Figures 14.1, 14.2 and 14.3). Some architects and designers see project cost control in a negative light, and consider it to be a restrictive influence on the work of the designer. However, it should really be seen as a positive, predetermined, disciplinary process, where money is consciously allocated to the various building elements or features so as to obtain a building conforming to the budget but possessing pre-planned and accepted embellishments in certain areas, if so intended. There are various types of laboratories that vary greatly in cost, and so it is extremely important to understand the function of the laboratory being designed. An electronics laboratory, for example, can be as simple as a fitted-out office space. However, a chemistry laboratory may require demanding air conditioning, fume cupboards and other support facilities.

126 Laboratory Design Guide

Project cost control 127

Figure 14.1 Cost planning and budget monitoring – procedure flowchart

128 Laboratory Design Guide Figure 14.2 Bills of quantities (B of Q) – production flowchart

Project cost control 129

Figure 14.3 Post-contract administration – procedure flowchart (monthly cycle)

The average costs of a high-tech laboratory building, excluding external works, car parking, landscaping, etc., can be analysed as follows: Item Building works, structure, partitions and finishes Benching and fit-out Building services, including hydraulics, air conditioning, electrical and fire detection Total

Percentage of total cost 39 13 48 100

Having costed several major laboratories, it is obvious that control of the services component of the project has the most impact on successful cost control. These are the areas that can significantly affect the overall cost – far more so than the building fabric and structure – but quite often these items are the areas that are not subject to the same rigours as building fabric. How often are savings suggested from the finishes element of a cost plan? In a laboratory, the floor, wall and ceiling finishes generally represent less than 7% of the overall cost. If a project is 15% over budget, how can this be saved from the finishes if they only constitute 7% of the project costs? It is more realistic to try and save 15% from the building services, if they represent around 48% of the project cost. For example, if full fresh air to all areas from a central plant is required, an overall project saving in cost can be achieved by using local handling plant. This could be in the order of $400/m2, depending on the final layout, for a laboratory of, say, 10 000 m2. Quite often budgets for projects are initially based on square metre rates, and laboratories are no exception. However, the use of square metre rates can lead to major cost problems, especially if the exact content of the project is not considered at the concept stage. Another example of the dangers in using square metre rates concerns the density of fume cupboards. These and other pieces of specialist equipment are better costed as separate items. The design trend is that laboratory space needs to be flexible, both in area and height requirements. However, the ancillary and backup facilities such as offices and meeting rooms do not require the same degree of flexibility, and can be built at considerably lower cost. Because of the different definitions of a laboratory, arriving at the likely cost is probably one of the most difficult exercises that a cost consultant can undertake. Therefore, it is essential and vital that early budget decisions are made in consultation with the design team and, of course, the client. Life costing or lifecycle costing is another area that must be considered by clients, both in the private and public arenas, during the design process. Life costing examines the costs of a project through the useful life of the development and takes account of running and maintenance costs as well as initial capital costs. In certain instances there can be considerable 130 Laboratory Design Guide

overall savings in running and maintenance costs by initially incorporating an apparently more expensive item during the design and construction phase. Of course what tends to happen is that there is a fixed capital sum available for the initial development, and the running and maintenance budget is not available until the building is operational. As a consequence, the two never meet. However, with the ongoing upward spiral of expenditure to maintain a building and with service costs such as air conditioning and electricity constantly rising, serious consideration has to be given to life costing and examination of the project over, say, a 30-year life span.

Project cost control 131

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Chapter 15 Post-occupancy evaluation

by Doug Pottrell, Manager, School of Molecular and Biomedical Science, University of Adelaide 15.1 15.2 15.3 15.4 15.5 15.6 15.7 15.8 15.9 15.10 15.11

Introduction Brief Layout Flexibility Laboratories Air conditioning Features Security Space in demand Room for the future Summary

15.1 Introduction Construction and fit out were completed and the building was officially handed over in August 2000. A month later, during a mid-semester (teaching) break, more than 250 staff and research students moved in.We had already started the process of populating laboratories and offices with the necessary computing and telephone connections to afford minimal downtime to productivity and communications. Two years and nine months later, how did it turn out?

15.2 Brief We needed a big building and had a tight budget . . . nothing new here. So our primary goals were to build a functional, efficient and flexible workspace; and we succeeded.

15.3 Layout Undergraduate teaching laboratories, administration/reception, stores and deliveries areas are all located on the ground floor.The next five floors house research accommodation with laboratory, office and ‘write-up’ space either side of a spine of equipment zones and controlled/constant temperature rooms. On most floors these are open plan laboratories, with the exception of the top two floors where all the laboratories are designed to cater for PC2 (and some PC3) work involving pathogenic organisms. Offices are external to the laboratories, which are under slight negative pressure, and this is where most of our microbiologists work.

134 Laboratory Design Guide

15.4 Flexibility The building is composed of a grid of equal sized modules and we strived to make all the laboratories follow similar design. Office space can be converted into write-up or laboratory space and vice versa, and within three years we are actively making a few such changes.

15.5 Laboratories The laboratories are furnished with adjustable peninsula laboratory benches, extending 5.4 m in from the external walls and stopping at the laboratory ‘walkway’. Each bench is designed to accommodate 4 workers, and most laboratories are scaled to cater for 12 researchers. A flexible layout allows for varying group sizes.The walkway provides circulation space in lieu of traditional corridors and frames the central spine of the equipment zones and constant temperature rooms.There was much debate over walkways versus corridors, but the decision to go with walkways seems to have been successful and certainly adds to the feeling of useable space. Fume cupboards are co-located at either end of the equipment zones, and adjacent to fire stairs at each end of the building. As fume cupboards are a traditional source of lab fires, we elected to go with a manufacturer (though not the cheapest) who was able to demonstrate the best fire rating.These are linked in with the computerised building management system (BMS), and so far have performed faultlessly. Backup power generation almost became a casualty of cost-cutting measures until Year 2000 financial support came through to fund counter-measures. Emergency power is indispensable for molecular biology and biotechnology laboratories to protect priceless research materials.

15.6 Air conditioning All mechanical services in the building are controlled by the computerised BMS.Without operable windows, natural ventilation is achieved with fans hidden in bulkheads over laboratory windows.These fans exchange air with the outside as a default to maintaining the temperature of the working environment.Therefore the heating and cooling plants are now only called into action for about 10% of the time across the seasons. Six hundred litre/second of air is extracted from the central equipment zone on each floor to reduce load on the system from heat generated by the equipment. Air-conditioning zones are defined by the divisions between laboratory and non-laboratory areas in such a way that PC2 zoning and licensing is easily achieved. Ethylene glycol based-plant for the majority of constant temperature rooms (except cold rooms) provides very stable and accurate temperatures. However, as with most large and complex building, it has taken about a year for the temperature control to settle down for all occupied areas.We have experienced some teething problems, and solutions have been hampered by some inappropriate BMS logic, a problematic chiller and a problematic boiler. Most of these problems have since been overcome, and the long-term benefits of using a smart and efficient BMS to control the working environment are already apparent. Post-occupancy evaluation 135

15.7 Features One of the inexpensive design features which works well is the glass-walled breakout space at the entrance to a line of seminar/tutorial rooms on the first floor which are separated by demountable partition walls.The breakout space provides multiple PC access for undergraduates and is very popular. It is also handy for trade displays, celebrations and informal round table discussions. Another well-used area is our common room on the top floor. It serves as our tea room, provides an even more impressive view from the building, and is often booked for important meetings of large groups.

15.8 Security Security was an important aspect when considering building access.We wanted to limit public and undergraduate penetration up through to the research laboratories.Visitors must report to reception and sign in. Couriers are ‘buzzed in’ through the deliveries entrance at the loading dock. After-hours access is controlled by swipe card authentication at the main entrance and in the lifts. All entrances and exits are electronically monitored by security.

15.9 Space in demand The main accommodation pressures are for office space and meeting rooms.We elected to forgo traditional library space and this has passed relatively unnoticed. In hindsight, our decision to save on the installation of a public address system may have been false economy. Another cutback involved rationalising plumbing runs through some areas.We were recently obliged to install a hand washbasin to comply with PC2 regulations.This proved to be quite expensive being in an area not originally expected to need plumbing. Fortunately most plumbing runs do run extensively through the central support spine.

15.10 Room for the future Because of budgetary pressures, at times the footprint of the building was at serious risk of being reduced. I lobbied hard to maintain this, and some clever architectural lateral thinking to maintain the potential envelope by introducing ‘voids’ in two areas has already paid off. This year we will in-fill a two-storey void at the eastern end to accommodate a new Proteomics research and central service facility.

15.11 Summary In conclusion, we are very pleased with the overall result; and despite the constraints of a restrictive budget, the building has won a building industry award for excellence in design. The take-home message is to stay in contact with the project throughout the entire design 136 Laboratory Design Guide

and construction process. Offset drastic short-sighted cost-cutting measures by preserving possibilities for future expansion once you are in a position to attract further capital investment. In real estate the credo is ‘location, location, location’. Ours was flexibility, flexibility, flexibility, and it has paid off.

Post-occupancy evaluation 137

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Case studies

The case studies illustrate several of my laboratory designs for flexibility and other laboratory design principles described in my text. I have also selected case studies by other architects who share similar views. Readers should contact the nominated architects in each case study for further information on the design and construction participants. Case studies 2–30 were completed in the period 1990–2000 and 31–41 completed in 2000–2003. Case study 1 was completed in 1983 and case studies 42 and 43 are current projects. Case study 43 is not a laboratory building but many of the energy efficient designs in this building are now incorporated into laboratories. 1 Biology Teaching and Research Building, University of Wollongong, NSW. 2 Biological Sciences & Biomedical Engineering, University of New South Wales, Sydney, NSW. 3 Children’s Medical Research Foundation,Westmead, NSW. 4 Centenary Institute of Cancer Medicine & Cell Biology, Sydney, NSW. 5 SmithKline Beecham International Laboratories, Consumer Healthcare, Ermington, NSW. 6 Life Sciences Building, Ciba Pharmaceuticals Division, Summit, New Jersey, USA. 7 Pacific Power Research Laboratories, University of Newcastle, NSW. 8 CSIRO McMasters Laboratories, Prospect, NSW.

140 Laboratory Design Guide

9 ANSTO Radiopharmaceutical Laboratory, Lucas Heights, NSW. 10 Garvan Institute of Medical Research, Sydney, NSW. 11 ACTEW Corporation Laboratories, Fyshwick, ACT. 12 Camelia Botnar Laboratories, Great Ormond Street Hospital, London, England. 13 Institute of Medical Science,The University of Aberdeen, Scotland. 14 Heritage Medical Research Building, University of Alberta, Canada. 15 Balgownie Technology Centre, Aberdeen Science Park, Scotland. 16 St Michael’s Science Building, University of Portsmouth, UK. 17 Eli Lilly and Co. Product Development Research Laboratories, Indianapolis, USA. 18 Australian Geological Survey Organisation, Canberra, ACT. 19 Sir Alexander Fleming Building, Imperial College, London, UK. 20 Trinity College Dublin, East End Development, Dublin, Ireland. 21 Strathclyde Institute for Biomedical Sciences, Glasgow, Scotland. 22 Hunter Water Australia, Newcastle, NSW. 23 Analytical Research Laboratories, Napier, New Zealand. 24 Biomedical Building, ATP, Sydney, NSW. 25 New Science Building, University of Adelaide, SA. 26 Center for Clinical Sciences Research, Stanford University, USA. 27 Laboratory Design Competition at the University of Newcastle, NSW. 28 Laboratory Design Competition at the University of Queensland, Australia. 29 Institute of Medical Sciences: Phase 2, University of Aberdeen, Scotland. 30 CSIRO Molecular Science and Food Science Australia, North Ryde, NSW. 31 Liverpool Biosciences Centre, University of Liverpool, UK. 32 Kadoorie Biological Sciences Building, University of Hong Kong. 33 Institute of Laboratory Medicine, St Vincent’s Hospital Campus, Sydney. 34 Life Sciences Building, University of Newcastle, NSW. 35 Hunter Area Pathology Services (HAPS), John Hunter Hospital Campus, Newcastle, NSW. 36 Mine Safety Technical Facility, NSW Department of Mineral Resources, Maitland, NSW. 37 Dow Corning Research, Macquarie Technology Park, Sydney.

Case studies 141

38 National Marine Science Centre, Coffs Harbour, NSW. 39 CSIRO Energy Centre, Steel River, Newcastle, NSW. 40 Boehringer Biological Research Institute, Biberach, Germany. 41 James H Clark Center, Stanford University, California, USA. 42 Institute of Health and Biomedical Innovation, Queensland University of Technology, Brisbane, Queensland. 43 30 The Bond, Bovis Lend Lease Head Office, Sydney, Australia.

142 Laboratory Design Guide

Case study 1 Biology Teaching and Research Building University of Wollongong, NSW Architect and Laboratory design consultant

Brian Griffin

The brief for this building included two important requirements. The teaching laboratories had to be multi-discipline for undergraduate students in biology, nursing and other future courses. The post-graduate research facilities were to be arranged in five separate groups including offices for the supervisors in multi-discipline generic laboratories. The 3-D drawings 1E and 1F show the design solution for the flexible teaching laboratories. Student benches are adjustable from bench height to desk height for microscopy. Twentyfour laboratory gases, power, data, water and waste services are provided at the benches from floor-standing services bollards. The floor plans show the teaching laboratories and lecture theatre which generate the most traffic located adjacent to the level 1 entry and the stair to level 2. Level 2 (Case study 1B) has a dual corridor plan with research laboratories on the perimeter and laboratory support facilities in the core, accessible from both corridors. The cross-sections show the sub-floor area for services reticulation and the air-conditioning plant room over the level 2 support facilities, which have a lower ceiling height requirement than the research laboratories. The building has external adjustable louvres which restrict sunlight to a safe level.The louvres are designed to be adjusted automatically by light sensors.

Case studies 143

144 Laboratory Design Guide Case study 1A Level 1 floor plan (continued overleaf )

Case studies 145

Case study 1B Level 2 floor plan

146 Laboratory Design Guide Case study 1C Section (continued overleaf )

Case studies 147

Case study 1D Section

148 Laboratory Design Guide Case study 1E Teaching lab practical mode (continued overleaf )

Case studies 149

Case study 1F Teaching lab lecture mode

Case study 2 Biological Sciences & Biomedical Engineering University of NSW Laurence Nield & Partners Tony Fisher Neil Greenstreet Neil Hanson Robert Yuen Laboratory design consultant Brian Griffin Architects Director in charge Project architects

The site determined the urban form of the building, the curving road producing a curving pointed plan at the east end of the building. The architectural treatment, the scale and rhythm of the building resulted from this sensitive and careful contextual analysis. The framed concrete structures of the north campus, particularly the Mathews Building, were echoed in the framed articulation in the cast aluminium screens on the new building. The rhythms of the in situ concrete of the neighbouring buildings were repeated in the vertical aluminium wall panels of the new building. Furthermore, the colour and textures of the neighbouring brick lecture theatres to the east were continued in the lowest floor of the Samuels Building using brick, which both continued the ‘materiality’ of the ground and was a more robust material than the metal cladding, enabling a logical division of walling materials as well as making an important contextual link. The cast aluminium sun screens were used as a layering, scale-making device to emphasise the density of the street alignments of the building and the formal order of the building frame. At the top, the building ‘dematerialises’ into the glass house which will soon be filled with plants, providing an extraordinary capping to the building. This might even be used as a ‘winter garden’ for the building users: a facility to draw occupants to the top. At either end, the building ‘slides’ into terraces, exterior staff amenity areas, ‘promenade decks’ for laboratory staff to seek relief from their exacting tasks. The planning is simple and logical and is immediately recognisable to any visitor or occupant of the building. Laboratories on one side of the corridor; offices, cool rooms, cores, etc. on the other. Four central stacks down the length of this corridor carry the laboratory plumbing, sanitary plumbing, storm water drainage, electrical risers and cupboards, and exhaust ductwork for fume cupboards and special laboratory exhausts. Typical laboratory floors, such as level 1 and level 4, have large glazed panels between the laboratories and corridors. This lets good daylight into the corridors, alleviating the tunnel feeling so common with a double-loaded corridor. It also serves to expose the workers in the laboratories to the corridor. This is useful in a teaching instruction university. It is also an important safety feature; people in trouble dealing with hazardous chemicals, etc. can readily be seen by passers-by and students’ activities can be readily monitored. The glass in these windows is wired glass in accordance with fire safety guidelines for escape corridors in educational institutions, while lending some intricacy and texture to the view. 150 Laboratory Design Guide

As this building has environmental conditions ranging from a full level naturally ventilated to absolute filtration for incoming conditioned air and exhaust air (100% exhaust), the energy considerations are limited to a structure/envelope having good thermal mass and insulation, centralised energy systems to achieve economies of scale and providing for heat recovery in areas where conditioned air is fully exhausted without recirculation. Laboratory and Animal House exhausts are discharged at high level in accordance with current regulations, taking account of established wind patterns and adjacent built forms.

Case studies 151

152 Laboratory Design Guide Case study 2A Laboratory floor plan (continued overleaf )

Case studies 153

Case study 2B South elevation

Case study 3 Children’s Medical Research Foundation Westmead, NSW Architects Project directors

Ancher Mortlock Woolley Pty Ltd Ken Woolley Dale Swan

The building is 4500 m2 in total area over two floors and has 12 major laboratory spaces. The design was to include a strategy for adding at least four laboratories to be built without disruption to the work at a cost of $11.5 million and was completed in 1992. The brief required the research facility to be capable of a stand-alone operation but had to facilitate research interaction with various members of staff of the adjacent Children’s Hospital. The site/building should be highly visible to the public with special consideration given to the Library and its links with the Central Libraries at Westmead. The plan form has a central core of support areas surrounded by groups of four laboratories. There is a perimeter corridor between the two areas providing working access to the support facilities and freezer holding areas as well as compartmenting the plan in accordance with the regulations. The cross-corridors provide centralised access to the ground floor areas with the most critical support areas in the centre. The symmetrical plan arrangement enables a maximum distance of 50 m for interaction and movement to be achieved. The plan form also facilitates the addition of four laboratories on the northern face without disruption to the building. The ground floor is smaller in area and hence withdrawn from the perimeter of the building. This provides sunshading for the ground floor and articulates the facade, defines the different areas of activity in the building and reinforces the low scale. The plan is organised to secure the laboratory activities in the building where food, make-up, etc. cannot be taken. The lobby is the interface between the public and laboratory activities with direct access to the directorate, administration and conference facilities. The delivery dock has direct access to the stores areas and can be directly supervised by the administration department. It also allows controlled external access to the stores areas. It also allows controlled external access for maintenance. The illustration (Case study 3A) shows the quadrant shaped atrium with a central access stair which provides a focal and orientation element within the symmetrical plan. The service lift opens into this area. The library and lunch room have a sun facing orientation, the library is both accessible from the secure and public areas of the building.

154 Laboratory Design Guide

The overall form is an expression of the different activities in the building; the central support facilities with central plant room and atrium light, and the laboratory groups. This composition is further defined by elements such as the escape stairs, conference rooms, and the sunshading and roof support systems, together with finer detailing of trims, margins, etc.

Case studies 155

156 Laboratory Design Guide Case study 3A Laboratory floor plan (continued overleaf )

Case studies 157

Case study 3B Section

Case study 4 Centenary Institute of Cancer Medicine & Cell Biology Sydney, NSW Architects Project architect

Brown Brewer & Gregory Mark Boffa

The design philosophy was to create functional and flexible spaces in a manner that would allow additions and alterations, resulting from changing needs and evolving research technology, to be carried out economically and with minimum disruption to ongoing activity. The laboratory spaces were to be spacious enough to accommodate a complete research unit, yet small enough to provide peace, privacy and human scale. The rectangular plan consists of a centrally located core, with a laboratory module in each of the outer ‘corners’. Opposing laboratories are separated by the core of ancillary function rooms. Flexibility is provided with movable benches in configurations which do not interrupt circulation or workflow. By eliminating the traditional central corridor and combining the general circulation space with the laboratories the plan is more compact without compromising the function of the areas or walking distances to support facilities. The core ancillary areas are configured to be shared between two laboratory modules. Cross corridors are reduced to a minimum and rooms arranged so that they open alternately into opposing laboratories. The effect of this is that as shared rooms can be accessed only from one of the two modules they serve, members of one team have to walk through to the other side to access some of the core areas encouraging discussion and research interaction especially when rooms are shared by both teams at once. The benches are at right angles to the window wall. The bench at the window is an adjustable height worktop, used by some researchers at desk height and others at bench height as an extension of the laboratory bench. The laboratory furniture is modular and movable, with all services in a services spine between the benches. Reticulation of services along the external walls, within vertical and horizontal ducts is accessible through removable panels for alternations and maintenance. The laboratory spaces do not have ceilings, and all high level services are exposed and colour coded for ease of identification; the result is a volume which is more comfortable to work in and which provides a variety otherwise limited by traditional laboratory designs.

158 Laboratory Design Guide

Case studies 159

Case study 4A Laboratory floor plan

Case study 5 SmithKline Beecham International Laboratories Consumer Healthcare Ermington, NSW Architect and Laboratory design consultant

Brian Griffin

The brief called for maximum flexibility in the accommodation for the quality assurance programme. The space for the instrumentation including auto-analysis, HPLC and atomic absorption had to allow the rearrangement of equipment on benches and the possible future floor-standing equipment. The solution was to arrange modular movable benches around floor-standing services bollards installed on a regular grid. The modular units included workstations at desk height which were originally placed at the window wall but could be placed anywhere the staff required. Small rinse sinks are provided on some benches, including some for instrumentation waste, but a central washing facility with autoclaves was planned at the far corner. The fume cupboards were also located at the far corner, furthest from the exits, and not on the fire egress route.

160 Laboratory Design Guide

Case study 5A Laboratory floor plan and 3-D view

Case studies 161

Case study 6 Life Sciences Building Ciba Pharmaceuticals Division Summit, New Jersey, USA Architects Partner in charge Laboratory consultant

Mitchell/Giurgola Architects Jan Keane FAIA Earl Walls Associates

The new Life Sciences Building consolidates research on a single R&D campus for the first time. The stepped plan organises a series of shared outdoor spaces to create a unified research area which is open and pedestrian in scale. The building is designed on a modular grid to accommodate a variety of disciplines and to facilitate adaptation. To make the laboratories both flexible and open, and to promote interaction, there are very few dividing walls. The perimeter corridors have glazing into the laboratories above desk height and large windows to the outside, or are open into two interior covered atria. At both ends of these covered courts are circulation nodes with meeting rooms, stairs, elevators and coffee break areas. The Ciba research group believes that new ideas in research often result from informal interaction. The use of 88-foot (27-m) trusses allows column-free laboratories with 8-foot (2.4-m) interstices above. Services drop to the laboratories through openings in the concrete ceiling. This project was awarded R&D magazine’s Laboratory of the Year in 1995. Jan Keane, partner in charge of the project at Mitchell/Giurgola Architects, explained the theory behind the design. ‘Science today is characterised by new technologies. But bringing in new technologies is a change. Ciba did not want that change to stop its scientists from working. Soon after they started moving into the laboratory, Ciba purchased new robotic equipment and some of the laboratories’ work modules had to be changed and this was hardly noticed by the staff working there.’ The advantages of the interstitial space and the column-free laboratory floors won praise from judges of the R&D magazine contest.

162 Laboratory Design Guide

Case studies 163

Case study 6A First floor plan

Case study 6B Typical laboratory layout (continued overleaf )

164 Laboratory Design Guide

Case studies 165

Case study 6C Building section

166 Laboratory Design Guide Case study 6D Laboratory floor and interstitial space section

Case study 7 Pacific Power Research Laboratories University of Newcastle, NSW Architects Project directors

Jackson Teece Chesterman Willis David Jackson Damian Barker Ian Brodie

The Advanced Technology Centre for Pacific Power is a joint venture research facility with the University of Newcastle. Designed to accommodate 120 research and administrative staff, it provides 7000 m2 of flexible, serviceable, adaptive space. This is not only a wonderful work place, it is a fully integrated design displaying high levels of energy efficiency, access and serviceability, safety and security. It is a winner of the Royal Australian Institute of Architects’ Environment Awards, at both state and national levels.

Energy efficiency An essential ingredient of the brief was to design a building which demonstrates the efficient use of electrical energy together with solar efficiency, and protection of the natural bushland areas which adjoin the site. Orientation of offices to the north maximises passive energy potential and outlook. With a deep floor plan, two storeys and a well-insulated roof, internal temperatures are kept very stable. Natural ventilation for the entire building was investigated, however temperature variations fell outside the permissible for best functioning of the sensitive (and very expensive) electronic machinery to be housed. The laboratories require the highest level of air-conditioning control. Their placement in the centre of the building provides a buffer all around to stabilise conditions. Separation of the write-up areas has reduced the area required for critical level air conditioning. The air-conditioning system installed maximises energy efficiency by using: 1. a computerised building management system; 2. a relief air system which uses economy cycles, providing unconditioned fresh air when outside temperatures fall within an acceptable range; 3. multiple air handling units addressing specific diversified needs, covering both time and intensity of use; 4. a night flushing ventilation operation which precools the structure during summer, using fresh air. Case studies 167

A building monitoring system has been implemented to audit ongoing energy consumption. Lighting was a special consideration. A fixed external solar control system excludes summer sun but admits winter sun for passive heating. Photo-electric cells activate to turn off perimeter lighting when natural daylight provides adequate lighting levels. Light scoops introduce natural daylight into space deep within the office areas at both levels. Natural lighting in the public spaces reduces the requirement for artificial lighting to display highlighting only. General office lighting is to a low ambient level to reduce the heat load in the building, with task lighting provided at workstations.

Access and serviceability The building has been laid out to provide the greatest possible level of flexibility, for change to be made to modify work areas, laboratories or overall expansion. The site gradient was used to provide subterranean accommodation for noisy, dusty and hazardous operations. This also enabled a level of secure car parking directly under the laboratories, giving unimpeded access to plumbing lines. The high roof space over the laboratories has catwalks for ease of access to the electrical and ventilation systems.

Safety and security A safe and conducive work environment was encouraged by separation of laboratory and workstation areas. The pattern of movement of materials and hierarchy of spaces are clear in the floor plan. At the main level, stores line the southern face with the laboratories arrayed along the central band. These feed through to workstations and offices along the northern face where advantage is gained of the views and sunlight. This arrangement keeps safety to a maximum, and research staff spend as much of their time as possible in safe and attractive surroundings. The stores and laboratories are each surrounded by walls giving the appropriate level of fire separation. A feature of the building is the dramatic stainless steel wall slicing through to divide the public from the private realms. To one side are the main entry and reception, which open onto an exhibition space and lecture hall. The ‘silver’ wall leads down to the staff lunch room, set apart from the work areas in its bush surrounding. Security clearance is required to gain access to the world of research on the other side of the wall. Researchers can work unimpeded by uninvited guests.

168 Laboratory Design Guide

Case studies 169

Case study 7A Ground floor plan

170 Laboratory Design Guide Case study 7B First floor plan (continued overleaf )

Case study 7C Typical laboratory floor plan and 3-D view

Case studies 171

Case study 8 Commonwealth Scientific Industrial Research Organisation (CSIRO) McMasters Laboratories Prospect, NSW Architects Project director

Collard Group Pty Ltd Peter Cook

The McMasters Laboratory has been designed as a generic laboratory building with flexibility to carry out a wide range of animal health research programmes in parasitology, molecular biology, immunology, histology, mycology, chemistry, biochemistry, pharmacology and information technology. The laboratory is a linear two-storey building with an atrium entrance, is oriented strictly along an east–west axis to maximise environmental control and is planned on a 3-m module to maximise rational planning. A central double-loaded corridor provides access to perimeter laboratories with a central spine of common support facilities including write-up, data capture, cold, hot and freezer rooms. There is a central service area for media preparation, histology, autoclaves and glass washing and a central office area for administration with a seminar room and amenities. Emphasis has been placed on glazing internally and externally to maximise daylighting and safety observation. Services including medical gases, vacuum, compressed air and de-ionised water are reticulated in a fully accessible ring main system below first floor level, with risers and droppers to each floor with branches serving each laboratory bench. A voice/data/power network is reticulated throughout the building and ducted to all benches. Reagent shelving above benches is removable so that bulky equipment can be bench mounted. The internal environment throughout the building is computer monitored and controlled to ensure maximum energy efficiency. ‘This is a very efficient building. It’s also a very pleasant environment to work in.’ Dr John Steel (CSIRO). (See also Plates 30 and 31 in the colour section.)

172 Laboratory Design Guide

Case study 8A First floor plan (continued overleaf )

Case studies 173

Case study 8B Section

174 Laboratory Design Guide

Case study 9 Australian Nuclear Science & Technology Organisation (ANSTO) Radiopharmaceutical Laboratory Lucas Heights, NSW Architects Project director

Collard Group Pty Ltd Peter Cook

The biomedicine facility at Lucas Heights is used by the research and development arm of ANSTO’s Radiopharmaceuticals Division. The single-storey building has a footprint of 1000 m2 with Development Laboratories located in groups on either side of Automation Laboratories with ease of circulation, and with extensive use of external and internal glass. As well as maximising natural light there is generous visual contact between facility workers, with attendant benefits in terms of both safety and professional interaction. The centrally located Automation Laboratories provide the core function for scaling up products from the suite of Development Laboratories. The building also includes a clean room and quality control room for product despatch. All internal walls can be readily removed or modified, benches are open and under-bench storage units are movable on the floor. The heavy duty suspended floor is 1 m above ground level forming a piped services zone for pressure services and drainage lines. This arrangement gives maximum flexibility for future service alterations. Above ceiling level is a full-height service platform for mechanical equipment, fans and air filters, which is also readily accessible for servicing or modification. ‘One of the real beauties of this building is its flexibility. We wanted a laboratory environment where we could carry out several different but interrelated functions and that is very much what this facility offers us.’ Dr Andrew Katsifis (ANSTO).

Case studies 175

176 Laboratory Design Guide Case study 9A Laboratory floor plan

Case studies 177

Case study 9B Section

Case study 10 Garvan Institute of Medical Research Sydney, NSW Architects Ancher Mortlock Woolley Pty Ltd Project directors Ken Woolley Dale Swan The scientific research and support functions are bound together both visually and functionally by a gallery and atrium. Along its axis there are common meeting and display areas, lifts and stairs. This promotes a sense of unity and allegiance between the research groups and programmes of the Institute, and presents a comprehensible structure to occupants and visitors. A ‘double helix’ open access stair links the lift lobbies and informal meeting space on all floors, its form symbolising the DNA structure, a central focus of this research facility. From the atrium walkways the scientific activities are visible and each laboratory group can be accessed independently. The boardroom, where the future direction of the Institute is determined, is at the other end of the gallery looking over both the entry and back into the gallery. The functional elements of the building have been given an urban presence, and internally the experience of the common spaces along the gallery and in the atrium are stimulating, encouraging an exchange of scientific ideas. (See also Plates 32 and 33 in the colour section.)

178 Laboratory Design Guide

Case studies 179

Case study 10A Typical laboratory floor plan

Case study 10B Section 180 Laboratory Design Guide

Case study 11 ACTEW Corporation Laboratories Fyshwick, ACT Laboratory design

Brian Griffin

This laboratory is a good case study as site constraints did not compromise the best design solution and the design process followed the methodology described in Chapter 2 – Design methodology. Case studies 11A, 11B, 11C and 11D shows the final developed laboratory floor plan which was used by the client to brief the design and construct project manager’s team. The seven laboratory groups have been accommodated in ‘generic’ facilities which can allow expansion and contraction of each group as future needs demand. The standard laboratory module of 3 m and the standard modular furniture have been designed for all laboratory functions including support laboratories such as technical assistance and laboratory operations. The central corridor plan allows the laboratory support facilities to be adjacent to the laboratories they serve. The single-storey design, which is ideal for laboratories, has a sub-floor space for reticulating power, data, gases, water and waste services with easy access for change. The roof space is high enough for maintenance and accommodates all air conditioning and fume extraction ducting and equipment (see Case study 11B).

Architect for the design and construct contract Project director

Bligh Voller Phil Page

Retaining Brian Griffin’s basic laboratory modular layout, the non-laboratory functions such as the public entry, administration, conference, lunch room and library are accommodated in a separate building. This separation for fire protection regulation is a better design solution than a fire resistant-rated party wall as it allows windows to the whole of the laboratory perimeter. The laboratory windows are protected from direct sun penetration by horizontal louvres as the orientation of the building is due north and south. One of the many advantages of a single-storey laboratory building has been exploited very successfully with a continuous glass roof over the full length of the central corridor flooding the centre of the ‘deep plan’ with sunlight. Primarily responsible for testing the city’s clean water supply and waste water, ACTEW are successfully developing business with the private community, particularly rural properties.To accommodate the expanding operations, planned second stage extension of the laboratory

Case studies 181

building will be achieved by adding further modules to the length of the building retaining the basic planning principles. Stormwater is retained on the site in a decorative pond for irrigation to landscaping though not discharged into the town stormwater system. (See also Plate 34 in the colour section.)

182 Laboratory Design Guide

Case studies 183

Case study 11A Floor plan

Case study 11B Section 184 Laboratory Design Guide

Case studies 185

Case study 11C 3-D view of modular furniture

Case study 11C (Continued)

186 Laboratory Design Guide

Case studies 187

Case study 11D Plan of whole building

Case study 12 Camelia Botnar Laboratories Great Ormond Street Hospital, London Architects Project directors

DEGW David Jenkin Michael Rushe

When the new facility was first contemplated, the client wanted the building to be an asset to the hospital estate. The plan was developed with flexibility in mind. The five-storey building has been produced to suit its primary purpose – as a modern pathology laboratory, but the building is flexible enough to adapt to the changing needs of research. Adaptability is inherent in DEGW’s design, with its well-considered internal grid for ready subdivision, and a profusion of risers. This flexibility came about not as a response to commercial pressures but because, in common with almost all human activity, the nature of research has changed to one based on computer technology. The floor plan is relatively simple, being divided into three longitudinal slices with the two laboratory zones flanking a central core and specialist area. ‘The core of the laboratories has a modest atrium which provides daylight in the centre of the deep plan building. It also creates a social focus and orientation point. Coffee bars on each level improve contacts between the various disciplines and departments – previously they were scattered across five sites. Transparent stair wells and small meeting rooms in the core also help in this respect.’ The two long span wings on either side of the central core provide column-free space for various combinations of laboratory and office. Risers are located at 6.4 m centres and contain electrical cables, piped services, consumer units and space for extract flues. Service benches extend from the internal ducts and benches on the window perimeter wall are restricted to dry operations. Running between the ribs are large, semicircular ducts constructed from silver powder-coated steel. These are finely detailed with bands of small perforations for low velocity air. They contain integrated low brightness fluorescent luminaires, smoke detectors and fire alarms. The director of pathology and all the users are apparently more than pleased with the results and the maintenance engineers have been complimentary about the layout and access to the services. An alteration exercise on the ground floor has proved that DEGW’s planning grids are flexible and work well. Bringing together all the pathology staff from five different sites has produced a big bonus for the hospital. The synergy of research and knowledge, with the routine work alongside research, has already spawned new ideas and fostered a new spirit of cooperation. Extract from the RIBA Journal, June 1996. 188 Laboratory Design Guide

Case studies 189

Case study 12A Typical floor plan

Case study 12B Section 190 Laboratory Design Guide

Case study 13 Institute of Medical Science The University of Aberdeen, Scotland Architects

David Murray Associates

The university wanted a ‘research hotel’, where research teams might expand or contract as funding comes and goes. The notion that a discipline should take residence for the whole life of the building has given way to the idea that different mixed-discipline teams will have to justify their occupation of highly serviced laboratory space, and that they may occupy it for varying periods. As a result, the practice made flexibility the main priority, along with a respect for the choice of the occupant, and a concern for security and the environment. The design is based on double-height laboratories interspersed with equipment rooms aligned along a corridor. On the other side of this circulation corridor, offices look onto a full-height central atrium, intended to serve as the social focus for the whole building. The ingenious section of the building doubles the offices above each other. The upper corridor allows maintenance access to the services, distributed along galleries over the laboratories, without disturbing the work below. The high, naturally lit laboratories have a strong and dramatic spatial quality, solving the problem of maintaining visual control over the equipment and apparatus which is constantly changing. The researchers can alter the natural ventilation and lighting by closing blinds or opening lower windows, while a sophisticated building management system monitors and operates the upper windows and blinds. Fume cupboards and equipment with high ventilation needs are put in the equipment rooms which are cooled and mechanically ventilated. The mixed strategy is designed to optimise energy use. The researchers can retreat from the labs to their offices to write up their experiments in a smaller, book-lined environment. These offices are ventilated into the naturally ventilated atrium. Again, the occupants can open or close the windows themselves. The offices look across at one another over the 9.6-m width of the atrium. The occupants can see the activity at the entrance level, and communicate with people there, where photocopiers and coffee machines are located. The space in the atrium is light and airy, the timber framing and panelling of the offices softening the bright white of the steel and blinds beneath the glazed roof. One of the major architectural contributions to the building, the atrium, follows the success of similar spaces in laboratories designed by Venturi Scott Brown and Associates at Princeton, Pennsylvania and Dartmouth – although the architectural language differs. The architect acknowledges a recent local building in the Aberdeen Science Park, by Michael Gilmour Associates, where small office/laboratories share a central roof-lit space aiding communication and cooperation.

Case studies 191

Security is important in a building of this nature. Access is by swipe card, and on entering one is confronted with a cellular office for the reception staff. This office also contains the photocopiers, which seems to be a good way of ensuring it does not become sterile – front counter staff have a deadening effect on the entrances of many institutional buildings. Everyone has to use photocopiers, and if the coffee machines and other furnishings work well with this, it is possible that the building will encourage its users to meet across conventional departmental boundaries. The atrium could become an anti-climax if not well managed and equipped. This space, together with the splendid conference room above the entrance, has potential to host promotional and public relations parties without disturbing the serious work going on elsewhere. (See also Case study 29 for Phase 2.)

192 Laboratory Design Guide

Case study 13A Typical floor plan

Case studies 193

194 Laboratory Design Guide Case study 13B Section showing double-height laboratories corresponding to two office floors and service access corridor

Case study 14 Heritage Medical Research Building University of Alberta, Canada Architects

Woolfenden Hamilton Brown

The basic strategy established for this building was to maximise the serviceability of space designated for research purposes and minimise potential interruptions in the research process. All laboratory spaces were to have full services available with minimum restrictions. One design criterion dictated that the working environment of each laboratory be efficient and pleasant, giving rise to the principle that each laboratory should have access to natural light. Given that researchers will occupy laboratory space for varying periods, renovations must be expected as new laboratories are installed to the specifications of new researchers. Modifications undertaken within a laboratory must not infringe upon adjacent laboratories, nor upon the laboratories located on the floors above and below. Once a finite generic laboratory module was established, the designers detailed full and independent services to each laboratory module. Further, the modules were clustered such that each had access to natural light. Upon applying the ‘renovation’ requirement – that each laboratory module should be able to undergo renovation without infringing upon another – the concept of external servicing via an atrium on each side of the building was introduced. During the discussion of this basic concept with the University of Alberta, the term ‘epistitial’ (from the Greek ‘epi’ for outside) was coined by Dr Don Fenna, Assistant Dean, and Tim Miner, Director of Planning and Development, to describe the external servicing area. The 5-m wide epistitial space provides an uninterrupted vertical/horizontal space along the two major sides of the building, within which are contained all the services required to be provided to each laboratory module and to all areas of the building. Supply piping and electrical conduit mains are run horizontally along the service catwalks located at each floor level. Fume cabinet exhaust ducts, one per module, rise in the epistitial space to fans that discharge above roof level. Ducted air is supplied to all floor plates from the seventh floor air-handling units, which draw intake air from the mid-height of the building. Air is supplied to the laboratories from ducts in the epistitial space. Changes to any of these systems can be made expediently, without disturbance to building occupants. The epistitial space, while providing service routing, access and flexibility, also acts as an environmental buffer to the inner research core of the building. The epistitial space is heated and ventilated by a mechanical system separate from that provided for the occupied building areas. Temperatures within the epistitial space are allowed to swing from approximately ⫹10 °C to ⫹35 °C. This enclosed volume of air acts as an environmental buffer, a moderating influence between the stringent requirements of

Case studies 195

the occupied areas of the building and the extremes of outside temperatures, which can range from ⫺40 °C to ⫹30 °C. With one epistitial space facing south and the other north, it has been possible to employ passive solar concepts to the design of the building. In winter, air in the south epistitial space is heated by solar gain; the warmed air rises by natural convection and is transferred to the north epistitial space by means of ducts at roof level. Residual heat is stored in a concrete block heat sink located below the basement area of the structure. Stored heat is withdrawn from the heat sink as required and reintroduced into the epistitial space. The convection current created within the epistitial space fully encircles the inner core of the building. In summer, excess heat generated within the epistitial space is exhausted at roof level; the ‘heat’ sink also functions as a ‘cool’ sink during summer. In summary, the building can be likened to an incubator, wherein the inhabited research areas are very carefully controlled and serviced through the network of pipes, ducts, conduits and buffer spaces. The concept is one of service discipline and environmental considerations carried to the level of architecture. (See also Plate 35 in the colour section.)

196 Laboratory Design Guide

Case studies 197

Case study 14A Typical floor plan showing epistitial spaces

198 Laboratory Design Guide Case study 14B Cross-section showing services in epistitial spaces and heat sink

Case studies 199

Case study 14C Epistitial and laboratory sections

Case study 15 Balgownie Technology Centre Aberdeen Science Park, Scotland Architects Project director Project architect

Michael Gilmour Associates Michael Gilmour Graham Benton

The Science Park in Aberdeen lies to the north of the River Don, encompassing a mature estate within which lies Balgownie House, built in the early 1800s as a single-storey pavilion around an open courtyard. The intention of the client was to convert and extend Balgownie House to form a technology centre that would provide central reception facilities such as meeting/ conference rooms, exhibition areas, dining space and secretarial facilities for any occupier on the park. In addition, it was to provide accommodation for small research companies ranging from single-person businesses up to those requiring a maximum of 3750 square feet (350 m2) of office, workshop or laboratory space. It was hoped that interaction between the occupants would encourage some joint ventures, or at least an element of technology transfer. The central dining room of Balgownie House with its high vaulted ceiling, originally a courtyard, was the fulcrum around which the other rooms were arranged. It was sensible to convert this to the reception area, thus bringing visitors into the centre of the building before redirecting them in the appropriate directions. The axial nature of this space naturally led to the extension running in a northerly direction, and this route was developed into an internal ‘street’ leading to the major car park at its extreme end. Lettable units face onto the street, which perform several functions: it acts as an environmental buffer zone, thus reducing heat loss from units facing it; it provides natural daylight within the heart of the unit; it provides a space within which the occupants of the units can hold informal meetings, prepare and drink coffee, etc.; and it provides an internal garden with trees to shade and soften the space. The effect of enclosing the ‘street’ has created a deep plan building out of two terraces, which would otherwise have had considerably greater external wall area. Given that the space created has relieved the occupiers of the need to provide areas for relaxation, coffee making, toilets, etc., it can be seen to be extremely cost-effective both in terms of increasing the usable area within the units, and in reducing the heat loss and therefore the running costs of the units. By no means the least important aspect is that it has generated a feeling of lightness and space, which gives it a memorable quality. This quality helped to ensure that the units were let easily and at good rental levels. The building therefore has a series of public and semi-public spaces linked along its main axis. These can be used together for major receptions and exhibitions, or subdivided for smaller meetings. 200 Laboratory Design Guide

The units looking into the internal ‘street’ are all accessible from outside, allowing easy servicing and providing a small external paved area overlooking the park. The services strategy was to use the ‘street’ as a zone through which all major ducts could pass, thus avoiding the problems of repeated penetrations of dividing walls or roofs. With regard to ventilation, the ‘street’ becomes an extraction duct, drawing air through the units and extracting it at either end of the ‘street’. This avoids the requirement to ventilate the units independently. In winter, heat is driven downwards by slow-moving fans on automatic controls, whilst in summer the stack effect within the ‘street’ is exaggerated by reversing the fans and opening high-level windows to enable more fresh air to be drawn through the units. Early computer studies showed that there may be some overheating in the ‘street’ on a few summer days. This will be monitored, and if necessary high-level louvres will be installed. It was agreed with the client that retro-fitting these louvres was more sensible than attempting to solve the problem at the beginning, given the degree of inaccuracy of computer predictions when factors such as occupier use patterns and the quantity of free ventilation are difficult to anticipate. Fine-tuning the building in this way after it has been occupied for some time is an attitude which, if adopted more widely, might lead to fewer complaints from users of buildings, particularly as it actively involves them to a limited extent in part of the decision-making process. Every effort was made to ensure that the interiors of individual units could be altered to individual taste, although the public spaces are subject to much stricter control. Wiring throughout is by way of raised or suspended floors. In the existing building, the large underfloor area proved extremely useful, whilst in the extension, plywood on timber battens provided a cost-effective alternative.

Case studies 201

202 Laboratory Design Guide Case study 15A Ground floor plan

Case studies 203

Case study 15B Cross-section through extension

Case study 16 St Michael’s Science Building University of Portsmouth, UK Architects

Jeremy Dixon, Edward Jones

The building provides accommodation for pharmacy, physics and research departments. With the exception of the lecture theatres and the large teaching laboratories, which are accommodated in the semicircular corner (20 m in diameter), the remaining accommodation is planned in a less specific and flexible manner. In contrast to the relatively neutral colours of the exterior (silver, grey and black), the interiors are animated by a strong polychromy.This palette of colours is restricted to public areas of the building, lecture theatres and areas of general circulation. These combine to contrast with the laboratories and research rooms, which the client requested to be painted white throughout. The building design was the winner of a limited competition in 1992 and, when completed in 1996, was reviewed by Sheila O’Donnell in Architecture Today. This review included the following extract: The completed building fills the site, presenting a curved aluminium-clad face to the highway and appearing from a distance as an object building, with four tall chimneys on the skyline. The plan resolves the varying site geometries, connecting with the existing St Michael’s building and providing an appropriate entrance away from the traffic. Although at first sight the building appears smooth and homogeneous, it is not as simple and singular as this image suggests; rather it is a building of parts, which sets up and responds to quite different environments on its various sides. The curved side presents the refined and glossy image of a science building, all precision and process. The concrete-framed entrance side is more urbane, the image of process tempered by issues of urban context and scale. Inside, the architects have accepted the constantly changing nature of contemporary research and teaching laboratories. Edward Jones likens the programme to that of a highly serviced office building rather than the ‘served and servant’ spaces of Kahn’s Richards Laboratories, which he sees as its typological polarity. At Portsmouth the screen of aluminium panels creates a strong order on the outside, to allow pipes and ducts to run past windows inside where necessary. This architecture is very different from high-tech, despite the high level of technology in the achievement of its finish and details.The smooth tin can is an enigmatic container for a series of highly specialised processes, suggesting this in its image and expression but not displaying its functions overtly on the outside.

204 Laboratory Design Guide

Case studies 205

Case study 16A Typical laboratory floor plan

206 Laboratory Design Guide Case study 16B East–west section

Case study 17 Eli Lilly and Co. Product Development Research Laboratories Indianapolis, USA Architects Project director

Flad & Associates Jerry Polly

A recent modernisation project by Indianapolis-based Eli Lilly and Co. was somewhat of an experiment: take an antiquated manufacturing plant shaped like a bowling alley and turn it into interactive, high-functioning laboratory/office space in half the normal time and at twothirds the cost.The outcome was Building 314. The Building 314 ‘experiment’ was born out of a company initiative to increase the number of new drug discoveries and accelerate the new product development cycle. In today’s high-geared market this pharmaceutical company cannot rest on past achievements, which include the first insulin product in 1920 and Prozac, a widely prescribed antidepressant launched in the early 1980s. Speed comes with efficiency and synergy, and about 350 research scientists and staff members spread across nine different buildings at multiple sites in Indianapolis stunted these requirements. As G. Michael Wilson PhD, Director of operations for product development at Eli Lilly, explains: [Pharmaceutical research] projects can be very complex and require a lot of different teams and individuals working together for a common goal. The personal interactions, the ability to see someone’s data and talk to them about the implications of it are all critical to helping the scientific staff work together. The plan was to bring product development research functions and staff together under one roof. David E. Needler, Project manager for facilities delivery engineering, says: The fact that the building was so oblong-shaped was viewed as a big problem, but one which had to be solved for the advantages of co-locating all the product development in one facility. The solution was to construct a dramatic five-storey central atrium and staircase. With southern light pouring through the glass curtainwall, the new atrium provides a bright, lively focal point. As Jerry Polly PE, Principal and Project Manager with Flad & Associates, explains: You shorten the distance of travel by half if you bring people to the middle. Resources and meeting areas are in the atrium to facilitate chance meetings and conversation. On the first floor are a deli and a seating area, a locker room and a conference area. Located at the centre of each floor are resources such as conference rooms, restrooms, a coffee machine, refrigerator, copiers, drinking fountains and microwaves. To stimulate idea sharing, the partitions that separate laboratories from the central corridor, which runs the length of the building, have continuous glass windows for staff to see each Case studies 207

other.The laboratories are designed with small team rooms where scientists can gather for an impromptu meeting. Says Polly: It is a matter of bringing the energy between people to a higher level so that they can learn from each other and build the synergy that is necessary to turn a bunch of individuals into a team and a bunch of teams into a wonderful machine for invention. In creating and recreating research teams, flexibility is a prime element. Laboratories need to be column-free spaces. Stationary items (such as fixed casework) stand on the perimeter, while movable central tables and racks allow researchers to arrange the space as needed, accommodating 10–16 people in each laboratory module. Utilities run overhead, enabling nearly unlimited layout configurations.The laboratories are separated by a common area with fume hood alcoves, solvent-dispensing stations, and shared equipment such as refrigerators and biosafety cabinets. To enhance flexibility, offices and laboratories are a standard size, regardless of an employee’s position. Despite the oblong shape of the building being a problem for staff interaction, it is an asset in creating bright, naturally lit spaces. Perimeter windows drench the 80-foot (24-m) width of the building with light. Natural light is complemented by a subdued colour scheme of burgundies, blues and greens in the office and laboratory areas. Indirect and task lighting supplement natural illumination as needed. Carl Stumpf, Principal of Affiliated Engineers Inc., says: While energy efficiency was a concern, proper environmental control and indoor air quality (IAQ) were also essential in the laboratory and we therefore designed for 100 per cent outside air.The air feeds in from both ends of each floor and is distributed to the centre. Outside air is taken in near ground level and exhausted through fans on the roof, making sure there is good separation between supply and exhaust. With this amount of air circulation, energy efficiency is limited. Lilly provided proper IAQ, bright meeting areas and lively workspace with an eye on time and budget efficiencies. The target for the Building 314 project was 28 months.The company estimated that a $70 million per year increase in operating efficiency would be gained by consolidating workers and equipment, and the sooner the project was completed, the sooner these efficiencies would be realised.The project team was also operating under a tight budget.The total project cost less than $175 per square foot – about two-thirds the cost of other facilities that Lilly had completed in recent years. Extracts from an article in Buildings, The Facilities Construction and Management Magazine, April 1998.

208 Laboratory Design Guide

Case studies 209

Case study 17A Typical floor plan

210 Laboratory Design Guide Case study 17B Team laboratory and open office workstations

Case study 18 Australian Geological Survey Organisation Canberra, ACT Architects Eggleston Macdonald Pty Ltd Director in charge John Macdonald The recently completed headquarters for the Australian Geological Survey Organisation (AGSO) in Canberra is an example of energy-efficient building design, and a working prototype of the application of pragmatic ecological sustainable development. The 40 000 m2 building includes 30 highly specialised laboratories, as well as a library, public display areas, offices and warehouse/workshop facilities. Last year this building received the ACT’s highest honour for excellence in architecture, the Canberra Medallion, and the World Environment Day Award. Although the provision of ESD principles was an important component of the AGSO head brief, the first key project objective was to bring together several remote divisions on one site to create a shared sense of purpose. The brief stressed the need to avoid segregation of the building into isolated operational groups so that the synergies available from working with daily awareness of each of the staff ’s activities could be realised.The architects, Eggleston Macdonald, achieved this objective by limiting the number of levels to three, reducing the need for fire separation and creating an opportunity for open stairs and visual links between floors. The inclusion of roofed internal courtyards and a pedestrian ‘street’ linking office and laboratory components increases visibility between floors and improves the opportunity for staff to become aware of the different roles which make up the organisation.The building design had to also reflect the future role of the AGSO in the community, with increasing private client focus, making it imperative that an institutional appearance be avoided. The laboratory and office functions are accommodated in two separate structures under one roofing system, in recognition of the very different working environment and support conditions required for each type of use. Laboratories and associated spaces are located mainly on a single level, with interstitial space above and below for access to services. The building has been designed for future adaptability and flexibility in terms of space planning and services requirements, which will be facilitated by deep floors and large floor plates. The major ecologically sustainable development principles include the orientation of the building on an east–west axis, with north–south orientation for primary facades, a high level of natural light and a comprehensively insulated building envelope.The incorporation of light shelves on the north facade increases daylight to work spaces, with the low ratio of external walling to gross floor area minimising the impact of external thermal conditions on the air-conditioning system. Sealed double-glazed window units were selected for thermal performance, and efficient light systems with light level and presence detection were installed. Case studies 211

A major energy saving feature of the building is the air-conditioning system, designed by Bassett Consulting Engineers, which is based on a series of 220 geothermal heat pumps that carry water through loops of pipe buried in 350 bore holes, 100-m deep, to exchange heat with the earth. The AGSO’s system is the largest such installation in Australia, and is expected to save close to $1 million over the anticipated 25-year life of the plant. In winter, the water collects heat from the earth and carries it through the system into the building. In summer, the system reverses to pull heat from the building and transfer it to the earth. The major advantages of this system include lower capital costs, reduced annual energy consumption, elimination of cooling towers and low greenhouse gas emissions. Currently the office component is performing in the order of 30% below the normal electrical energy consumption for Commonwealth government office buildings. It is evident upon entering the sophisticated foyer that the provision of an abundance of natural light was an important design objective.This is partially achieved by aligning the main structure along a central spine or ‘main street’, which is flooded with natural light via reflectors installed on the rooftop. Individual offices are positioned to the rear of this central spine, which acts to open up the building for both staff and visitors. All laboratories are positioned on the southern side of the building, with plant rooms positioned on levels one and five to free up laboratory spaces. External walling consists of natural stone veneer spandrel panels on an insulated backing frame associated with full-height double-glazed insulated windows. South-eastern and western facades are of precast concrete, acid-etched and polished panels, and double-glazed window units with suitable sun-control systems. Other precast units include square and hollow columns and central gutter units that drain through the columns at the end. On the roof, stainless steel laboratory flues have been gathered together to make an expressive design feature of what is generally one of the more difficult aspects of laboratory building design. Passive sunscreen systems are constructed of steel, with a durable paint finish on the north but incorporating louvre systems where required to control low angle winter sun. Roofing is generally of insulated prefinished metal roofing, and tanked trafficable roofing is used for exhaust flue enclosures and the central gutter system. Low E-type glass, which substantially cuts glare and heat radiation, has generally been used on all facades, with clear double-glazed units in south facing skylights and above light shelves where there is virtually no direct sunlight. The ACT RAIA jury found that the building ‘gathers AGSO together with flair and distinction [while reflecting] its location at the interface of Canberra and surrounding rolling countryside’.

212 Laboratory Design Guide

Case studies 213

Case study 18A Levels 2 and 3 floor plan

214 Laboratory Design Guide Case study 18B Section through laboratories and offices

Case study 18C ESD principles

Case studies 215

Case study 19 Sir Alexander Fleming Building Imperial College, London Architects

Foster and Partners

The building creates a new working environment for advanced medical and biological research. At the heart of the building is a research forum on five levels, united within a single volume. All research work that is not directly associated with the laboratory takes place in the forum – write-up, discussions, informal meetings and desk study – which provides a social arena where researchers can interact with their colleagues across disciplines and at all levels. It forms the hub of the building’s primary circulation system, linking all principal spaces both horizontally and vertically. The forum is a complex three-dimensional form; fully glazed at its northern end, it looks out onto generous views of the Queen’s Lawn. The enclosed southern end of the space is dominated by an art installation by the distinguished Danish artist, Per Arnoldi, which links all floors visually by gradations of colour. Overhead are sculpted ‘light wave’ rooflights, which introduce a combination of even north light for good working conditions and controlled sunlight to bring sparkle and contrast into the recesses of the building. This great central space is also a response to the incredibly tight limitations of the site itself. Surrounded on all sides by existing buildings and open only to the north, the design aims to maximise the use of natural light and indirect views for all the laboratories by arranging them on either side of the forum. The forum widens as it rises, forming terraces of open-plan offices for PhD students on the second and fourth floors, where the perimeter is lined with post-doctorate study carrels. This arrangement ensures that the view northwards can be enjoyed by as many people as possible. Social and meeting spaces are positioned along the northern edge of the building, looking directly out. Users are grouped according to how much noise they make, and an acoustic screen is provided between the lower undergraduate areas and the upper research floors. Located directly off this central space are large laboratories; these are specified to be of the highest possible quality, using the best available materials. Based on standardised modules, the laboratories are flexible enough to be used by any microbiologist and to allow for changes in use or adaptation to new techniques. Beyond these facilities, and to the south of the forum, are highly serviced specialist laboratories, with containment suites, cold rooms, tissue culture rooms and other installations that need to be as close as possible to the building’s giant service risers. These risers fill the space between the laboratories and the neighbouring buildings, leaving the central space free and flexible. This is essential to allow for the rapid changes in the research world and the demands these will make on the building; even during construction its users were changing and the design was able to keep pace with their evolving requirements. Undergraduate teaching takes place on the ground and

216 Laboratory Design Guide

first floors of the main block in rooms that are lit from above and enjoy views up to the research forum and its spectacular roof. Lecture theatres, seminar rooms, administration and café facilities are also located here, while the practical teaching classrooms are placed in a separate zone to the rear of the site, making the best use of the limited space available. The north elevation is clad in Portland stone and glass to lighten the overall appearance of the heart of the College, while a glazed service tower with lifts, toilets and stairs projects forward from the main building to contain and complete the corner of the Queen’s Lawn. All of this has been completed within the tight budgetary restraints of £1860/m2, some 10% less than other comparable projects. The new Sir Alexander Fleming Building is the first stage in a major regeneration of the Imperial College Campus – for the College, as one of its professors noted,‘it represents a major step forward in medical research, encouraging social and intellectual interaction unprecedented in my experience’. This building won High Honors in the Laboratory of the Year competition run by R&D Magazine, USA, and the RIBA Regional Architecture Award, UK.

Case studies 217

218 Laboratory Design Guide Case study 19A Typical laboratory floor plan

Case studies 219

Case study 19B Section through laboratories and atrium

Case study 20 Trinity College Dublin, East End Development Dublin, Ireland Architects

Scott Tallon Walker

This building forms the final phase of the East End Development master plan by Scott Tallon Walker in the early 1980s. The brief included a wider variety of complex space requirements, providing accommodation for the College of Pharmacy, the Smurfit Institute of Genetics and the Electron Microscope Unit, as well as large undergraduate chemistry and biology laboratories, science faculty lecture theatres, computer study rooms and centralised autoclave, gas bottle and hazardous supplies and waste stores. The building matched the masterplan proposal to provide highly serviced technical space in the new building block linked at all levels by bridges across a glazed street to the historic Georgian houses on Westland Row, which are renovated to provide offices, seminar and administration spaces. The new building is 60 ⫻ 30 m, bisected on its long axis (north/south) by a 6-m wide glazed-roof atrium, which is open at both ends to provide light and air to the heart of the building. The basement and ground floors of the building run underneath this atrium, providing large deep spaces to accommodate the undergraduate laboratories. A planning module of 3 m was established, based on a 1500-mm aisle and a 1500-mm doublesided bench. It was decided in principle to run all benches perpendicular to the outside wall with large 2.4 ⫻ 2.4-m2 windows to maximise the use of daylight and views out of the laboratories. Benches are never run across windows, ensuring that all windows are accessible, as the laboratories are naturally ventilated unless functional requirements dictate otherwise. In section the ground floor level, which accommodates the large undergraduate laboratories (biology and chemistry), has a floor-to-floor height of 4.8 m, with all other floors having a 3.6-m floor-to-floor height. Where appropriate, natural ventilation is used; however, where the plan depth is too great, the fume cupboard requirement for make-up air dictates, or the fire design requires a sealed wall, mechanical ventilation is used. In principle, the air handling has been decentralised. From a mechanical vent point of view, the building is divided into four quadrants, each with a chimney or airshaft at each end of it. These are simple insulated blockwork shafts, which allow air to be pulled down from high level to any floor. The floor-to-floor height is enough to accommodate a vertical AHU, which is connected to the shaft at a low level and discharges to ductwork at a high level above the ceiling. All of these plants operate on full fresh air, with discharge generally dealt with by fume cupboards. Non-return ‘flaps’ are fitted to allow make-up air to be drawn from the atrium at night if the fume cupboards are on 24-hour working and the air supply system is turned off at night. Only the basement lecture theatres and computer rooms operate with a return air system.

220 Laboratory Design Guide

Where no mechanical ventilation is provided, the space beside the chimney is left vacant so that an air handling plant can be installed. The solution adopted provides an easily accessible plant and an ability to add future plants with only local disruption, and minimises the amount of space taken up by reducing air handling duct sizes so they are more easily accommodated in ceiling voids and create fewer crossover difficulties. While this solution provides more plants to be maintained, we believe that overall it is a very good approach to air handling in a complex building of this nature. As the brief developed, it became apparent that there was a very large requirement for fume extraction. Eventually 90 fume cupboards were installed, the vast majority of these with individual exhaust ducts. Some of the undergraduate areas have grouped fume cupboards. Fume cupboard exhausts are taken to roof level using the eight shafts associated with the air handling locations. An innovation in design was the use of centrifugal in-line fans, which greatly reduced the area of plant room required to accommodate fans. Gases are distributed from a central gas bottle farm at roof level adjoining the main service lift. The bottle farm accommodates over 90 gas bottles, and its unusual location, along with the central solvent and hazardous materials stores and waste collection, was selected for three reasons: 1. Safety, in that the Fire Authority agreed that they posed the minimum threat in a remote secure location at the top of the building away from public and non-technical traffic; 2. Economy, in that this is a very dense city-centre site and ground space is at a premium; 3. Architectural, in that it was much easier visually to accommodate these louvre-screened compounds on the set back at penthouse level than it would have been at ground floor. Following the same principle as the air handling, the electrical distribution is decentralised, with individual power boards for each laboratory. These boards are shallow in design and are accommodated in a recess in the plasterboard stud partition system. This provides local control, and minimises the risk of interference and disruption between other laboratories. Lengthy studies were carried out to find the optimum location for light fittings to avoid shadow on the bench surface. Providing linear fittings over each side of a double-sided bench is the best solution; however, this results in doubling of the number of light fittings, which makes it very expensive from both capital and running costs points of view. The solution adopted was therefore to locate a 1500 ⫻ 300-mm fitting over the bench, perpendicular with the bench and gantry. This has been found quite acceptable by the users, although it generates some difficulty in dealing with the half bench that typically occurs at the end of a laboratory. The solution adopted to deal with this is a fluorescent downlighter that provides the same level and colour of light as the typical fitting. The laboratory benches are of our own design, using a cantilever powder-coated steel C-frame with various purpose-designated gantries to accommodate varying requirements for different disciplines. The worktops are either of laminate faced moisture-resistant MDF, or Trespa Toplab in areas where chemical resistance is required.

Case studies 221

222 Laboratory Design Guide Case study 20A Third floor plan

Case studies 223

Case study 20B North elevation and section through the terrace houses

Case study 21 Strathclyde Institute for Biomedical Sciences Glasgow Architects Reiach and Hall Project director in charge Robert Steel The new Strathclyde Institute for Biomedical Sciences is located on Cathedral Street, which forms the northern boundary edge of the University of Strathclyde’s John Anderson campus within Glasgow city centre. The building, in conjunction with the existing Todd Centre, forms a single complex to provide a mixture of teaching and research laboratory accommodation, with associated ancillary, office, administration and social spaces for the Departments of Pharmaceutical Science, Physiology and Pharmacology, and Immunology. These will be brought together under a single roof for the first time, to encourage and facilitate collaborative and interactive work. The Part of the building is intentionally and essentially very simple, based upon two strong organisational diagrams: 1. The building complex itself, comprising three elements – spine, bookend and existing Todd Centre Building. 2. The new building’s internal planning concept. This organisational diagram shows accommodation being distilled down to three basic types: main laboratories, ancillary spaces (both within the spine) and office/admin./social areas (stacked vertically within the bookend corner). The physical distinction between these functional spaces is the essence of the architectural idea, which is taken through into structural, construction and environmental control strategy. Within the spine, the main laboratory (or served) spaces are framed using exposed concrete. The thermal mass of the exposed concrete frame contributes towards the environmental strategy in that it absorbs daytime heat loads, cooling down at night. The north-facing ancillary (or servant) spaces are expressed as a lighter weight ‘clip-on’ element framed in exposed steel, which reflects a different functional requirement. The steel frame extends up through to the rooftop level plant room. To facilitate medium- to longer-term flexibility in use, the decision was taken to adopt a modular approach to the design and configuration of the main research laboratories. A simple repetitive unit of 9.6 ⫻ 10.8 m was devised, based upon detailed analysis of the briefing process. This modular unit was considered to be appropriate in terms of fulfilling requisite area, function and flexibility requirements. The module is capable of being subdivided into a half unit of 4.8 ⫻ 10.8 m for secondary laboratories or suited preparation rooms, with minimal alteration to services distribution or interference with the building’s structure.

224 Laboratory Design Guide

The typical structural bay plan explains the building’s hybrid structural strategy. The main laboratories are column-free spaces to enhance flexibility and space planning. Concrete edge beams are omitted between pairs of main columns on the south wall, to allow the fresh air supply ducts (which drop vertically within the solar wall) to enter into the laboratories unhindered. A fundamental aspect of the design of this building was the adoption of the concept of a double-skinned, clear-glazed solar wall, which would address specific ventilation and temperature-control issues. The desire to use natural ventilation as much as possible in such a highly serviced building was uppermost in our minds. The design of the mechanical and electrical services responds to the problem of providing acceptable environmental conditions over a vast range of occupancy and process loads. The system is designed to cope with varying peak loads, as well as providing a relatively passive design solution during periods of minimum load. The introduction of the ‘solar wall’ on the south laboratory facade was essential to the development of this design objective to achieve a passive low energy solution. The upper level floor plans are similar in their main laboratory, ancillary rooms and office/admin. area configuration. The eventual outcome of the repetitive modular approach to the main laboratories and the various planning permutations that this flexibility of approach provides is evident. The south elevation is dominated by the double-skinned glass wall, which has fitted panels and a projecting brise soleil for sun screening and cleaning purposes. Stainless steel service ducts are exposed as they cross over the roof from the plant room behind and drop down into the solar wall void. The glass is capped by continuous adjustable louvres, which control the stack effect ventilation provided by the solar wall.

Case studies 225

226 Laboratory Design Guide Case study 21A Typical laboratory floor plan

Case study 21B Section through double-skinned clear-glazed solar wall, south facade

Case studies 227

Case study 22 Hunter Water Australia Newcastle, NSW Architects Bligh Voller Nield Project director Neil Hanson Laboratory design Brian Griffin Hunter Water Australia is a wholly owned subsidiary of Hunter Water Corporation, a major urban utility providing water and sewerage services to over 450 000 people in the Hunter region of NSW. An internal laboratory has supplied water, wastewater and associated services to Hunter Water Corporation for many years, but since 1992 this service has become increasingly commercially orientated and a significant external customer base has eventuated. This, together with an increasing volume and complexity of environmental analysis services demanded by the Corporation, meant that sample numbers entering the laboratory virtually doubled between 1993 and 1998. Furthermore, the increased reliance on PC-based instrumentation and the general move to more automatic methods of water analysis placed a premium on available space. By 1997 the existing laboratory, despite several modifications in the early 1990s, was clearly inadequate for existing or planned tasks. In early 1998 the laboratory was absorbed into the newly formed marketing subsidiary, Hunter Water Australia, and this provided fresh impetus to examine the case for a new laboratory premises. Several options were examined, and in the final analysis the decision was made by the Hunter Water Australia Board to commission design professionals to investigate the feasibility of either buying or leasing a purpose-built laboratory on a greenfield site. It was also decided to deliver the project by design and construct (D & C) tenders. Brian Griffin was commissioned to complete the initial phase of the D & C project, which was to design the internal laboratory layout and document all the environmental requirements of the laboratory functions. The design process followed the recommended methodology, with a description of the laboratory functions by the laboratory manager, Dr David Nicholas, and a comprehensive brief prepared by the laboratory staff.The space relationship ‘bubble’ diagram, was based on a laboratory concept plan by Dr David Nicholas, and the staff prepared their equipment and bench requirement schedules. From the schedules we could calculate the required floor areas, as there is a constant relationship between the linear requirements and the floor space. The bubble diagram and calculated floor spaces were then combined into the preliminary scheme plan. Before final sign-off by HWA we recommended site visits to comparable laboratories, particularly the ACTEW Corporation in Canberra, which we had designed. The staff visit

228 Laboratory Design Guide

to Canberra was well worth the long drive. Positives and negatives were documented, and these provided valuable instructions to us. The final scheme plan was then approved, and we proceeded with all the necessary detailing of laboratory benches, stores, workstations, fume cupboards, local extraction, instrument gases, etc. This plan became the basis of the D & C tender documentation by Bligh Voller Nield. Their documents were prepared on the basis of obligatory laboratory requirements, but allowing maximum flexibility for the builder’s choice of shell construction to suit his experience and organisation. The tenders received were carefully evaluated, particularly with respect to the sites offered, the proposed building construction and the construction programme. The laboratory building of 1000 m2 was completed in 10 weeks at a cost of $1.3 million. This project has proved that the D & C option can be cost-effective if the client, design team and contractor are experienced and well-qualified to undertake their respective tasks.

Case studies 229

230 Laboratory Design Guide Case study 22A Laboratory floor plan

Case studies 231

Case study 22B Isometric view of laboratory system furniture

Case study 23 Analytical Research Laboratories Napier, New Zealand Architects Laboratory consultant

Opus International Consultants Brian Griffin

With business expansion, ARL needed larger and better laboratory facilities. A new laboratory building on a greenfield site in Awatoto, near Napier, New Zealand, was designed to provide an efficient and pleasant laboratory environment for the testing of agricultural samples. The coastal site and industrial neighbours required a robust design solution that also conveyed the accuracy and precision of the work carried out by the ARL. Initially, ARL commissioned Brian Griffin from Australia to develop the brief and design the laboratory layout, furniture and integrated servicing systems. The design methodology developed on many laboratory commissions was based on the linear requirements for accommodating all benches and equipment.The space relationship diagram, or ‘bubble’ diagram, demonstrated the requirement for perimeter generic benches with write-up workstations and tall storage cupboards located on either side of a central corridor. All benches are movable modular benches, to allow floor-standing equipment to be placed anywhere in the bench layout. The staff workstations are separated from the laboratory benches by the circulation aisle, thus satisfying occupational health and safety requirements. The relatively hazardous fume cupboards are located along the perimeter wall so that, should a fire occur, staff evacuate away from the fire source to the central escape route. The final approved scheme by Brian Griffin was then developed by the architects to a building floor plan incorporating the non-laboratory functions. The shape and structure of the building is derived from the interior layout of the laboratory. The strong, simple shape and use of colour gives the building a suitable presence in its environment. Building materials were selected to resist the harsh exterior environment and the processes and chemicals used inside. The fine architectural detailing of the building reflects the high-tech nature of the ARL business. The new laboratory building has allowed ARL to increase their throughput of work and accommodate new, high-tech automated testing equipment.This fulfils the business planning requirements of the two owners of the business, Ravensdown Fertiliser and AgResearch. The building received a NZ Institute of Architects design award.

232 Laboratory Design Guide

Case study 23A Plan and isometric view of movable modular furniture and services spines

Case studies 233

234 Laboratory Design Guide Case study 23B Floor plan of whole building

Case study 24 Biomedical Building Australian Technology Park (ATP, Sydney) Architects TGP Architects & Planners Design director Chris McGuirk Project architect Stephen Arlom The Australian Technology Park provides an innovative environment where companies can conduct research and development.The Park has the support of three universities within Sydney whose focus is on the development of technology, science and the humanities. The Biomedical Building is the first of the new high-technology buildings, and was designed for extreme adaptability, for repeated change of tenants and consistent with the requirements of efficient modern laboratory planning and tenant flexibility. Primary to the design is its accessible and organised reticulation of a high volume of engineering services. The inherent complexity of services and the need for a versatile laboratory environment shaped the design of the building. The product is a facility that enables excellent provisions for future engineering services and demands. The building is located at the entry to the ATP, and is on the corner of two important pedestrian routes through the Park. It is a five-storey laboratory building, with an engineering plant room at the roof level and basement car park. The building is approximately 85-m long, 24-m wide and 27-m high, and has a total lettable floor area of 8600 m2. The ground floor accommodates the main entrance lobby and a large café, opening onto outdoor paved areas. In addition there are stores, a substation, a fire sprinkler room and some lettable laboratory or shop front areas.The café is an important public facility in the Park, providing a social meeting venue for occupants of the building and the wider Park community. Access to all floor levels of the building is barrier-free, and two lifts, one standard passenger lift and one heavy-duty goods/passenger lift, serve all floors. The goods lift is double-sided, so laboratory products can be transported separately from normal passenger traffic. Three fire-isolated flights of stairs serve all floors.The main staircase, adjacent to the passenger lift lobby, has been designed with a continuous glazed facade to its southern wall, enabling a visual link to the outside. The building is designed to enable the reticulation of a high level of engineering services. Large volumes of wall and ceiling space are devoted to service runs. The floor-to-floor height is 4 m, to allow large ceiling spaces for present and future services. Access to these services in the external walls is by means of trafficable sun hoods.These steel grid platforms are level with the window heads and run the full length of the laboratory walls, and are accessed by using full-length safety harness anchor lines. Hinged panels between windows provide external access to services in the vertical ducts and spandrels for maintenance or modification, without loss of integrity of the occupied laboratory spaces. The external cladding to the office end of the building is face brick or glazed curtain wall. Case studies 235

TGP have designed the base building to accommodate the present tenant, Johnson & Johnson Research, and future tenants with equally demanding quality standards.The laboratories will be state of the art in biological research facilities, constructed to the highest laboratory design code requirements. The structural grid is designed to accommodate modern laboratory modular layouts and to optimise the implementation of laboratory design codes. Laboratory fitments will be modular in design for maximum adaptability and variability, and made of the highest quality materials for functionality and longevity. The structure is designed to modern seismic design requirements, with the provision of vibration attenuation for the extremely sensitive instruments used in some laboratories. This will be the first building in Australia to have its critical emergency power needs provided by a fuel cell, so that the building will need no emergency generator or standby battery power. The fuel cell will be built by the ATP on a site nearby, and connected to the Biomedical Building by underground mains. Computerised sun control studies by the architects showed that the trafficable sun hoods provided substantial shading to the north windows.Vertical steel blades on the west side of each window provide further shading from the setting sun angles. The north windows are double-glazed, with micro-Venetians between the glass panes to further reduce the heat gain. Separation of the fresh air plant from exhaust systems is so vigorously enforced that exhaust fans are located on the roof of the main plant room. Exhaust flues are aerodynamically designed so that exhaust air cannot be recirculated by air turbulence back into the supply air inlets. Air movement about the building has been computer modelled at Sydney University to ensure that the design conforms to these criteria. An acoustic study was commissioned to ensure that mechanical plant noise was not generated at an unacceptable level, especially with hotel bedrooms immediately across the internal road, Central Avenue. As a result of the acoustic study, substantial shielding was added to air handling fans and special acoustic louvres were added to the plant room enclosure. Waste products from the building will be sorted and kept in segregated stores for collection by licensed contractors. Waste products are sorted into office refuse, recyclables (cardboard, paper, glass, plastic), contaminated, autoclavable, toxic and radioactive waste. (See also Plates 36 and 37 in the colour section.)

236 Laboratory Design Guide

Case study 24A Typical laboratory tenant’s plan

Case studies 237

Case study 24B Section through laboratories

238 Laboratory Design Guide

Case study 24C Wall section showing horizontal services duct

Case studies 239

Case study 24D Vertical services duct plan and elevation

240 Laboratory Design Guide

Case study 25 New Science Building University of Adelaide, SA Architects Project director Project associate Laboratory consultant

Mitchell/Giurgola & Thorp Architects, in association with HardyMilazzo Romaldo Giurgola Doug Brooks Brian Griffin

The New Sciences Building for the University of Adelaide provides laboratory accommodation for biological sciences research and teaching at the University’s North Terrace Campus.The site for the building is defined by the requirements of the site masterplan for the lower level of the campus and the need to relate to existing science facilities. The design concept accommodates the briefed functional areas and associated plant and facilities over six floor levels with planning that optimises the provision of functional accommodation whilst maintaining functional circulation patterns. In order to maximise the percentage of functional or occupied area to the gross building area, the design gathers the briefed laboratory spaces and support facilities into two zones on each side of a central zone, accommodating the building core facilities along with administrative and academic offices. This has the effect of reducing circulation corridors and provides for larger area laboratories with direct access to support facilities.Teaching laboratories along with administration and store facilities are located at ground floor level, and seminar rooms are provided at first floor level with access provided directly from the main entry. A common room and associated facilities are provided at fifth floor level, providing for interaction between the various research groups. The briefed laboratories are comprised typically of an academic office module, three research laboratory modules and one write-up module. The laboratories are grouped four per zone, with two on each side of a central laboratory support area.The planning provides for varying numbers of grouped laboratory modules per side of each zone, which can be divided both now and in the future as required by research demands, courses offered and fluctuations in student enrolment numbers. The laboratory support area accommodates utility rooms and store rooms, and constant temperature rooms with fume cupboards are grouped in dedicated rooms to provide for efficient use and to remove potential hazards from the research laboratories. A roof top central mechanical plant services the floor air handling plants stacked at each end of the building, and exhaust systems rise through the building in a central location. The building is primarily accessed at ground level at a central location. A second access point is provided, which is associated with the goods delivery point on the north elevation. Vertical access to the floors above is by means of the main central stair and lifts adjacent to the main entry. The provision of the central stair associated with the lift lobby provides for movement between floors without entering the laboratory zones. Stairs at the east and Case studies 241

west ends of the building provide for emergency egress and between-floor circulation from the laboratory zones. Functional areas on each floor are accessed from corridors whose dimensions reflect the anticipated levels of use and the building budget, while providing a comfortable environment and adequate movement of staff and students. Access to the building out of faculty hours is provided by swipe-card activation of the main entry door and the delivery dock, with selective access on a floor-by-floor basis provided by swipe-card control of lift addresses. The planning provides an efficient facility for biological sciences laboratories whilst ensuring good amenity of accommodation, thereby promoting interaction and exchange of ideas between the faculty and students. At the same time the building, by virtue of appropriate circulation, structural configuration and location of plant rooms, can be adapted to different uses with minor adjustment.

242 Laboratory Design Guide

Case studies 243

Case study 25A Typical research laboratory floor plan

Case study 25B South elevation and aerial view

244 Laboratory Design Guide

Case study 26 Center for Clinical Science Research Stanford University Stanford, USA Architects Foster and Partners Laboratory design consultant Research Facilities Design Stanford University has long been recognised as a centre for clinical excellence. The new Center for Clinical Science Research provides the School of Medicine with state-of-the-art laboratory and office space for its ongoing programme of research into cancer and other diseases. Its design responds to emerging trends for interdisciplinary biomedical research and provides flexible, light-filled working spaces in which research teams can expand and contract with ease. The brief called for close proximity between laboratories, core support areas and offices. Another important stipulation was natural lighting in the laboratory and office spaces.These requirements led to the development of a modular design, which allows intercommunication between functional areas and research groups. The 21 000-m2 building consists of two symmetrical wings united around a central courtyard. The wings are connected at roof level by a screen of louvers. Shading the courtyard from direct sunlight, the louvers create a comfortable environment for functional interaction, and this space has become the social heart of the building. Offices overlook the courtyard through bay windows. A screen of bamboo at ground level offsets the crisp lines of this space and affords greater privacy for office occupants. Environmental systems take advantage of Palo Alto’s climate, which is among the best in the United States.The offices are naturally ventilated for most of the year, with mechanical assistance only on extremely hot days. Horizontal louvers on the exterior facades provide shade and correspond with a third-storey cornice line established by neighbouring buildings. Seismic performance was another key concern: the campus lies close to the San Andreas Fault and the laboratories contain highly sensitive equipment. Extensive computer simulations were conducted, including real-time animations based on previous earthquakes. In response, the building employs a concrete shear-wall structural system. Bridges spanning the courtyard rely on friction pendulum bearings to allow up to 0.5 m of seismic movement between the wings. Foster & Partners are designing a second building on the campus. Named after one of the inventors of the Internet, the James H Clark Center provides highly flexible laboratories for interdisciplinary research and is described under Case study 41.

Case studies 245

Case study 26A Typical research laboratory floor plan

246 Laboratory Design Guide

Case studies 247

Case study 26B Section through laboratories and atrium

Case study 27 Laboratory Design Competition at the University of Newcastle, NSW Architects Laboratory consultant

Lawrence Nield and Partners with Grose Bradley Brian Griffin

This case study was an entry in a limited architectural competition. While it was not selected, the design nevertheless has many redeeming features and progresses laboratory design in terms of the unique peristitial solution to flexible servicing to the research laboratories.The term ‘peristitial’ (from the Greek ‘peri’ for ‘around’) was coined by Brian Griffin. After considering a number of different proposals, including the one set out in the architectural design brief, our team concluded that inserting a building running north–south from the Biological Sciences to the Medical Sciences building on the east side, rather than on the west, would give great functional advantages and great ‘urban’ opportunities without compromising sites to the west of these two buildings.This would allow efficient linkage without affecting the greenhouses and, importantly, give the University an unused site to either expand the Medical and Biological Sciences building or provide for another future building. Importantly, initial analysis of interaction between departments and laboratories showed that the position would give both the most effective and efficient interactions (‘everyone is nearer everyone else’) and the best relationships in this location, and with this form and its vertical circulation. There is no disadvantage in a modern laboratory having facades on the east and west, as sunlight is not permitted by modern laboratory standards within laboratories. It is not possible to naturally ventilate the laboratories and, importantly, further environmental filtering can be provided by peristitial spaces between the external laboratory walls and a sun shading screen wall. The vertical peristitial space is an important innovation that would allow for the installation and change of the full range of laboratory services and ventilation as well as providing appropriate solar control.The peristitial spaces are accessible by technicians and in fact provide a cheaper and more appropriate solution than interstitial spaces between laboratory floors. They have the further advantage of allowing floor levels in the new link building and the Medical Sciences building to be aligned. The major element of the brief that can be advantageously naturally ventilated is the departmental offices. These are placed on the northern side of the development in a thin block, immediately adjacent to the laboratories but separated from them.The separation of offices is recommended by Occupational Health and Safety Standards, and is now best practice.There are also cost advantages for following this policy. As mentioned above, natural ventilation can be provided for offices while the laboratories need considerably more costly air conditioning. 248 Laboratory Design Guide

The upper three levels of the new link building align with Medical Sciences, and connection to Biological Sciences becomes easy by means of ramps and a lift, which stops at half levels. Below these research laboratories are the teaching laboratories and suspended above-ground ‘concourses’.The new lecture theatre is located adjacent to the existing Basden lecture theatre. The building’s vertical circulation adjoins the present lift amenity core of the Medical Sciences Building.The following links work naturally with our proposed link buildings: • Shared teaching laboratories and lecture theatres have been located at ground and first floor, with shared research/teaching facilities also on the first floor. • The three upper levels accommodate the research laboratories for Medical Sciences and Biological Sciences; the allocation of space shown on the plans is only preliminary and shows that the total area required has been provided for. The plans also show the potential relationships. • The laboratory floors are completely free of obstructions except for one row of columns, as all laboratory services will run out to the external peristitial zone and not to the more traditional internal ducts.The longitudinal corridor can therefore be central or off-centre, and different for each floor. The building provides large rectangular spaces of about 900 m2 (not ‘L’-shaped spaces), which can be flexibly used as laboratory requirements change over time. The most flexible space is simply a big rectangle with minimum columns and external services. The teaching laboratories are flexible, accommodating the needs of existing and the new co-operative teaching model, but also adaptable to the needs of future courses. Flexibility requires systems for the provision of laboratory services that are adaptable and serviced without interruption to the occupants.The budget precludes an interstitial services space between floors. However, the services can be installed within a peristitial space between the external walls and the sun shading screen. Reticulated gases, water and waste lines branch into the laboratories through ‘services spines’. Movable benches and equipment are arranged on both sides of the services spine, so power and data are better reticulated within the building. A series of individual fan coil units will service each bay, with ducting extended at ceiling level between beams to the required pattern. Open metal decking at each level will provide access for maintenance, and provide the horizontal component of the sun shading design. A full environmental management plan (EMP) will be developed, to ensure all aspects of ecologically sustainable design are addressed. In summary, the offices are naturally ventilated and face north, while laboratories are carefully protected against solar gain, having a north–south orientation. A concrete frame will provide a high thermal mass so that there can be serious consideration of passive design techniques. Issues of building waste, and particularly laboratory waste, will have to be addressed in any EMP. The EMP will ensure design decisions are qualified against their impact over the life of the building. Case studies 249

The key to the laboratory servicing is the peristitial space, which will accommodate: • • • •

Fan coil units Reticulated services Fume cupboard exhaust pipes Liquid waste pipes.

The servicing will then be very flexible and modular. Central plant will be located below the level 1 concourse to allow for any future expansion of the heating and cooling plant.

250 Laboratory Design Guide

Case studies 251

Case study 27A Elevation of peristitial space showing the decentralised air handling units and fume extraction ducts behind the sun shading screen

Case study 27B Cross-section through open-planned laboratory floors with peristitial spaces for services between the external walls and sun shading screen

252 Laboratory Design Guide

Case study 28 Laboratory Design Competition at the University of Queensland, Australia Architects Laboratory consultant

Peddle Thorp Architects and Donovan Hill Architects Brian Griffin

This laboratory design was an entry in a limited architectural competition and, though not selected by the judges, demonstrates current best practice in laboratory design.

Laboratories The laboratories are generic, adaptable and not specific, with a simple regular arrangement of peninsula benches. Laboratory services to the movable benches are provided from the fixed services spine, central in the peninsula and supporting movable reagent shelves.The centre of the laboratory is an open space for free-standing equipment and bench-mounted equipment. The laboratories are arranged in a continuous line along the full length of each building for maximum flexibility, allowing research projects to expand and contract in a linear direction as driven by research funding. A continuous internal corridor connects all the laboratories for fire egress, but also for combining laboratory functions and to encourage professional interaction. The ceiling is 4.5-m high, as the brief called for a height greater than 3.6 m, and there is a 2-m interstitial space between laboratory floors. This space allows engineering staff to change and maintain services without entering the laboratories and disrupting laboratory operations. All laboratories have full-height windows, as they are located facing a tropical landscaped atrium. External facing laboratories in Australia need sun control louvres to eliminate direct sunlight, but unfortunately louvres obstruct the views. Locating the laboratories so that they face a landscaped atrium is the better design.

Staff offices For OH & S reasons, staff write-up workstations are not located within the laboratories. Offices for staff needing to be close to the laboratories are accommodated in a continuous line, parallel to the laboratories, with a glass partition. Staff offices that do not need to overlook the laboratories, such as those for research directors, senior staff, visiting research scientists, secretarial staff, and laboratory staff write-up workstations, are accommodated on a mezzanine floor. Meeting rooms and administration support are also on the upper level. Access to the mezzanine level is directly off the lift lobby at one end, and is particularly convenient for visitors, who should not enter the laboratory corridors. The lift lobby entry to the mezzanine floor is also convenient for access by disabled staff. Staff offices on a mezzanine floor have proved to be popular at the Institute of Medical Sciences at the University of Aberdeen, because they are quiet and staff can write-up their Case studies 253

work or read in peace.This innovative concept by the architects David Murray & Associates of Aberdeen is shown as Case study 13.

Formal and informal meeting spaces The brief called for an auditorium, two seminar rooms and one meeting room attached to each 50-staff laboratory group. All these formal spaces will be ‘booked’ and perform an essential function, but equally essential are the informal meeting spaces for a few chairs at nodes of staff movement, stairs, where professional interaction can occur.

Special purpose laboratories The brief called for very specific accommodation for large equipment, such as for spectroscopy, which was existing or intended to be purchased.The design complies with the brief, but this equipment can become obsolete and it is very costly to adapt some of these stand-alone facilities to other uses.

Instrument gas reticulation While not mentioned in the brief, the need for reticulation of instrument gases to avoid long distances jeopardising purity is important. The design solution was to incorporate firerated gas cylinder enclosures at each laboratory level, complying with the Australian Standards, and reducing to the minimum the length of gas reticulation.

Engineering services The need to have flexibility in the engineering services for air conditioning, laboratory gases, water, waste, power, data and communications was seen by the design team as of paramount importance.The interstitial space between laboratory floors is accessible from a linear plant room at each level, extending the full length of the building and accommodating the several air handling units for each zone, distribution boards, control valves, compressors, vacuum pumps, transformers and other small plant. One of the big advantages of having the high ceilings and interstitial spaces only over the laboratories, and low ceilings over the office floors, is energy conservation. Laboratories require special environmental conditions, while offices require only ‘comfort conditioning’.The bulk of the building is also reduced, with proportional savings in building costs.

Occupational health and safety Having an Occupational Health and Safety professional on the team ensured that the design complied with OH & S issues such as equal opportunities and access for the disabled to all spaces, including laboratories.

254 Laboratory Design Guide

Case study 28A Section through laboratory floors, interstitial space, mezzanine office floors and atrium

Case studies 255

256 Laboratory Design Guide Case study 28B Part plan of level 5 showing full laboratory floor and part plan of level 6 showing mezzanine offices and plant space

Case study 29 Institute of Medical Sciences: Phase 2 University of Aberdeen, Scotland Architects

David Murray Associates

Phase 2 of the IMS building, which is currently being documented, is an extension of the building in Case study 13. The cross-section is the same as in Phase 1, which proved to be very successful. One of the most obvious and impressive features of the IMS building is the dramatic atrium space, which rises to almost 18 m in height. This space did not form part of the client’s accommodation requirements, but was a fundamental element in the architect’s design concept – effectively a value-added feature.The design logic was that it would create a social heart to the building, where researchers could meet and chat over a cup of coffee and where a natural exchange of ideas and information could take place. It is a delight to visit the building after a few years of occupation and find that this space has now become the social hub for the community of scientists. Another dramatic feature of the institute is the double-height principal laboratories. Sadly, many modern laboratories have relatively low ceilings in relation to their large floor area. The Aberdeen building is quite the opposite, with laboratories that are bright and airy. One of the professors describes how simply walking into his laboratory lifts his spirits, and states that this is a feeling shared by his colleagues.This enthusiasm has a real, although difficult to quantify, effect on research activity. The building has had a beneficial effect on the University’s research programme, and at the time of writing detailed design work is being completed for the second phase. The client’s brief for this major extension to the institute was ‘more of the same’ as far as the form of accommodation and servicing strategy are concerned, but with certain modifications to suit changed requirements for the new accommodation. The most fundamental change from the first phase is the move to full mechanical ventilation in all laboratories, with comfort cooling in certain key areas. The flexibility of the intermediate service gantries has been such a success that they will be repeated in the new building. User experience over the past few years has demonstrated on numerous occasions the inherent flexibility of this innovative servicing arrangement. Installation of new equipment or services has been carried out in many of the laboratories without detriment to the day-to-day operations, providing benefits for both research staff and tradesmen. Another feature of the first phase design that has been repeated in this second phase is the concept of two office floors matching the combined height of a laboratory and service gantry or interstitial space. The mezzanine office floors are popular with staff, as they are quiet and remote from the busy activities on the laboratory floor.

Case studies 257

258 Laboratory Design Guide Case study 29A Level 2 floor plan of Phase 1 and Phase 2 extension

Case studies 259

Case study 29B Level 3 floor plan showing the mezzanine offices, service gantry and void over laboratories.The section of Phase 2 is the same as that for Phase 1 (Case study 13)

Case study 30 CSIRO Molecular Science and Food Science Australia, North Ryde Architects Cox Richardson Architects & Planners Laboratory design consultant Jeff Freeman The Joint Research Complex for CSIRO Molecular Science and Food Science Australia forms the centrepiece of a high technology business park that co-locates CSIRO Research and Development with compatible innovative private industry partners. In providing high-quality modern facilities appropriate for conducting both current and anticipated scientific research and development activities, it will enable CSIRO Molecular Science and Food Science Australia to continue its role as a centre of excellence providing a research base to support developing industries in the areas of molecular biology, biomaterials and food research. The complex consists of bench scale laboratories, laboratory special suites, support areas and laboratory offices, as well as office and support areas for management and administration staff. The complex also includes the provision of highly specialised facilities, including a Sensory Analysis Centre,Technical and Process Bays and an Animal Facility. The design concept is based around two research ‘engine rooms’ – a five-level bench scale laboratory building and a single-level complex of process bays. The requirements for natural light, outlook and amenity from both laboratory and office areas whilst maintaining key functional relationships between bench scale laboratories, support areas and offices on a site very much constrained in its length, became the driving force in establishing the architectural form of the main laboratory building.This led to the arrangement of two parallel wings either side of and linked by a central covered atrium. Each wing is itself divided into three zones, with generic laboratory modules located at each end and clustered around a central zone of shared support facilities, maintaining the required functional adjacency to these areas. Laboratory planning follows a modular 3.3-m format, which enables flexibility and adaptability of work areas to suit ever-changing research programmes with minimum impact on fixed building services. Such an arrangement enables both horizontal and vertical integration of laboratories of similar type and function. For example, the more highly serviced organic chemistry laboratories are arranged either side of the atrium over a single level, enabling horizontal integration within a specific research group.They are also stacked in their sectional form at the western end of the building, enabling vertical integration between the research groups, to facilitate servicing arrangements. Office zones are clustered adjacent to each generic laboratory module in order to establish a direct relationship between laboratory areas and office/write-up areas.

260 Laboratory Design Guide

The central atrium also acts as the main independent servicing zone feeding each parallel wing. Hydraulic services are reticulated vertically within this zone, thus minimising the need for floor slab penetrations, as are fume cupboard exhaust flues, which are clustered around a structural support bracket located midway between columns at each alternate module. In this way, future installation of fume cupboards and associated ductwork can easily be achieved with minimal disruption to laboratory areas or building fabric. In planning the laboratories around the atrium, the sun can be controlled more economically at the roof, whilst the offices achieve the benefit of access to view, natural light and ventilation by being on the facade. The roof is designed such that the summer sun is reflected off the surrounding roof onto the underside of the main atrium roof, and hence directly into the centre of the atrium. During the winter the low angle sun is restricted by louvres on the northern side, whilst the majority of the sun is reflected up onto the larger radius section of the roof. In this way, daylight penetration and hence distribution in the atrium is maximised year round. The planning concept also addressed CSIRO’s need for both a flexible and closely collaborative team environment and for security control of confidential intellectual property. The atrium configuration, with bridge links between each laboratory wing, enables clients and visitors independently to access special laboratories in a controlled manner, without passing through confidential programmes underway in other laboratories. At the same time, the experience of the building for both staff and client visitors is enriched by the light-filled atrium, which provides visual comprehension of the laboratories and a human face to the multitude of research activity. (See also Plate 38 in the colour section.)

Case studies 261

262 Laboratory Design Guide Case study 30A Typical floor plan of research laboratories in parallel wings

Case studies 263

Case study 30B Cross-section showing the two research laboratory wings and atrium with circulation bridges

Case study 31 Liverpool Biosciences Centre University of Liverpool, UK Architect David Morley Architects Project director Jonathan Wilson The Liverpool Biosciences Centre embodies the latest developments in the life sciences. The institute has strong links with the Liverpool Royal Infirmary and Schools of Medicine and Tropical Medicine.The boundaries between traditionally autonomous disciplines – biochemistry, microbiology, ecology, plant science – have been blurred by the rapidly developing science of genetics. Reflecting these developments, The University of Liverpool’s School of Biological Sciences unified in the early 1990s, but the continued existence of ‘sub-departments’ in separate buildings remained a barrier to extending scientific integration and collaboration. In 1998, David Morley Architects won the commission to design and build a new research and teaching facility that would complete the unification of the school.The brief was unique in the terms of the range of disciplines it embraced, from plant science to cancer research. The building is intended to act as a catalyst to interaction between research workers, academics and students. The new research building incorporates two ‘generic’ open plan labs per floor, sharing a central specialist core facility and other specialist rooms around the perimeter. On the other side of the main corridor, and in close proximity, are the researchers’ offices. The open plan lab areas have a 40-seat capacity, providing a ‘home base’ for each of the school’s research groups. It was an important aspect of the design concept that these areas were generic rather than tailored to specific research groups’ requirements.This provides flexibility to allow the school to respond to a rapidly developing field of science and changing funding climate. The research groups have been allocated positions within the building on the basis of scientific affinity with neighbouring groups. Hence, the arrangement promotes a high level of interaction between disciplines, which, in a more conventional building, would be in discreet physical zones. Another feature of the plan that promotes interaction is the internal lab lift. This allows researchers to circulate freely between floors without having to exit the controlled lab zone (requiring donning of coats and hand washing), which they need to do on occasions to make use of other core facilities, or simply to confer with colleagues. A key aspect of the project is its significance as a flagship development both for the University and the City of Liverpool. The site is located at the north-east corner of the precinct, opposite a major gateway route into the city centre.The radial design responds to the corner, establishing a strong presence and identity. A contemporary cladding material – terra cotta rainscreen – reminiscent of Liverpool sandstone, has been used on the streetside elevation. The roofscape of the building is crowned by three exhaust towers. Whilst these structures are a simple practical design solution to an engineering requirement, they make a gesture of appropriate urban scale in this particular location.

264 Laboratory Design Guide

The Liverpool Biosciences Centre comprises three distinct components, each with its own funding stream: 1. Teaching Labs and School Administration (refurbishment and remodelling of existing facility) 2. Research Facility for eight research groups and 320 full-time academics (new-build) 3. Incubation Centre with facilities for 15 start-up biotechnology companies (new-build). The Incubator has been planned within one of the standard modules of the building frame so that it can easily be converted to another research use in the future.The physical link to the academic research zone on every floor allows start-up companies to make use of University services such as support and supplies, and also research services should they require. The new-build phase of the project was completed and handed over in October 2002.The remainder of the development – teaching labs and school were handed over to the School on 15 September 2003. (See also Plates 39 and 40 in the colour section.)

Case studies 265

266 Laboratory Design Guide

EXTRACT TOWERS

PLANT

T AN PL

LAB

S VICE SER

-UP ITE WR

IN CU BA TO R

LA BS

LA BS

PLAN T

CORE FACILITIES DISTRIBUTION

WRITE-UP

MORNING SUN SPIN E

LAB

WR ITE -UP LIN K

RESEARCH

P -U TE RI W

LINK TOWER incorporating goods lift servicing both new and existing buildings

INSTITU TE NE W

NEW ENTRANCE COURTYARD

AFTERNOON SUN

LE IB SS PO

RE TU FU

D HE IS B R FU RE

N IO NS A P EX

BS LA D G NDE N HI PA AC EX TE D AN TE UA AD G R IN RG CH E DE EA NTR UN T CE

MIDDAY SUN

Case study 31A General arrangement

SE RV IC EY AR D

REMOVAL OF EXISTING TOWER addressing fire compliance and overshadowing of new forecourt

AIR HANDLING UNITS

FUME EXTRACT

Key to Functional Areas ACADEMIC OFFICE WRITE-UP AREAS SERVICE RISER RESEARCH GROUP LAB BASE

CIRCULATION

Case studies 267

NATURALLY VENTILATED WRITE-UP ZONE

Case study 31B Environmental section

ENVIRONMENTALLY CONTROLLED LAB ZONE

268 Laboratory Design Guide

2

1

3

4 4.1

A 4.2

5

A

Incubation Unit Main Lab

Incubation Unit Main Lab

6

Incubation Unit Main Lab

Equipment Room G

B 7

Office

Office

Office

Dark Room Dry Store

Post Docs

8

Cold Room

Incubation Centre

Riser

Riser

Tea Point

Riser

8.

Lab D Cell Signalling (Molecular Medicine)

C

1

Locker Area

Lift Office

8.

2

Office

Histology

A

Cleaners Cupboard

Biophysics Laboratory

D

Disabled WC

Incubation Unit Main Lab

Incubation Unit Main Lab

Mechanical Riser Void

Void WC

Protein Expression Facility

Tissue Culture Prep

WC

E

Office

Tissue Culture D

A2

WC

Office A1 2

A Office

Entry/ Coats Office A1 Office A2

Office A1

Case study 31C Typical research floor and incubator centre

9

Tissue Culture C

Inform al Seatin g Area

Informal Seating Area

PCR Suite

Case study 32 Kadoorie Biological Sciences Building University of Hong Kong Architects Principal architect Laboratory consultant

Leigh & Orange Ltd Terence E Smith Laboratories Investigation Unit Ltd (LIU)

In early 1996, following a successful earlier study to establish feasibility, Leigh and Orange Ltd (L & O) were appointed by the University of Hong Kong to undertake the design and project administration of a new prestigious laboratory building dedicated to the Biological Sciences on the main Pokfulam campus. Designed primarily for research but with some teaching capability, this exciting new building brings together the existing but formerly dispersed departments of Zoology, Botany, Ecology and Biodiversity and the University’s Institute of Molecular Biology into one centre for the life sciences. It is located on a prominent site overlooking the principal western entrance to the campus immediately adjacent to the founding building of the University – the Main Building – which was also designed by L & O and built in 1912. Ten storeys in height and providing some 10 000 m2 of usable laboratory accommodation, this highly innovative building, funded by private donation from the Kadoorie Charitable Foundation, not only answers the demanding architectural challenge of the site but, through its response to the issues of functionality, flexibility, safety, energy efficiency, sustainability, lifetime economy, buildability and ease of maintenance, sets new standards for the design of research laboratories worldwide. The ten-storey rectangular laboratory building, lifted above the site on eight 10-m high upturned pyramidal column structures, contains eight floors of laboratories consisting of two identically sized laboratory suites per floor planned either side of a central circulation core housing toilets, lifts, and main staircase, and one upper floor of supporting aquaria and greenhouses. Teaching is confined to the two lowest floors. The remaining rooftop space is taken up with plantrooms and space for building services. The building spans above a single storey, centrally aligned, podium, containing further plant space and other ancillary accommodation. The covered podium level acts as a dedicated pedestrian circulation concourse linking the building into the overall campus circulation pattern and providing a main entrance level from which pedestrian access is gained to the building above via both lift and staircase. Vehicular access for equipment delivery, refuse collection and emergency vehicle access is at ground floor level, grade separated from the pedestrian circulation system at podium level.

Case studies 269

The design represents an elegantly innovative architectural solution for a highly technical building on a small and constrained site. The architectural, structural and building service elements are thoroughly unified into one design concept in which classical symmetry is evident in both its planning and its external form. It thus responds not only to the orthogonal discipline of the campus, of which it forms such an important part, but echoes, in modern idiom, the neo-classical University Main Building, which forms its north-eastern backdrop. Clad externally in slick, silver-grey, tiles the rather functional and heavy rectangular concrete box demanded by the building’s operational requirements has been afforded a marked sense of dignity by lifting it 10 m out of the site and given a distinct ‘high-tech’ character by the external application of aluminum sunshades, steel and glass balustrades, and the spectacular steel and glass curtains that hang from the curving roof steelwork on two sides. Partly visible and partly obscured building service installations behind the glass curtains and at roof level unashamedly attest to the highly technical nature of the building and add to its ‘high-tech’ visual character. The three staircases and main vertical service duct are clearly articulated externally and their cylindrical forms punctuate both plan and building mass in a simple but powerful way. The symmetry of the building around its north/south and east/west axes is evident in the main pedestrian approach steps and is extended throughout the building up to and including the roofline. The upturned pyramidal column bases that bring the massive weight of the building down effortlessly to just eight points provide a dramatic connection between the building and the site over which it floats. Light and air flow through the podium space and the angled column bases create an ever-changing perspective for people entering or leaving the building or passing around it at ground floor level both during the day and at night when the area is floodlit. A muted grey and blue colour scheme is predominant both internally and externally to suggest serious research into the life sciences and chrome yellow is used sparingly in the internal lift lobbies to provide sparkle in the circulation areas outside the laboratories. The net-to-gross percentage floor area ratio of approximately 80/100 resulting from the unusual deep plan double suite arrangement, adopted for each typical laboratory floor plan, renders the building highly space efficient when compared to more traditional design. The laboratory suites are designed to be highly flexible and easily adaptable to cope with changing research patterns over time so extending the useful life of the building and reducing energy expenditure and waste production at each change operation. The suites are primarily large empty rectangular shells 3-m high and 24 ⫻ 24.6 m in plan area with smooth, flush, easily cleanable internal surfaces. Space subdivision is effected by

270 Laboratory Design Guide

proprietary metal partitions, simply pressure fixed between floor and the metal-tile suspended ceiling rendering plan rearrangement a simple and easy exercise. Light switches, power sockets, shelves, cupboards, whiteboards, coat hangers, etc., are simply hung from an aluminum ‘wall rail’ channel integral with the partitions at door head height so rendering the positioning of such elements entirely flexible. Smaller elements such as picture hooks, task lighting, etc., can be simply fixed by magnet to the metal partitions in any convenient location as required by the individual user. The laboratory benching system is a custom designed modular system with pre-plumbed/ serviced spine units all of which can bolt together in different combinations much like standard office furniture kits with the pre-plumbed services being simply joined up by flexible connectors. The benching units can be rearranged simply and easily to meet changing requirements and to fit new equipment over time. The laboratory suites are almost exclusively serviced from above. Water, gas, electricity, exhaust, telephones, fibre optics, computer links and vacuum are all provided on a 3-m grid in the 1.5-m deep ceiling void and can be tapped into using flexible connectors as required by the layout requirements. Similarly a drainage grid is provided in the floor to take flexible connections from sinks and equipment as required, also on a 3-m grid basis, with a specialised vacuum system employed on the first floor to prevent slab penetrations at this level. High performance fume cupboards have been specified utilising the latest ‘vortex’ fume scrubbing technology, developed initially by the British Atomic Research Authority, and now available in the private sector. This together with added built-in carbon filtration enables them to be recirculatory and moveable rather than fixed with roof top scrubber and extract. Again this enables easy internal rearrangement of the laboratory layout as research/teaching patterns change. Furthermore the use of such innovative technology obviates the need to extract to atmosphere in all but a few very special cases so reducing the air-conditioning load and consequent energy consumption of the building and at the same time providing a more environmentally friendly solution than that provided conventionally. Annual energy saving from this source is estimated to be 825 000 kWh and over the anticipated 50 year lifetime this translates to over 4 million kWh. Lighting and air-conditioning outlets are designed within a modular aluminum-tile suspended ceiling again providing easy access to services in the ceiling void and flexibility for any change in layout as required. To facilitate easy and safe maintenance, particularly to substantially limit the necessity for maintenance personnel to enter environmentally sensitive and potential dangerous laboratory spaces, and at the same time to prevent disruption and potential contamination of laboratory operations, all principle building service installations are located outside the laboratory suites either in the podium on the roof, in the core or on the external wall of the building.

Case studies 271

Those in the podium, core and roof serve the building in a conventional manner and are distributed via one major and several minor vertical, easily accessible, service ducts located in the core. Those services located on the external wall are designed and arranged in an unconventional manner. Each floor is serviced separately and each laboratory suite on each floor is served on a modular basis. This is to facilitate safe shut downs on a zoned basis in the event of a dangerous incident occurring within the laboratories and to provide flexibility for effecting minimum disruption to ongoing research operations when altering a part of the laboratory layout. The external wall-mounted service installations running along the eastern and western elevations are visually screened and weather protected by specially designed glass curtain walls which are hung from the curved steel roof on light steel structures. The curtain walls are hung 2.5 m proud of the external laboratory walls so forming external services zones within this unique double-skin arrangement. The metal supports which tie back the glass curtain walls to the main structure also support a lightweight maintenance walkway which extends around all four sides of the building at every floor level and which is accessible from the core. Thus the building can be maintained easily, including cleaning windows, in perfect safety without maintenance personnel having to enter laboratory spaces. The glass skin is partly clear, to afford views out, and partly obscured, to screen services and to act as a sun shading device to low angle solar penetration on the east and west facades. Between the glass skin and the external wall is the external open services zone which is fully ventilated at the top, bottom and sides and between each pane of glass. The deep double-skin arrangement acts both as double glazing, preventing solar gain on the most exposed elevations, and to create a stack effect, encouraging a natural upward air movement, taking away unwanted solar- and equipment-generated heat particularly from the air-conditioning units. This significantly reduces the overall air-conditioning load on the building and thus its energy consumption with significant lifetime cost savings. The estimated annual energy saving from this source of 56 360 kWh translates into a 2.8 million kWh saving over the 50 years anticipated lifetime. Strategically placed horizontal external louvres have been placed on the north and south facades not protected by the glass curtain walls to limit the effects of solar gain from direct sunlight falling on exposed windows. Internal blinds are provided to windows on all facades for solar glare control. Other features to combat solar gain and achieve energy efficiency include powered blinds and automatically orientated solar louvres over roof top spaces. In addition, the building has been designed to accept the future installation of photovoltaic cell panels in the lower spandrel panels of the external glazed screens to generate solar power for the building on an experimental basis.

272 Laboratory Design Guide

Estimated energy savings due to the double-skin facades and the recirculatory fume cupboards can be summarised as follows:

Estimated energy saving by some of the energy-efficient design features Energy saving

Reduction in carbon dioxide (CO2) emission

Contribution by application of recirculatory type fume cupboards By installation of external glazed screen for solar control By locating equipment with heat emission in the external open services zone

825 000 kWh per annum 48 700 kWh per annum 7660 kWh per annum

500.00 tonnes CO2 per annum 32.50 tonnes CO2 per annum 5.10 tonnes CO2 per annum

Total per annum

881360 kWh per annum 44 070 000 kWh

537.60 tonnes CO2 per annum 26 880.00 tonnes CO2

Total over a 50-year life span

Carefully chosen long life materials which require low maintenance, and the use, where possible, of biodegradable products, such as linoleum floor-covering rather than vinyl, underpin the design philosophy to create an environmentally sustainable building. In terms of structure, site subsoil conditions suggested minimising foundation points for economic reasons, whilst laboratory operational requirements demanded a stiff building to facilitate the housing and operation of delicate measuring instruments. This led to the concept of two nine-storey reinforced concrete frame structures (one for each multi-storey set of laboratory suites) each supported on four upturned pyramidal column bases each base in turn supported by a single large diameter bored pile. The two nine-storey reinforced concrete frame structures, linked together at the core by simple reinforced concrete slab and beam structures, utilise waffle slab floor plates to reduce both weight and depth for economy reasons whilst providing the two-way structural rigidity demanded by the building’s operational requirements. Timetable demands led to the adoption of a fast-track programme with demolition, site formation and foundation works all undertaken on site in parallel with the main building design. Furthermore the modular shell/flexible fittings concept, adopted primarily for adaptability and economy during the building’s lifetime, allowed commencement of main building construction prior to finalisation of laboratory layout and furniture design. This lead to a compressed design and construction process of three years and seven months, including fit out, with the ability to adopt layout design changes very late in the construction process.

Case studies 273

To assist buildability in view of the tight programme and constrained site working area, wet trade work was limited to essential concrete, plasterwork and painting with all other elements being standardised as far as possible and manufactured off site. Self-finished precast glass-reinforced concrete panels were utilised for external walls partially to assist buildability and speed of erection and partially to provide dimensional accuracy and control over opening provisions for externally located services. The absence of any damage to the lightweight glazed screens and louvres, or water leakage through the heavily perforated external walls, despite having endured typhoons with average wind speeds over 151km/h (gusting over 200 km/h) and rainfall levels of 276 mm/day, amply demonstrates the building’s ability to withstand severe external environmental conditions. In summary, this new award winning biological research centre for the life sciences represents the metamorphosis of a highly technical and essentially utilitarian building into a dramatic architectural statement whilst, at the same time, setting new standards for the design of laboratory buildings worldwide and establishing itself as the leading example of an environmentally sustainable building in sub-tropical Hong Kong. (See also Plates 41 and 42 in the colour section.)

274 Laboratory Design Guide

Case study 32A Typical floor plan

Case studies 275

276 Laboratory Design Guide

ZOOLOGY AQUARIUM

E&B GREEN HOUSE

RESEARCH (BOTANY & INSTITUTE OF MOLECULAR BIOLOGY)

RESEARCH (ZOOLOGY & BOTANY)

RESEARCH (ZOOLOGY)

RESEARCH (ZOOLOGY)

RESEARCH (ECOLOGY & BIODIVERSITY)

TEACHING (SHARED)/RESEARCH (ECOLOGY & BIODIVERSITY)

TEACHING/(SHARED)

TRANSFORMER ROOM

Case study 32B Cross-section

natural ventilation removes trapped solar heat & A/C equipment heat by stack effect heat emission equipment located outside the building

utilities zone (elect./gas/water) exhaust air duct zone A/C duct zone

AHU

A/C duct exhaust air duct 40% direct solar radiation and heat is reflected by ceramic fritted glazed panel natural sunlight

clear glazing clear glazing with ceramic fritting

AHU

maintenance space

external services zone

internal

Case study 32C Detail of services zone

Case studies 277

278 Laboratory Design Guide RESEARCH (INSTITUTE OF MOLECULAR BIOLOGY)

Case study 32D Longitudinal section

RESEARCH (INSTITUTE OF MOLECULAR BIOLOGY)

RESEARCH (BOTANY & INSTITUTE OF MOLECULAR BIOLOGY)

RESEARCH (BOTANY & INSTITUTE OF MOLECULAR BIOLOGY)

TEACHING/RESEARCH

TEACHING/RESEARCH

TEACHING/RESEARCH

TEACHING/RESEARCH

TEACHING/RESEARCH

TEACHING/RESEARCH

RESEARCH (ECOLOGY & BIODIVERSITY)

RESEARCH (ECOLOGY & BIODIVERSITY)

TEACHING/RESEARCH (ECOLOGY & BIODIVERSITY)

TEACHING/RESEARCH (ECOLOGY & BIODIVERSITY)

TEACHING/RESEARCH

TEACHING/RESEARCH

Case study 33 Institute of Laboratory Medicine St Vincent’s Hospital Campus, Sydney Architects Project architect Laboratory consultant

Bligh Voller Nield (BVN) Ian Goodbury Brian Griffin

Early planning of the St Vincent’s Hospital redevelopment established the SydPath Laboratories on the sixth floor of the eleven storey and 44 000 m2 new hospital building. The elongated plan form of 130 m ⫻ an average 25 m is not ideal for pathology laboratories. Specimen movement beyond the desirable limits necessitated the installation of a robotic specimen transporter. This technology is now well-established as a reliable system and is illustrated in Plate 44. However the desirable relationship between the core laboratories and Central Specimen Reception (CSR) was achieved. The floor plan shows CSR and Blood Bank adjacent to the lifts for easy access by couriers for delivery of specimens and blood. In CSR, specimens are received from couriers but also by pneumatic tube from the hospital floors, as illustrated in Plate 44. Data entry records patient/doctor details before the specimens are processed for testing. A conveyor distributes the specimens to the three Auto Labs or the specimens are distributed to Anatomical Pathology, Immunology and Microbiology by the robotic transporter, see Case study 33B Specimen delivery diagram. During the development of the design brief, the concept of sharing storage facilities and staff amenities was proposed to the users. While SydPath Laboratories had been separated before and staff did not have to share, the advantages in terms of casual meeting, feeling to be part of a community and planning efficiency were acknowledged and became a design brief criteria. The design solution for sharing 3 °C and 35 °C storage is illustrated in Plate 12 and general consumables are stored in a large compactus off the main corridor accessible to all users. All staff share a meeting room at the north end which doubles for tea and lunch breaks and because of travel distance there is a second tea room at the south end. The laboratory furniture is the type illustrated in Plates 14, 15 and 16 with movable benches on either side of the services spine with services bollards supporting movable reagent shelves. The Auto Labs have ceiling-mounted pendants servicing the floor-standing automation. Finally this is an example where the structural column grid was designed to suit the main function of the hospital building and not to suit the desired laboratory bench module. But having said that, the positive advantage of the extra aisle space is not lost in laboratories where large floor-standing equipment can require more space than standard benches.

Case studies 279

280 Laboratory Design Guide PART LABORATORY FLOOR PLAN

Case study 33A Pathology floor plan showing system furniture

Case studies 281

Case study 33A (Continued)

282 Laboratory Design Guide ANATOMICAL PATHOLOGY ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY

Case study 33B Specimen delivery diagram

Case study 34 Life Sciences Building University of Newcastle, NSW Architects Project architects

Laboratory consultant

Suters Architects in association with Stutchbury & Pape Dino DiPaolo Peter Stutchbury Chris Mc Briarty Brian Griffin

Suters Architects and Stutchbury & Pape formed an association in 1997 for the specific purpose of entering an invited design competition for what was then known as the Medical Sciences/Biology Research Building. Stutchbury & Pape are a small design-orientated practice that had been involved previously in a number of projects for the University with Suters. Their work pivots on the implementation of ESD principles. Suters Architects are a larger firm with Newcastle origins, with a strong track record in educational, health, commercial and residential buildings. At the time neither firm had much experience with the specifics of a large research laboratory project. The University elected to conduct an invited, limited competition (only four entrants) as a means of ‘looking outside the square’ to come up with ‘sound, environmentally responsive solutions and considered, innovative, multi-disciplinarian approaches to problem-solving’. The design teams were encouraged to be ‘free to explore the brief requirements and provide the best solution possible without predetermined constraints of height, materials, orientation or footprint’. The brief was to provide a building to be shared by two adjacent faculties – Medical Sciences and Biology. Both faculties were in need of additional space and the research and teaching interests of each were tending to converge with the emergence of the ‘new’ disciplines of biotechnology and medical biochemistry. The sharing of space in a new Link Building would hopefully encourage ‘cross-fertilisation’ between researchers in each area, as well as providing significant economies in the sharing of expensive specialist equipment such as mass spectrometers, flow cytology sorters and scanners, and DNA and protein sequencers. The existing buildings for each faculty were fairly anonymous 1970s structures orientated parallel to each other and separated by a car park/courtyard approximately 25-m wide. The Biology building is two stories high while the Medical Sciences building, located further down the slope of the north facing hill, is six stories. The site is fairly tight, restrained to the east by the rear of the main University Library and to the west by the major site ring road. The competition entry proposed an unexpected solution by siting the new building in the tight gap between the faculty buildings and the Library. This solution effectively created a bridge between the ends of the two buildings, touching the ground at the southern end adjacent to Biology and sailing over the service roads and substation to the rear of the Library to terminate in a dramatic cantilever beyond the Medical Sciences Building. In functional terms the links to the two faculties were simply and directly created with minimal Case studies 283

impact on the existing buildings, while providing a built form that embraced and resolved the disparate scale of the two buildings. The concept sketches, and the finished building, are almost diagrammatic in their disposition of the major functional spaces. It is the strength of the original idea that has allowed the concept to survive the changes of brief, truncation of budget and integration of structure and services in the translation of idea to reality. The exact sizes, layouts and relationships between spaces were subject to considerable review and negotiation during the design development phase. The building is in two sections, a northern block of three stories containing teaching and research laboratories, support facilities, staff offices, tutorial and post-graduate student rooms, and a southern block which devolved during the design process into a specialist 120-seat lecture theatre.The blocks are separated by a new entry courtyard feeding off the major pedestrian routes to the campus centre, Union and Library. The main block is a long thin ‘tube’ of metal clad, pre-cast concrete construction with shared teaching laboratories on the lower level, dedicated Medical Sciences research labs on the mid-level and dedicated Biology research labs on the top floor. Specialist shared equipment spaces are clustered over the top two levels adjacent to the major vertical circulation zone (lift and stairs). The most dramatic element of the building is the fact that the lower level of the structure ends up over 15 m above the road level at the northern extremity, exaggerated by the strutting and cantilevering of the last two structural bays 14 m beyond the last support. In section the building is equally simple, with the typical arrangement reading from west to east as: • • • • •

Offices Circulation/Void Lab Support/Services Laboratory External Services Access.

The extruded building form and the central circulation/void zone are fundamental to the environmental strategies for the building.The University of Newcastle has a strict policy of not providing air conditioning to staff offices and general teaching spaces. The building section evolved from the integration of passive ventilation and natural lighting systems utilising air flow through the offices via acoustic separation elements, and expulsion up through the void to operable roof lights. These systems were computer simulated by environmental consultants, Advanced Environmental Concepts, and are partly user operated and partly automated. The Laboratories are predominantly Physical Containment 2 (PC2) standard, with a small suite of PC3 spaces on the mid-level. All lab spaces were designed to comply with AS 2982.1, AS/NZS 2243.3 and the Genetic Manipulation Advisory Committee (GMAC) ‘Guidelines for Small Scale Genetic Manipulation Work’. There are approximately 20 different purpose-designed teaching and research laboratory spaces, with a further eight shared laboratory support or specialist equipment spaces. Offices for approximately 284 Laboratory Design Guide

40 staff, Meeting Rooms, Tutorial Rooms, Post-Graduate Student Rooms and associated facilities are also provided.The total floor area of the building is approximately 4750 m2. The project was managed by the University’s Physical Planning & Estates (PPE) section (now Facilities Management). The Medical Sciences and Biology faculties were represented initially by a senior academic or department head, and once design development commenced, by the Laboratory Managers for each Faculty. Each individual Laboratory user or user group was also fully involved in the briefing process and the design of their own space – albeit with a power of veto by the faculty or PPE to curb the excesses. After a design development period of approximately two months, documentation of the building for tender commenced in mid-1998.The Builder, Lahey Constructions, moved onto the site in February 1999 with staged completion of the Lecture Theatre occurring in July 2000. The remainder of the building was completed for the commencement of the academic year in 2001. (See also Plates 45 and 46 in the colour section.)

Case studies 285

286 Laboratory Design Guide Case study 34A Research level floor plan showing system furniture

Case studies 287

Case study 34A (Continued)

Case study 35 Hunter Area Pathology Service (HAPS) John Hunter Hospital Campus Newcastle, NSW Architects Laboratory consultant

Rice Daubney Di Carlo Potts Health Brian Griffin

This project represented an interactive, ‘brainstorming approach’ between the client user group and the consulting architect. In this case architects, Rice Daubney Di Carlo Potts Health, worked with the laboratory staff in an interactive manner. From the initial meeting the architects, whilst having substantial experience in laboratory design, clearly stated to the laboratory staff that they were embarking on this project without any preconceived ideas and wanted to hear and understand first hand their input. Laboratory staff were then engaged in a design and briefing process where they were important and active participants. The briefing process continued as proactive as the initial meeting with copious notes and diagrams on the two main issues, the specimen workflow and the space relationship diagram. The laboratory module of 3 m was proposed when the architects explained how the bench depth and aisle widths suited the pathology workplace. Once this module was approved by the staff, the structural grid could be established as a multiple of the module and in this case, 6 m. Modular shapes in cardboard were prepared to form a 1:50 scale kit of parts and these when placed on the grid became planning tools. In 4-hour workshops held separately with each of the six departments the layout evolved from play with the kit of parts. The concept scheme was based on the single corridor model, a street, with secondary circulation through the laboratories. This long rectangular plan was then broken in the centre and bent into the shape of the site, creating a perfect main public atrium space and staff entry at the break (see Plate 47). Reference to the floor plan will now show how the space relationship diagram was developed into the final layout. The Central Specimen Reception (CSR) is located directly over the main entry and stairs from street level to laboratory level. Being on the upper floor level, the central corridor can have a continuous skylight bringing natural daylight directly into the centre of the building and indirectly into the laboratories through the glass partitions shown in Plate 49. Laboratory consumables are accessed and tracked by the staff by computer. Dial in the code for the item needed and the Kardex Vertical Carousel will rotate until the desired container arrives. Plates 50 and 51 illustrate the carousel at the stores level where it is loaded and at the laboratory level where the items are retrieved. 288 Laboratory Design Guide

The Australian Standard, which restricts the floor area of a laboratory depending on the volume of flammable liquids stored, required the total floor area to be divided into compartments with fire rated partitions. A policy of storing only the short-term requirements of flammable liquids within the laboratories was adopted to allow the maximum area of each compartment. The bulk of flammable liquids are stored in an external but reasonably convenient regulation store. Laboratory services are reticulated to outlets on services bollards through the service spine between benches via a modular floor penetration. Plate 9 shows a typical floor penetration with a fire-proof collar. Compliance with the Building Code of Australia (BCA), the Australian Standards and Codes was a priority issue on this project, as the client required the laboratories to achieve best practice.

Case studies 289

290 Laboratory Design Guide LEGEND

Case study 35A Floor plan showing system furniture

Case studies 291

FURNITURE SCHEDULE

Case study 35A (Continued)

Case study 36 Mine Safety Technical Facility NSW Department of Mineral Resources Maitland, NSW Architects Laboratory consultant

Jones Sonter Architects Brian Griffin

The NSW Department of Mineral Resources (DMR) decided to relocate their Mine Safety Laboratory from Sydney to Maitland, closer to the mine operations. Brian Griffin in association with Jones Sonter Architects were the successful tenderers in a limited competition for a Feasibility Study and Functional Brief. This stage was completed after comparing the available sites, selecting the site least affected by flooding, inspecting the existing laboratory operations and taking full briefing instructions to estimate the total floor area based on the linear methodology described in this book for laboratory spaces. The DMR then called for expressions of interest and selected a tender list. We were the successful tenderers for the Design and Documentation stage. The design of the laboratory building is based on the design principles described in this book for a single-storied testing facility. As the laboratory was involved in testing and reporting on safe working environments in the coal mines, and post-accident incidents, the accuracy of their tests would be subject to legal scrutiny. So instrument calibration is of prime consideration and we were interested to see that the laboratory would not accept the purity of some supplies of instrument gases. The two main ‘generic’ laboratory spaces have one external wall, with a peristitial services zone, and have a central support zone accessible from both laboratories. The offices, conference/training rooms and amenities area is separated from the laboratories by a wide corridor accessible by the public to view displays and make enquiries. Samples are received from the same corridor as both staff and public share the Main Entry. Entry to the laboratories by field staff and laboratory supplies is at the opposite end of the laboratory area. The floor plan broken down to its main elements is a typical double corridor scheme with corridors within the open planned laboratories. It is also typical for a testing facility with sample entry and Laboratory Information Management Systems (LIMS) adjacent to the administration at one end and the ‘service’ entry at the other end.

292 Laboratory Design Guide

1

2

4

1500

6

8000

8

8000

A

8000

11

1500

A

Waste management / Cleaners 6000

10

8000

Gas Cylinder Storage

Truck Dock

DMR Garage

Garage for Mobile Labs

Male Gas Mixing

Female / Access

B

B

Balances & Microscopes 6000

Gas Analysis

Gas Monitor Occupational Hygiene

C

Peristitial Services Zone

6000

Peristitial Services Zone

Workshops Breathing Apparatus Material Testing

6000

D

C

Investigation Dust Explosion

Stores

D

Stores Electrical Assessment & Investigation

Wet Chemistry

E

6000

E

Sample Prep. Crushing Noisy Equipment

Samples to be Tested & Despatched

F

F 3600

DMR Publicity Display and Museum

Courtyard

Entry

Foyer

G

G Reception Meeting Room

7000

Staff Dining Conference Room

Training

Male

Technical Manager

Female

H

H Access WC

6000

First Aid

Open planned Staff Offices Reference Library

I

I

7000

1

7000

3

7000

5

7000

7

7000

9

11

Case study 36A Floor plan

Case studies 293

Case study 37 Dow Corning Research Macquarie Technology Park, Sydney Architect Laboratory design consultant

Angela Hayson Brian Griffin

As a tenant of 2000 m2 in a multi-storey building not designed specifically for laboratories, the research facility of 300 m2 had to be contained entirely within the floor, walls and underside of the floor above.This required the services to be designed in the most flexible arrangement which is to be reticulated directly under the floor above as shown in Plates 52 and 53. The exposed services can be readily changed, cleaned and eventually removed when the tenancy is vacated. The windows have a low sill to suit offices so the benches had to be located away from the external wall. Again, this was not seen as a disadvantage as staff found the island benches improved access and circulation between the work bays. The advantages of the Space Lab movable laboratory system furniture are fully appreciated in this installation. And particularly as the whole installation can be picked up and carried to a new location if Dow Corning decide to move. This science and technology laboratory is typical of those who select to locate in a Science Park adjacent to a University. Macquarie University has a close working relationship with tenants in the Park to their mutual advantage of professional interaction. (See also Plates 52 and 53 in the colour section.)

294 Laboratory Design Guide

Case studies 295

Case study 37A Floor plan

Case study 38 National Marine Science Centre Coffs Harbour, NSW Architects Laboratory consultant

James Cubitt Architects Brian Griffin

The concept of the National Marine Science Centre (NMSC) was initiated in 1991 by Professor Rod Simpson of the University of New England (UNE). The concept was based on the special nature of the marine region of the Solitary Islands in the Pacific Ocean where northern and southern marine flora and fauna meet. A submission was made for Federation Funding from the Commonwealth Government in 1998, under the guidance of the Federal member of Parliament for the region Mr Garry Nehl with Southern Cross University (SCU) also joining the proposal. A grant was approved to develop a centre to be jointly run by UNE and SCU at Coffs Harbour. The project included procurement of a suitable site, a centre to house teaching/research facilities, accommodation for visiting academics, project delivery, fit-out and fees for professional services. A suitable site close to the shoreline for seawater intake was a critical factor in the selection process and the existing All Seasons Pacific Bay Resort and Conference Facility was purchased in 2000. The vision of the NMSC Board was to provide a world class facility that would support the teaching/research/science and management of marine and coastal environments. Since occupation there has emerged an overwhelming positive response to the project in terms of functionality and ambience of the work environment by staff and students. The facility is a major conversion, refurbishment and extension of an existing building providing on four levels: workshops, boat storage, diving support, specimen storage and archives, library, aquarium room, experimental tank farm, teaching laboratory, offices and a foyer for public display and education. Writing the brief the University underestimated the number of postgraduate students the new Marine Science Centre would attract. They now realise the postgraduate spaces are inadequate and have furnished extra space. The research programmes have proved to be attractive but they have to admit that the beautiful seaside location adjacent to one of Australia’s best luxury resorts has been a factor. Marine science is currently enjoying popularity not only from the beach loving Australian student but also from the Federal Government which is allocating research funding for marine sciences with new research facilities planned in the future. Australia has a number of marine science research facilities who liase on various projects not only on the mainland coast but also in Antarctica.

296 Laboratory Design Guide

The facility recently acquired a new commercially registered Dive Boat called the R V CIRCE, after the Greek mythology. Eight divers collect, count, observe and photograph in and outside the reef. When the design team was briefed by the SCU staff at Lismore we were shown the archives of material collected by divers over many years. We presumed that the new facilities would also include an archive but this was not to be as the archival material could be retrieved from Lismore as needed.This resource is costly to maintain and staff and would have been unnecessary to duplicate. When we were briefed during a tour of the SCU at Lismore they referred to their use of the virtual experiment. A lecturer showed us how they demonstrated to students by dissecting a starfish, for example, under a video camera which transmitted the image to either a data projector or a series of monitors.The lecturer explained how this method of teaching was better than distributing the starfish to each student because he could concentrate their attention to that part of the fish he wanted to study. So we designed a series of monitors to be suspended from the ceiling in the Practical Laboratory. The Lecture Theatre is also equipped with a data projector for videos produced by the staff or commercial videos. An essential commodity for marine research is of course a supply of filtered seawater to the laboratory benches and raw seawater to holding tanks for research on fish, crabs, anemones and other marine life. The seawater is retrieved in the Bay through a huge 2-m square container of graded gravel to sand which separates the salt water from the other matter including marine life.The water is then piped to a well behind the beach and below tide level. Submersible pumps distribute the water to header tanks above the building. From there the water gravitates either directly to the holding tanks which contain marine life for research or through filters to the laboratories. The gravel and sand filter in the Bay can be backwashed for cleaning and every three months is backwashed with compressed air for a thorough clean.

Case studies 297

298 Laboratory Design Guide

STAIR 3 LIFT 2

3.17B

3.17 3.11

3.10

3.12

3.13

3.14

3.15

3.17A

3.16

3.18

3.06

3.05

3.04

3.08

3.19

3.02A 3.02A

3.03

3.02 3.07

LIFT 1

3.22

3.21

3.20

3.23

3.24

3.25

3.29

3.26

3.01 3.34

3.36 3.35

3.37

3.30 3.33

3.31

3.38

3.41

3.40

3.28

STAIR 6 3.32 3.39

Case study 38A Research level floor plan

3.27

STAIR 3

2.07

2.09

2.10

2.11

2.12

2.13

2.14

2.15

LIFT 2

2.16

2.08

2.17 STAIR 4 VOID

2.17A

2.06

2.19

2.22

2.05

2.04

2.21

2.23

2.18

2.20

2.03

2.24

2.25

EXISTING TERRACE 2.02

LIFT 1

2.01 2.31

2.33

2.32

2.29 2.28

2.35 2.30 2.34

2.31A 2.39 2.38

Case studies 299

Case study 38B Teaching level floor plan

2.36

2.26 2.27

2.18A

Case study 39 CSIRO Energy Centre Steel River, Newcastle, NSW Architects The Cox Architects and Planners Laboratory consultant Jeff Freeman The CSIRO Energy Centre provides state of the art scientific research facilities for CSIRO’s Division of Energy Technology at Steel River, a 5-hectare Eco-industrial Park site in Newcastle, NSW. The Centre is being developed in stages. Stage 1, now complete, comprises buildings totalling approximately 9800 m2 total floor area, accommodating Laboratories, Process Bays and Office/Support Facilities. A site masterplan provides for future expansion of the Centre by the addition of further process bays, office and laboratory wings. The masterplan was developed from detailed analysis of various options for development of the site. In each option consideration was given to building orientation and image, views to and from the site, quality of internal working environment, relationship between office/laboratory elements and process bays, staff interaction, circulation, functionality, site access and egress, and suitability for incorporation of energy conservation and energy generation initiatives. Key criteria in the design of the Centre included: • Provision of energy-efficient buildings with flexibility and adaptability for changing scientific research needs over the life of the buildings; • Generation of energy on site from integrated renewable systems and other sources; and • Ability to match as closely as possible, the base building’s energy demand and the sitegenerated energy.

Sustainable design initiatives Energy optimisation The unique Energy Centre development incorporates and demonstrates leading edge, commercially practical examples of sustainable design initiatives appropriate for modern buildings, particularly highly serviced laboratory/scientific research facilities, which are notorious for their high energy demands. The sustainable design initiatives being employed can be categorised in the areas of: • • • • •

Building energy demand reduction Energy conservation Energy generation Energy management, and Ecologically sustainable development.

300 Laboratory Design Guide

Building energy demand reduction Energy demand patterns were identified early in the design process for each type of space (laboratories, offices, process bays, etc.) in the Centre. Base case designs were then determined for the building and process loads so that they could be compared with proposed designs, which included varying energy conservation initiatives. Various studies were undertaken for possible energy demand reduction initiatives that included consideration of: • • • • •

• • •

The most effective building positioning in relation to site topography; Maximisation of natural climate opportunities; Building siting to maximise use of natural light, including use of light shelves; Computer simulation of varying light conditions for daily and seasonal conditions, as part of the lighting and lighting controls design process; Individual staff condition perceptions and requirements.The data resulting from a detailed staff survey was used to develop a sophisticated, tailored system of internal climate conditions; Flexible use of base building services by individual users to achieve desired conditions (openable windows, low velocity air via an underfloor plenum); Passive solar heating of thermal mass elements, especially in industrial function areas; and Optimisation of the building services design.

While a key project goal was to achieve the most energy-efficient building of its type in Australia, it was essential that it be balanced with appropriate functionality.

Energy conservation Conservation initiatives incorporated in the project include a wide range of both passive and active measures. Active measures include: • Underfloor air-conditioning system – features a low velocity plenum and consequent energy reduction (plus ability to accommodate services); • Variable speed pumps and fans – to match system load fluctuations closely and minimise power requirements; • Separate air handling plant for laboratory modules – provides for independent control and out-of-hours operation; • Provision of economy cycles on all air handling plants; • Outside air economy cycle – to make full use of free cooling of outside air when appropriate; • Variable volume air handling technology to allow reduction in supply of air to designated areas where appropriate; • Choice of energy-efficient chiller design e.g. multiple step controls to match building load profiles i.e. as load decreases compressors are switched off to save energy; • Low velocity air conditioning and mechanical ventilation duct systems in laboratories – saving fan power and minimising energy consumption; • Dedicated automatic lighting control system – time clock control, passive infra-red detectors, photo-electric controls; Case studies 301

• High performance fluorescent light tubing with low loss electronic ballasts; • Power factor correction to transformer supplies – to improve building power factor and reduce energy usage and cost; • Water saving devices on hydraulic fittings and fixtures – to minimise water consumption; and • Building Management System to operate, control and monitor energy consumption for automatic control of mechanical services, to provide efficient systems operation, alarm monitoring and implementation of energy management programs. Passive measures, which are considered in the context of initiatives to reduce the impact of the building envelope include: • Building orientation – maximum north/south exposure to maximise opportunity for solar control in summer and passive solar energy in winter; • Elongated building envelope; • Optimum building layout – maximisation of daylighting and minimisation of artificial lighting; • Sunscreening to northern facade to control summer sun penetration and solar heat gains; • Use of light shelves on north walls – to promote effective natural daylighting; • Openable windows – to create opportunity for natural ventilation to office areas; • Insulation of building fabric – to reduce heating and cooling loads; • Window fenestration (Low E glass); • Louvered windows to process bays; • Minimal east and west facing windows; • Thermal mass for heat retention and cold reduction; and • Minimisation of infiltration.

Energy generation The Energy Centre incorporates an energy generation suite developed for both efficiency and showcasing of available technologies. An ‘Energy Task Force’ was instituted early in the design process to develop, analyse, evaluate, cost and recommend energy sourcing alternatives. Key evaluation criteria of energy sourcing initiatives included: • • • • • • •

Ability to minimise carbon emissions; Buildability – ability to integrate the technology into the buildings and the site; Spread of technology; Deliverability – industry capability to obtain support from the energy industry; Commercialisation opportunity; Ability to accept future new technologies; Image of CSIRO – positive public perception of the initiative.

The options evaluation process considered a number of combined source options, all capable of delivering a power capacity of up to 500 kW, estimated to be the average base building demand, excluding process loads. 302 Laboratory Design Guide

Energy generation initiatives The selected energy generation suite comprises: • • • •

Wind turbines – three of 20 kW capacity; Building integrated photovoltaic cell arrays – output approximately 90 kW; Gas fired micro-turbines – capable of generating up to 120 kW of electricity; and Future Fuel cells – fired by natural gas and water conversion to hydrogen, providing 100 kW total output.

A CSIRO developed battery energy storage system capable of storing a maximum power level of 500 kW of site-generated electricity, will be incorporated in the future to provide load levelling capability and an uninterruptible power supply backup.

Energy management Energy management at the Energy Centre is structured at two levels and utilise two separate control mechanisms. The management of energy generation is provided by a dedicated System Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) facility, which reports on energy quality, quantity and its distribution. All plant elements are linked to a central computer system which enables selective public display of energy generation initiatives. The buildings are grid-connected such that in periods of high demand, electricity is imported from the grid to supplement site-generated energy. However in periods of low demand site-generated energy will be exported to the grid. Management of energy efficiency/conservation initiatives is provided by the Building Management System, which monitors and/or controls all building engineering services throughout the complex.The system covers plant and equipment, air flows, filter performance, fume and other exhaust systems, heating and chilled water, steam, vacuum and gases reticulation, constant temperature rooms and artificial lighting.The system is programmable with graphics interfaces for full zone control, and incorporates facilities for external monitoring capable of expansion. Energy audits will also be available from this system to monitor the energy performance of the Centre.

Ecologically sustainable design initiatives From a purely building perspective, ESD is the overriding consideration in the development of the Energy Centre. It incorporates all of the development of the Energy Centre. It incorporates all of the elements outlined and requires that all such elements form an integral part of the design and not appear to be ‘add-ons’.The ESD initiatives can be summarised as below.

Building energy demand reduction A responsible and well-structured approach to the consideration of energy demand reduction in the Centre’s development process, has demonstrated that significant results can be achieved. Case studies 303

Building energy supply While the Energy Centre’s energy needs could be supplied by connection to the state-wide electricity and gas grids, emerging energy-efficient and renewable technologies have been incorporated into the building’s design to the maximum reasonable extent. This approach reflects a corporate recognition and acceptance by CSIRO that the long-term view must be taken as part of both a national and international responsibility. Accordingly, the CSIRO Energy Centre is both a demonstration of these technologies to a wider audience as well as an ongoing platform for further development as part of the energy research programmes of the division.

Building energy storage Provision has been made for the future storage of between 500 kWh and 1000 kWh of power.This will provide for the most cost-effective controlled use of power that is generated in off-peak times and/or in excess of demand. This facility will enable the demonstration of the interaction between energy supply and energy storage systems.

Environmental initiatives The environmental initiatives incorporated in the Centre cover all aspects of the energy design, building design and systems development process.They include for example, passive design considerations, active building service elements and comfort conditions awareness. These considerations translate into building inclusions such as: • Rainwater collection and retention tank storage with a pumping system to provide water for irrigation; • Air quality monitoring and control sensors particularly for carbon dioxide; • Maximum use of natural light; • Specialised acoustic treatment to all occupied areas; • Heat recovery from site energy generation to provide for heating and some domestic water requirements; • Natural ventilation to office areas; • Waste treatment systems; • Water saving devices on hydraulic fittings and fixtures; and • Sustainable use of site indigenous native vegetation.

Energy saving outcomes The building energy conservation measures and controlled demand reduction initiatives have resulted in a base building energy demand load estimated from independent Energy Simulation studies to be less than 60% of the energy demand for a comparable modern, conventional building to service similar functions. It is predicted that the greenhouse gas emissions savings from the project will be up to 2000 tonnes of carbon dioxide per year compared with a similar modern research facility. 304 Laboratory Design Guide

Conclusion The achievement of the expected energy saving outcomes in practice has established the Energy Centre as a tangible and unique expression of commercially practical examples of building energy demand reduction and environmentally conscious, realistic energy supply options. The level of performance of the Centre will be a valuable national example of the possibilities that sensible and responsible building design can produce. It is clear and unarguable through the development of the Centre that buildings and energy systems design can contribute to Australia’s greenhouse and ESD commitments and obligations. (See also Plates 54, 55 and 56 in the colour section.)

Case studies 305

306 Laboratory Design Guide Case study 39A Upper level floor plan

MONITOR ROOF LOUVRES FOR VENTILATION OF ROOF SPACE

BUILDING INTEGRATED PHOTO VOLTAIC PANELS FAN ROOM GLAZED LINK BRIDGES WITH OPERABLE LOUVRES CONTROLLED BY BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

BUILDING INTEGRATED PHOTO VOLTAIC PANELS

FIXED SUN SHADES

OPERABLE WINDOWS TO UPPER AND LOWER SASHES

DAYLIGHT AND OCCUPANCY LIGHT SENSORS

LABORATORY

CORRIDOR

LABORATORY

LABORATORY

CORRIDOR

LABORATORY

OFFICE

SUN HOOD INTERNAL LIGHT SHELF EXTERNAL LIGHT SHELF RAISED ACCESS FLOOR WITH LOW VELOCITY AIR CONDITIONING AND PERSONALISED AIR CONTROL GROMMITS

OFFICE

CORRIDOR

OFFICE

LOW HEIGHT WALLS FOR NATURAL VENTILATION FLOW THROUGH

OPERABLE WINDOWS COURTYARD

VERTICAL SUN SHADE

Case studies 307

Case study 39B Section

OFFICE

CORRIDOR

OFFICE

UNDER SLAB NATURAL AIR PLENUM AND HEAT SINK

Case study 40 Boehringer Biological Research Institute Biberach, Germany Architects

Sauerbruch Hutton

At Boehringer’s research campus in Biberach, Germany the company wanted a ‘functional building’ but one that had enough identity to lift the design quality of the campus, a featureless and rather peculiar place where buildings are simply known by a letter and a number. Building 89 is a pharmacological research building where scientists working on genomics and the central nervous system beaver away in offices and labs.The long seven-storey structure makes the best use of a predetermined site, as well as linking to an existing adjacent building on all floors. A generous timber-lined entrance hall doubles up as a lecture theatre. It also incorporates a staff café area for smokers on the east, giving an impression of openness and sociability that belies the behind-closed-doors atmosphere of the labs and offices above. The architect decided to separate the highly serviced labs from the offices (interestingly, Sauerbruch Hutton’s was the only competition entry that suggested this) so that the lab zone runs along the east side and the offices are on the west. This arrangement gives the client maximum flexibility and means the offices can be ventilated by opening the window, while the labs are serviced by a high level of mechanical ventilation (although windows in the labs can also be opened). Next to the labs, a ‘dark zone’ contains experimentation rooms and ancillary facilities such as cell culture and refrigeration. A spine of M&E space runs parallel to the dark rooms. Between the lab and office areas, a generous atrium lets in daylight and provides a neutral space between the two halves of the building. One central staircase connects all seven floors and, if you look up to the sky, it is perfectly framed through one of the rooflights that bring natural light deep into the building. Materials range from timber in the foyer to exposed concrete walls in the atrium (which staff have proposed using as a climbing wall).There is the odd splash of colour – an orange floor and duck egg-blue walls – but the real excitement is saved for the exterior. Screen-printed glass louvers form a continuous skin around the volume, creating a 60-cm buffer zone between it and the building fabric. Metal grille walkways between the two facades are used for maintenance and cleaning access, as well as offering a secondary escape route to the fire stairs. The colours – pink, green and ochre – are based on a microscopically enlarged crystalline structure of one of the company’s many products – although the architect had originally proposed a different colour scheme, which was rejected as being ‘too pop’. As a purely functional device, the skin hides the irregular fenestration caused by the different lab and office sizes, as well as providing better protection against heat, cold and moisture.

308 Laboratory Design Guide

Each of the building’s facades is individually controlled and the louvers are able to track the sun. When the glass louvers are shut tight, the effect is definitely strange and the building appears flat, almost as if it had been towed into place like a vast circus trailer to cheer people up. But it’s also rather beautiful, especially when some of the louvers are open and you can make out the structure behind. This gives the building a legibility that is almost deliberately removed when the louvers are closed. It is dressing up not simply as protection from the elements, but to strike a pose and cut a dash – a blast of colour in a sea of grungy greys and dirty whites. It’s just a shame that so few people will get to see it as public access to the research campus is limited for security reasons. From a climatic point of view, the main task in this building was not heating but cooling the ambient air. Passive means are employed in the office zones, so an intelligent building skin has to regulate the external climatic influences. The offices are naturally ventilated via the opening windows. During summer nights, once the cool night air has entered the building – in both the exposed concrete soffits in the offices and the large areas of the wall surface in the atrium. During the day this stored ‘coolth’ is radiated out into the offices and atrium zones. On winter nights however, the exterior façade is closed (including the horizontal surfaces at the top and bottom of the façade).This creates a buffer zone that reduces the heat-energy needs of the building. The outer glass layer reduces the speed of the wind on the inner façade and causes a reduction in the temperature difference between the external environment and the façade – reducing the overall heat loss of the building. The screen-printed louvers offer optimal light conditions inside. The high light transmission factor reduces the period when artificial light is required. Even with the louvers in the closed position, the façade offers a high degree of transparency. As published in RIBA Journal. Author: Amanda Baillieu. (See also Plates 57, 58 and 59 in the colour section.)

Case studies 309

310 Laboratory Design Guide 0

Case study 40A Floor plan showing corridor atrium

10

20m

0

20m

Case study 40B Section showing corridor atrium

Case studies 311

187.5

1

39 26 13

2 14

6.5

3

55.5 2

2

55.5

4

5

187.5

185.5

375 336 336

185.5

245.5

249.1 254

7

72

2 91

2

90.8

7 8 9

87 95

11

92

10

312 Laboratory Design Guide

76

428 5

10

84 107

85

39

8 25

10 2

32

39 13 26

13

25

Case study 40C Sectional detail of facade

187.5

12

OKFF

Case study 41 James H Clark Center Stanford University California, USA Principal architects Design architects Laboratory design

MBT Architecture Foster & Partners MBT Architecture

The James H Clark Center is a remarkable new 22 760 m2 multi-disciplinary teaching and research facility centrally located on the Stanford University campus. It was completed in October 2003. Forty-five research groups from biology, engineering, physics, chemistry, mathematics and medicine work collaboratively in a unique environment.The facility itself is a grand experiment in the way interdisciplinary collaborative research can be done. The research programmes are in a state of constant flux – a dynamic working process that is central to the buildings special planning. The lab interiors are a dramatic departure from tradition.The building has been turned inside out, with enclosed lab support spaces massed on the exterior of the building and open labs located on the interior. Interior corridors are replaced by exterior balconies, enabling large, open, completely flexible lab layouts. All lab benches and work stations are on wheels and can be moved to allow teams to group and regroup at short notice as research needs change. Workstations and equipment plug into an overhead unistrut system with exposed services and flexible connections. The three-storey building takes the form of three wings of laboratories centered on an open courtyard overlooked by balconies. The H8 occupancy east and west wings accommodate wet bench research, and the B occupancy south wing contains computational spaces, classrooms, a coffee café and a restaurant to encourage campus wide interaction. A partial basement houses extremely vibration sensitive laboratories for lasers and imaging equipment as well as other specialised core facilities. The east and west wings have large open labs to support the important goal of interaction within the laboratory setting. The building’s transparent walls afford exciting views of the diverse scientific activity within. (See also Colour Plate 60.)

Planning In order to provide a building that will support varied research cultures, sometimes side by side, their common needs must be addressed in the building infrastructure.The infrastructure must allow variation in mixing among the users. In particular, the building must enable a level of adaptability within the building in terms of wet research and dry research. The need for adaptability generated a conceptual building section that allows for different technical requirements and the different working methods to be met within the same floorplate.

Case studies 313

An analysis of the various research activities resulted in a common floor to ceiling height (about 3 to 3.6 m) which could accommodate all of the planned and future functions for the laboratory spaces. Within this vertical dimension the floorplate itself could be column free allowing space which could suit a variety of needs and be adaptable in the future. The provision of services to multiple functions on the floorplate with a variety of layouts necessitated that the services come from above. This strategy allows adaptability in bench arrangements without conflicts with utilities located in the floor.This provides for a liquid tight floor plane without any penetrations allowing it to be used in the future as a wet lab in any location. A system of accessible utilities at the ceiling was developed as part of this strategy. The different functions within the laboratory including wet area, dry area, laboratory support functions, offices and conference rooms determined planning guidelines within the floorplate that would allow a certain level of adaptability. This floorplate configuration is zoned roughly into different functions.There are four general zones according to use: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Fixed building core zone Enclosed laboratory support zone Open wet lab zone Open dry lab zone.

The fixed building core zone is located at the outer edges of the building and includes the elements of the building core such as elevators, toilets, stairs and duct shafts. This zone is located at the outside of the building so that they do not interfere with the openness and adaptability of the interior spaces. This zone may be accessed from the exterior circulation system avoiding unnecessary disruptions to the lab spaces. The enclosed laboratory support zone includes spaces that require enclosure for reasons including noise control, temperature control, light control, cleanliness and security. The rest of the floorplate is open space that can be arranged to the investigators’ needs. An open wet laboratory zone is clustered around the sinks, located adjacent to the enclosed laboratory support zone. This configuration stems from the need to have wet functions adjacent to the specialised research spaces. The open dry laboratory zone occupies the space away form the enclosed functions. This zone becomes an area for workstations and meeting tables.This area is open to the open wet laboratory zone and essentially interchangeable with it, with the exception of access to sinks. The nature of this area suggests a separation of workspaces without applying rigid boundaries. The concept for the four zones developed out of test work sessions with faculty researchers. A series of test layouts suggested that an appropriate level of adaptability would attempt to loosely group certain functions for efficiency. The four zones were the outcome of these exercises. There was a natural desire to gather wet lab functions near the laboratory support spaces, and locating desk spaces near views outside. While these zones suggest an efficient use of space, they are not a fixed solution. In general, most functions can be mixed in other locations as well. Each zone has the ability to expand or contract in reaction to the science being performed. Access to the utilities infrastructure can be made from all locations.This will facilitate the ability to change over time within the 314 Laboratory Design Guide

building. As investigators and their research change, the laboratory can be adapted without major construction. So the east and west wings have large open labs of up to the regulatory limit of 930 m2 located adjacent to the courtyard, and enclosed lab support and building core spaces arranged along the exterior of the building. The open lab becomes more utility intensive from the window towards the lab support zone. Sinks with their vents and drains are typically located nearer the ghost corridor adjacent to the support zone. Fume hood alcoves, escape doors, safety walls with organised emergency showers, eyewashes, fire extinguishers and other equipment are located along the edge of the lab support zone. The 9.6-m deep lab support zone allows for a variety of room sizes to support individual researcher needs. Cold rooms, warm rooms, media prep, tissue culture, microscopy, darkrooms, secure stock rooms and noisy equipment rooms are located in this zone. In the first assignment of space within the wet lab wings, the ratio of lab support to lab space turned out to be 0.33.

Structure The structural concept for the building supports the vision for the building to be open to encourage interaction.The structure supports the notion of an open floorplate adjacent to a zone of enclosed rooms. Lateral (seismic) resistance for the building is a dual system comprised of special moment resisting frames working in concert with eccentric braced frames. The moment frames are placed along the courtyard facades and the braced frames in the bays near the exterior of the building allowing an open floorplate with bracing diagonals within walls.The floor to floor dimension is 4.88 m. The floor and roof gravity framing for the building take the form of square and rectangular bays framed to modulate with a 3.2-m laboratory module. In general the structural bays are 9.6 ⫻ 9.6 m. The castellated or cellular steel beams are 1-m deep and allow the mechanical ducts to pass through the webs of the beams and girders thus saving overall system depth. The floor slab of 115-mm concrete on 76-mm metal deck provides a 2-hour fire rating and helps to minimise vibration. The basement and spread foundations are designed to minimise the impact of vibration from within the building and from the site.The system of concrete foundations and isolated slabs allows vibration sensitive research to occur in the basement relatively insulated from induced adjacent vibrations. Vibrations from footfall on the cantilevered external balconies are dampened by steel hanger elements. The suspended slabs are designed to achieve a maximum vibration amplitude level of 1800 micro-inches/second. Lower vibration amplitude levels are achieved in the slab on grade locations, and lower still in the basement.

Mechanical The mechanical strategy for the building incorporates adaptability and openness in the floorplate while also minimising energy use. It reflects the zoning in the floorplan and is designed to accommodate changes in the future. Case studies 315

Air handling units are located on the roof with two units per wing to allow for redundancy and standby capacity.The Stanford Campus central energy center provides chilled water and steam to the mechanical equipment in the basement. Two secondary chilled water pumps circulate the water within the building and to the air handlers on the roof. Water-cooled air compressors, vacuum pumps, and the process-cooling water heat exchanger are located in the basement mechanical room. Each system is designed to allow for redundancy and energy efficiency. The ceilings in the open lab consist of a 1.6 ⫻ 1.6-m grid of unistrut welded directly to the bottom of the beam flanges. The unistrut grid is infilled with perforated metal panels that support acoustically absorbent batt insulation. 12⬙ wide fluorescent light fixtures with parabolic louvers are arranged in parallel strips between sections of the nearly 3.6-m high unistrut ceiling. While the air system is routed through the cellular beams above the ceiling, the piped services in the open laboratories are carried below the ceiling on open trapezes suspended from the unistrut ceiling grid for accessibility. Services run on a main spine through the laboratory with perpendicular branch lines every 6.4 m on center. Quick connect/disconnect fittings occur along these branch lines and then flexible hoses drop the services to moveable benches below. J-hooks attached to the unistrut grid support the services to virtually any location on the floorplate. Services that are centralised in the building are clean dry compressed air, process vacuum, industrial hot and cold water, de-ionised water, domestic hot and cold water, lab waste, natural gas and process cooling. Other specialty gases like CO2 and N2 are distributed from local cylinder closets to points of use on the floorplate.

Moveable casework A unique casework system was developed to ensure the adaptability of the laboratory spaces. It consists of a kit of parts, all on wheels, that can be combined in a variety of ways to suit researcher’s changing needs.The kit includes: The docking station – a 1.8-m long, 2.1-m high, L or inverted T frame that supports adjustable shelves.The docking station can support an electrical plug mold and an extruded aluminium gas manifold that will accommodate screw in valves anywhere along its length.The manifold is attached to the overhead utilities via flexible hoses and quick connect/disconnect fittings. The bench – a 1.8-m long by 9-m wide epoxy topped table with adjustable height legs. The bench legs can nest inside the docking station support and be attached to it with a special locking mechanism. Storage unit – A box of drawers and cabinets that can slide anywhere adjacent to or beneath the bench. Knee spaces can be relocated by easily moving the storage unit. The casework is independent of the utility infrastructure and can be located anywhere in the open lab or in the enclosed lab support areas. (See Colour Plate 61.)

316 Laboratory Design Guide

Case studies 317

Case study 41A Ground floor plan

318 Laboratory Design Guide Open Labs

Open Labs

Fune Hood Alcove

Tissue Culture

Special Projects

Sink Cold Room

Cell Culture Room Animal Surgery

Equipment Room Microscopy

Dark Room Media Preparation

Wet Lab

Brainstroming

cord struckmann

Laser Labs

Case study 41B Cross-section showing courtyard and laboratory wings

Case study 42 Institute of Health and Biomedical Innovation Queensland University of Technology (QUT) Brisbane, Queensland Architects Laboratory consultant

PDT Architects and Donovan Hill Brian Griffin

The Institute of Health and Biomedical Innovation (IHBI) is a new research laboratory for the Queensland University of Technology (QUT) in Brisbane Australia.

General IHBI is sited in the Kelvin Grove Urban Village, as part of a new master-planned extension of the existing city fringe campus. The Urban Village integrates University and community activities in a dense urban environment. IHBI integrates existing university disciplines of Health, Biomedical Science and Biomedical Device Engineering in one research facility.This initiative brings together researchers working across a range of fields in a collaborative environment to maximise potential outcomes. IHBI will undertake nationally an internationally relevant programme of research. The research is organised under five domains of activity: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Diagnostics and Medical devices Injury prevention and Rehabilitation Health development Tissues bio-regeneration Vision improvement.

In addition IHBI will contain an incubation facility for the transfer of research knowledge between IHBI, the public and corporate sector.

Strategy The IHBI Domains are organised as a ‘learning community’ where collaboration in a dynamic environment is valued through the continuing life of the building, Domains are to work seamlessly together on project based activity as well as build the core strength of the Domains. Therefore the building is designed to enable three strategic objectives, as a constantly transforming place, a place of interactions and a place with atmosphere. The building design enables transformation for flexibility of services, people, organisation and projects.The building design includes collective and collaborative spaces to encourage interaction. It also enables a Case studies 319

place with genuine character and atmosphere that can resonate with both the occupants and the public to create a sense of involvement, energy, comfort, community and belonging.

Organisation The project site is a large parcel of land, unorthodox in shape with a difficult sloping terrain. The building plan maximises the usable site by bounding major street frontages and touches the neighbouring site boundaries.This provides a large footprint of approximately 60 ⫻ 50 m. The large footprint reduces building height to maximise connection and collaboration between floors. An internal courtyard has been included to provide natural light, ventilation and prospect to the interior planning. The internal courtyard therefore becomes the key community/collaborative space within the building, around which, meeting, gathering and circulation are organised. The courtyard is conceived as a four-storey height internal room intended for full use at all times of the year. The base of the courtyard contains the main entry to the street and major public gathering spaces for conference rooms, waiting, lounging, coffee and staff dining. Landscape and natural light contribute to the courtyard character and environment. The typical floors adjacent to the courtyard are open/unglazed to enable contiguous activities between levels to become part of the courtyard activity. The laboratories on each floor are planned in an efficient, linear, peninsular bench format. All services are external to the laboratories through the perimeter service zone to enable changes to laboratory fitout without interference to neighbouring research.The services are shielded from street view and the laboratories are shaded from sun penetration by a perforated sunscreen. Outlook from the laboratories is through the perforated sunscreen. The typical office area on each floor is open planned with 80% of occupants housed in workstations and 20% of occupants housed in offices.The open planned office environment provides the ability to organise projects in a team environment with opportunity for serendipitous contact, and flexibility to reorganise space and teams. Write-up desks are external for the laboratories in the open plan office environment. Scientists and technicians are to integrate within the office community for desk based tasks. Hot desks are provided in the open plan for shared casual/intermittent use by visiting or temporary staff. Glazing between the open plan office and laboratories provide visual connection between the two work environments. There are four typical laboratory floors above ground, two car park basement levels and a loading bay level semi-submerged below the sloping contours of the site.

Environmental approach IHBI incorporates an environmentally sensitive design approach. Chilled beam air conditioning is used throughout the office and laboratories to improve indoor air quality and reduce 320 Laboratory Design Guide

energy usage. Further benefits of chilled beam technology include the reduction of 1.2 m in building height due to less space required in the service zone and will lead to reduction in recurrent expenditure and maintenance.The courtyard has been designed to combine natural ventilation with conditioned air and maximise use of natural light to minimise energy usage and improve user amenity. Use of recirculatory fume cupboards are maximised to reduce external emissions. Recirculatory fume cupboards have also been incorporated to improve future fitout flexibility and reduce built-in services provisions. Roof water storage tanks are used as water saving devices for toilet flushing and landscape irrigation. All building facades incorporate sun-shading or are thermally insulated to reduce thermal loads on the internal conditioned environment. The building is programmed for completion at the end of 2005.

Case studies 321

322 Laboratory Design Guide Case study 42A Typical laboratory floor plan, Level 6

Case study 42B Detail plan of peristitial space

Case studies 323

Case study 42C Detail section of peristitial space

324 Laboratory Design Guide

Case study 42D Computer generated view of louvered screen

Case studies 325

Case study 43 30 The Bond, Bovis Lend Lease Head Office Sydney, Australia Concept designer Concept architect

Lend Lease Design Dominic Snellgrove

Incorporating efficiency into the design The building design, which features 100-m-long floorplates, an eight-storey atrium and a glass facade with sunrooms and operable louvers, will produce 30% less greenhouse gas emissions than a typical office building. With a predominantly west-facing facade, it was important to minimise the impact of afternoon sun and reduce air-conditioning loads.The solution was an external operable shading system on the building’s north, west and southern facades. It operates progressively on a time clock during the day as the sun moves west.The blinds can be individually adjusted by the tenants. The facade features naturally ventilated sunrooms and external terraces. Sydney’s climate will allow the sunrooms to operate for up to 50–60% of the year with natural ventilation, which contributes to the overall reduction in energy use and greenhouse emissions. The building’s atrium acts as a buffer zone and provides partial cooling and light access on its eastern side. Jutting out into the atrium space are ‘pods’, which can be used as meeting rooms or ‘greenrooms’ for other shared activities. One of the benefits of using fresh air is that the air is not re-circulated from floor to floor. There is also a ‘green’ rooftop garden, which not only captures water for irrigation and offers residential neighbours above a pleasant view but adds to the local amenity as neighbours will be encouraged to share the garden space. Michael Wheatley, Senior Project Manager at Bovis Lend Lease said that, ‘implementing environmentally efficient management for a commercial building has a positive impact on the asset as a whole. The most significant impact is in lowering the building’s running costs, and how attractive the building is to tenants seeking energy efficient accommodation’.

Innovative technology The use of chilled beams is a first in a large-scale commercial building in Australia. According to Paul Edwards, Senior Project Engineer at Bovis Lend Lease, most office buildings use a variable-air-volume (VAV) system but chilled beams were an appropriate solution for this building.

326 Laboratory Design Guide

‘When we looked at incorporating chilled beams we had to consider the heat load on the facade.The challenge was to reduce our perimeter loads so we could achieve cooling with the beams’, he said. Chilled beams operate by pumping chilled water through cooling elements in the ceiling. People, computers and office equipment heat air that rises to the ceiling. This air is then cooled by the chilled beams and falls, creating a natural convection process of hot air rising and cold air falling. Additional radiant cooling from the chilled beams supports the convection process. In addition to the chilled beams, fresh air is continually provided to the workplace and exhausted from the building without being re-circulated.This significantly increases the quality of air within the office space and reduces the risk of sick building syndrome. The implementation of chilled beam technology enables the overall reduction of the building’s height by up to one metre below the established maximum building envelope, as large-scale, rooftop heating and cooling equipment is not needed. This improves views and access to light for neighbouring apartments as well as making the rooftop garden possible.

What about the costs? Michael Wheatley believes the increased capital costs will be offset by lower operating costs. ‘The chilled beams improve the energy efficiency of the building, reduce tenant costs and also have an impact on maintenance as there are no moving parts in the system. Plus, the improvements in indoor environment quality is expected to improve people’s productivity, which adds dollars to an organisation’s bottom line.’

Lessons learned? ‘Importantly, the project shows that you can achieve environmental aspirations within strict commercial parameters. There was a perception that it couldn’t be done within the commercial parameters of the project. We’ve shown you can incorporate Ecologically Sustainable Development principles without compromising commercial objectives. Having said that, these solutions don’t necessarily suit all projects. What we’ve done is not just a “bolt on”; it is integral to the whole building.’ A commitment from all parties was fundamental to the success of the project. When completed in early 2004, the project will be a powerful benchmark for future developments in Australia and internationally, setting new standards in environmental sustainability and workplace design. (See also Plates 62, 63 and 64 in the colour section.)

Case studies 327

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Appendix A Notes on laboratory construction

Floors should be: 1. Level with no falls to floor wastes. 2. Stable and isolated from structure-borne vibrations. 3. Reinforced concrete preferably suspended with clearance for access to laboratory services under. 4. Not containing piped laboratory services. 5. Finished with a prefinished non off-gassing welded sheet vinyl turned up minimum 100 mm at walls and partitions. Strong dark colours should be avoided slip-resistant but not abrasive. 6. Floor grates at doors to avoid flooding Walls and partitions should be: 1. Fire-resistant plaster board with washable low VOC (volatile organic compounds) emissions acrylic paint, semi gloss, off-white or light colour. 2. Continuous without interruption, such as columns and piers. 3. Not forming front of duct containing piped laboratory services. 4. Well insulated to avoid heat transfer inside. 5. Minimum 2700-mm high and higher if air-conditioning ducts are exposed. Windows should be: 1. With sill at 1300 mm to allow power outlets to be installed below sill and 300 mm above bench height. 2. Tinted to reduce glare. 3. Fitted with external fixed louvres to prevent any penetration of direct sunlight. 4. Operable to allow natural ventilation in case of air-conditioning plant failure. 5. Lockable for security. 6. Seals to be air-tight. 330 Appendix A

Doors should be: 1. One and a half leaf doors for large equipment access, total 1500-mm wide (see Plate 10). 2. Hinged to open in direction of egress, except in individual offices, and not projecting into required corridor width. 3. Fitted with viewing window, complying with fire rating. Ceilings should be: 1. Continuous and not T-bar and acoustic panel construction. 2. Smooth finish with washable paint, matt white, non off-gassing. 3. Fitted with suspended low-brightness reflector-type fluorescent luminaires with at least two tubes (also called ‘dark lites’) and not lenticular diffusers. 4. Fitted with dust-proof access panels, if required. 5. Well insulated to avoid heat transfer inside. 6. Preferably the underside of the structural floor slab with a smooth finish. Laboratory furniture should be: 1. Movable modular benches or continuous benches on a metal supporting frame, finished with a repairable waterproof, continuous sheet such as ‘solid surface’. If bench is longer than sheet size jointing should be homogeneous. 2. Fitted with mobile under-bench drawer and cupboard units on nylon studs and not castors. 3. Integrated with and supporting laboratory services (power, gases, data, water, wastes, etc.) not contained in a sealed unventilated duct. 4. Designed to allow clearance for installation of laboratory piped services on wall and partition surfaces. 5. Designed for user safety and best ergonomics, with storage in 2100-mm high cupboards which is preferable to under-bench storage. 6. Arranged with segregated through-traffic aisles and work aisles. 7. Arranged with benches preferably 1500 mm apart and minimum 1350 mm apart and not returning at right angles, as in a corner. 8. Arranged to avoid through-traffic passing staff working at benches. 9. Adjustable height ergonomic chairs with washable, non off-gassing covers.

Appendix A 331

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Appendix B Australian Laboratory Standards

Introduction Laboratory design is regulated by the law and also by standards and codes, which may not have legal standing but are recommendations. In Australia, under the law, laboratory owners have a duty of care to their staff.They are required to provide a workplace, which complies with the Building Code of Australia (BCA).The BCA applies to all States and Territories since it replaced the wide variety of building regulations of each State. At that time it was agreed that the BCA was the only regulation and any Australian Standard, which was more stringent would have to be withdrawn. Unfortunately this edict had serious ramifications for the laboratory industry. Prior to the BCA, architects designed laboratories in accordance with the Australian Standard. AS/NZS 2982 – 1987 Laboratory Construction, which provided for maximum travel distances of 7 m to a point from which escape is possible in two directions and a total distance of 30 m to the nearest exit. As this was one of several recommendations, AS 2982: 1987 was therefore one of the Australian Standards which had to be withdrawn. However I still recommend that we design the laboratories to the original standard. Some design briefs from our clients do in fact list the withdrawn standard for compliance in their project.While this standard no longer exists, it nevertheless has been the laboratory industry standard for best practice for more than ten years.

Commentary on AS/NZS 2982 – 1997 ‘Laboratory Design and Construction’ The preface to Part 1 states that the Standard supersedes in part AS 2982 – 1987 ‘Laboratory Construction’. In fact it has superseded all parts as AS 2982: 1987 has been withdrawn completely. 334 Appendix B

AS/NZS 2982: 1997 Part 1 – General requirements Under Section 2, Clause 2.2 Protection against sunlight means that all laboratory buildings should have a permanent external sun-shading device. I recommend external control as internal blinds are subject to human error. It should be possible to design an external structure which excludes direct sunlight without blocking the view. The note under Clause 2.3 Floors states a commercial grade vinyl or similar material laid over a solid impervious base or an approved underlay is acceptable in most laboratories. I generally select from a product which is manufactured specifically for hospitals and laboratories. Clause 2.5 Ceilings eliminates false ceilings with T-bars and loose panels, as these are not ‘rigid’ as required.This clause is concerned with avoiding dust dropping through non-continuous ceilings and in accessible services. Clause 2.6 Windows requires laboratories to have some opening windows to allow natural ventilation if the mechanical ventilation fails. Clause 2.7 Benches recommends bench top materials and finishes but I believe the most important feature is repairability. Only a polyester solid-surface material like Chem Form, Marblo or Corian can be cleaned off with a light abrasive cleaner like Jif to remove chemical stains which are actually lying on the surface, as the material is impervious. Clause 2.7(c) should be familiar to you, as it has not changed. However ‘through traffic’ was not identified previously and Note 1 should clarify this. Benches which return at right angles, are seen as not complying with the recommendations for ‘the minimum width of working spaces between benches’. Clause 2.8 Fixtures, fittings and equipment states:‘Under-bench cupboards shall be supported in such a manner as to facilitate cleaning of the floor surface beneath them.’ The best design to achieve this is to have under-bench units, which are movable.The daily damp cloth mopping of the floor is taken to the skirting on the unit. Generally twice a year the staff pull their units out into the aisle space and the cleaner can then do a thorough job under the benches. If the units are suspended from the bench top, the cleaner cannot reach in under the units to clean properly. Clause 2.9 Shelving, Note 2 recommends cupboards for storage rather than open shelving which can collect dust over a long period, unless the laboratory is air conditioned. Clause 2.10 Fume cupboards references AS 2243 – Part 8. Figure 1 in that standard shows the siting of fume cupboards to ‘avoid undue disturbance of air flow’. It is not an ergonomic or safety provision. Fume cupboards can be supported on height adjustable metal frames to allow access for wheelchair operators required under the Equal opportunity Act. Clause 2.11 Lunch and rest rooms states that they ‘shall not be included in the laboratory area’.This recommendation is of course to avoid staff eating and drinking close to their work as to make chemical or hazardous contact with food and drink inevitable. Appendix B 335

Clause 2.14 Water heaters states that these heaters ‘with open elements shall not be installed in laboratories’.While bunsen burners and other ‘open elements’ are used in laboratories, they are generally in a controlled situation where safety management is being exercised. Clause 3.2 Identification and colour coding requires each service to be identified and visible over its complete length. Clearly this can only be achieved if the service pipes are exposed and not enclosed in a duct. Service pipes, particularly those reticulating flammable gases, can leak and produce an explosive mixture in the confined space of a duct which is another reason for installing services on the walls or ceilings. Clause 3.3 Isolation device requires all services to be isolated within each laboratory so that a service can be shut off in an emergency, for maintenance or for alteration.Too often I see these isolation valves hidden under benches, even in ducts.They should be very visible, particularly for staff unfamiliar with the laboratory services. Clause 3.5, Note 2 requires gas cylinders to be installed outside the building and not within the laboratory. In multi-storied laboratories it may be possible to have the gas cylinder store on a fire-isolated balcony next to the goods lift. Clause 3.7.3 Drinking water requires the provision of drinking water for staff to be located outside the laboratory area. Water in the laboratory is generally marked not potable. Clause 4.1 Standards and regulation references AS 3000 which sets out the restricted zones for power outlets, in relation to sinks. Clause 4.2 Laboratory Power, Note 2 references AS 2430 and AS 2243.Therefore GPOs should be 300 mm above the bench top, not below the bench and 300 mm above the floor. Clause 4.3 Laboratory lighting references AS 1680.1, which recommends levels of illumination for various types of laboratory work.The clause recommends that light fittings should be sealed to the ceiling to prevent accumulation of an explosive mixture of gases in a ceiling space when the laboratory is at a positive pressure. The best light fittings for laboratories are either indirect, reflecting the light off the ceiling or ‘low brightness fittings’.These have exposed tubes in parabolic reflectors and produce a narrow beam of light. Lenticular diffusers should not be used as they create reflected glare off the bench top. Clause 5.4 Mechanical ventilation systems recommends under (b) local exhaust ventilation in accordance with AS 1668.2. It is better to extract airborne contaminants at the source rather than allow them to disperse into the laboratory environment.There are several proprietary systems for some tasks and down-draught extraction systems are good in anatomical pathology. Under (c), in Clause 5.4, the uncontrolled dispersion of hazardous airborne contaminants is actually prevented by measures under (b) above. Under (d) the air from laboratories should not be reticulated to non-laboratory areas. I generally recommend that the laboratory areas should be ventilated separately for 336 Appendix B

flexibility avoiding cross-contamination, maintaining permanent conditioning to critical areas, reducing energy by selective conditions and avoiding a full-scale breakdown from a central system. Clause 5.5.2 Contaminant control reinforces the recommendations in Clause 5.4 above. Clause 6.2 Safety showers requires a safety shower and eye/face wash in every laboratory. Hand-held drench hoses are not a substitute. Maximum travel distance to a safety shower is 10 m and located so that the approach to them is unobstructed. A door is an obstruction so it is no good locating them in the corridor. It is better to locate the showerhead over the aisle near the entry door, so that the space will always be free and the location familiar to staff. Safety shower testing should be on the regular laboratory maintenance programme. It is a good design to locate all safety gear together in a ‘safety station’ near the entry door. Clause 6.3 Handwashing facilities requires hot and cold water mixers at the main entry door, to encourage use by staff leaving the laboratory. Clause 7.2 Flammable liquids cabinets requires the capacity of cabinets to be no more than 250 l. Cabinets under benches are restricted to 30 l.The maximum capacity of a flammable liquid storeroom is 500 l. From the OH & S point of view the trend to smaller quantities of flammable substances in laboratories is being encouraged. Clause 7.4 Compressed-gas cylinders recommends cylinders to be ‘firmly secured’ in laboratories. I cannot reconcile this requirement with Note 2 in Clause 3.5 Reticulation from gas cylinders, which requires cylinders to be located outside the building.The gas supply companies recommend external location in a store facility in accordance with the SAA Gas Cylinder Code. I cannot comment on Sections 8 and 9, which refer to specialised laboratories as they are written by experts in those areas. Section 10 refers to schools and tertiary laboratories and is self-explanatory. Appendix A Planning, Design and Construction recommends a written brief by the laboratory owner and lists the items to be described in the brief.The list is comprehensive and can be a checklist for the users who know their requirements. That completes my commentary on AS/NZS 2982: 1997 Laboratory Design and Construction – Part 1: General Requirements. Part 2: Enhanced Fire Safety Requirements has not been published and is still under review. In the meantime I recommend AS 2982: 1987 Laboratory Construction to be followed as it has been industry best practice for the last ten years. From my experience, clients still insist on complying with this Standard. A list of Australian Standards follows: Australian Standards for laboratory design and construction.This has been compiled with information available from Standards Australia and CCH Laboratory Safety Manual at the time of writing and may not be complete. Not all referenced Standards and Codes are listed. Appendix B 337

AS 1386.2: 1989

Cleanrooms and clean workstations Part 2: Laminar flow cleanrooms

AS 1428.1: 1993

Design for access and mobility Part 1: General requirements for access – buildings

AS 1485: 1983

Safety and health in workrooms of educational establishments (BCA classified Class 9b)

AS/NZS 1668.2: 2002

The use of mechanical ventilation and air conditioning in buildings

AS 1680.1: 1998

Interior lighting Part 1: General principles and recommendations

AS 1837: 1976

Ergonomics in factory and office work

AS 1940: 1993

The storage and handling of flammable and combustible liquids

AS/NZS 2243.1: 1997

Safety in laboratories Part 1: General (1997) Part 2: Chemical aspects (1997) Part 3: Microbiological aspects and Containment facilities (2002) Part 4: Ionizing radiations (1998) Part 5: Non-ionizing radiations (1993) Part 6: Mechanical aspects (1990) Part 7: Electrical aspects (1991) Part 8: Fume cupboards (2001) Part 9: Recirculating fume cupboards (Draft) Part 10: Storage of chemicals (1993)

AS 2252

Biological Safety Cabinets Part 1 (Class 1) and Part 2 (Class 2)

AS/NZS 2293.1: 1998

Emergency evacuation lighting for buildings

AS 2419

Fire hydrant installations

AS 2430.1: 1987

Classification of Hazardous Areas Part 1: Explosive gas atmospheres Part 3: Specific occupancies (1991)

AS/NZS 2430.3.1: 1997

Part 3.1: Examples of area classification – General

AS/NZS 2430.3.6: 1997

Part 3.6: Examples of area classification – Laboratories, including fume cupboards and flammable medical agents

AS 2441

Installation of fire hose reels

338 Appendix B

AS 2444

Portable fire extinguishers and fire blankets selection and location

AS 2647: 1983

Biological safety cabinets – installation and use

AS/NZS 2982.1: 1997

Laboratory design and construction Part 1: General requirements (Part 2: Enhanced fire safety requirements was issued in November 1994 and has not been published)

AS 2982: 1987

Laboratory Construction was withdrawn by Standards Australia as some parts were in conflict with the BCA. However, NSW Government Secondary Schools and other laboratory owners may want the Project Design Team to comply with this document as it was the Standard before the BCA

AS/NZS 3000: 2000

Electrical installations – Buildings, structures and premises (SAA Wiring Rules)

AS 3500.2: 1990

National Plumbing and Drainage Code Part 2: Sanitary plumbing and sanitary drainage

ANSI-Z 358.1 AS 3780: 1994 AS/NZS 3661

Emergency eyewash and shower equipment The storage and handling of corrosive substances Slip resistance of pedestrian surfaces Part 1: Requirements The storage and handling of gases in cylinders Storage of chemicals

AS 4332: 1995 Worksafe Australia

Note: Refer to the Building Code of Australia for referenced Standards which have legal standing.

Appendix B 339

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Index

Access, 13, 25, 37, 43, 44, 59, 65 colour plate, 10, 47 Accommodation schedule, 2, 3, 10 Acoustics, xxiv, 16, 110 Activated carbon filters, 55 Air conditioning decentralized, xxii, 135, 220, 221, 241–3, 248–52, 277, 322–4 Air Handling Units (AHU), 100, 101, 104, 105, 248–52, 277 Air Quality, 12, 76, 103 Aisles, 20, 21 Animal research, 30, 35, 85, 87, 123, 151 Atrium, 75–9, 178–80, 189, 190, 191–4, 200–3, 211–15, 216–19, 220–3, 246, 247, 255, 256, 258, 259, 262, 263, 308–11 colour plates, 32, 33, 38, 59, 64 Audiovisual presentations, 13, 38 Audits, 74 Auto retrieval, 288 colour plates, 50, 51 Autoclaves, 64 Automation, 40, 279, 282, 288 Backup power supply, 116, 135 Biological Safety Cabinets, 56 342 Index

Brief, 2–14, 134 Bubble diagram, 4, 6 Budget, 17, 126–31 Building Management System (BMS), 135 Buildings: as-built drawings, 69, 70 contract documents, 19, 22 design & construct delivery, 181–7, 228 manual, 69 regulations, xx, 333–9 single and multi-storied, 27–9 structural columns, 26, 27, 31, 279, 288 CCTV (closed circuit television), 38 Central specimen reception (CSR), 279, 282, 288 Centrifuges, 63 Chilled beams and ceilings, xxii, 107, 108, 320, 326, 327 colour plate, 28 Circulation corridors, 20, 21, 31–5, 183 Cleaning: bench tops, 72 flooring, 72 staff restrictions, 72 under benches, 73

CO2 emissions, xxiii, 52, 273 Co-location, 24 Compactus storage, 11 Computer modeling, xxi, 62 Computers, xxi, 62, 63, 136, 299 colour plate, 18 Conference lecture rooms, 13, 143, 144 Consultants – Specialist Sub-consultants, 16 Cool rooms, 64 colour plate, 12 Core of laboratory support facilities, 31–4 Cost planning, 125–31 Courtyard, 78–9, 313–18, 319–25 colour plates, 21–5, 56, 60 Cross-contamination, xxii Data and voice communications, 30, 117, 118 Decanting benches, 58 Dehumidifiers, 108 Detoxification, xxii Developed design stage, 19, 21 Dewpoint, 108 DHR (Design Hazard Review), 82, 83, 88 Disabled, physically impaired, 43, 44, 59 Double skin façade, 195–9, 227, 275–7, 312 colour plate, 58 Down-draught benches, 56, 57 Durinal lighting, 123 Dust, 30 Ecologically sustainable design (ESD), xxiii, 27, 75–9, 211–15 colour plates, 54, 55 Electrical services, 113–23 Emergencies, 69 Emergency power disconnect switches, 69

Energy conservation, 27, 110–12, 167–71, 200–7 Energy Rating, xxii, 326–7 Environmental protection, xxiii, 12, 52, 55 Epistitial space, 195–9 colour plate, 35 Exhaust ventilation, 55, 56, 104, 107, 109 colour plate, 8 Expansion, 25 Fire, 19, 20, 31, 334 detection, suppression, 48 escape routes, 334 isolation, 25, 181–7 separation of laboratory from other uses, 25, 181–7, 334 Flammable liquids cabinets, 56 Flexibility, xxi, 2–14, 25–38, 41–9, 90, 135, 137, 140, 148, 149, 186 Floor coverings, 36, 72 Floor space calculations, 19, 20 Floor wastes, 31, 36 Fresh air, 77–9, 284 Fuel cell, 236, 303 Fume cupboards: ducted, 52–5 colour plate, 34 recirculatory filtration, xxiii, 12, 52, 55, 111, 271–3 colour plate, 7 Gas cylinders, 254, 293, 336, 339 colour plate, 19 Generic laboratories, xviii, 4 Glass washing, 47 GMO (genetically Manipulated Organisms), 30, 37, 85, 87, 123, 151 Green Room, xxii, 326 Greenhouse gas emissions, xxiii, 12, 52, 212, 271–3 Hand-washing, 337 Hazards, 7, 84–8, 120 Heat sink, 196, 198 Index 343

HEPA filters (high efficiency particulate air), 56, 73, 104 Hot desks, 320, 322 HPLC (high performance liquid chromatography), 40, 63, 160 Humidity, 108 Incubators (for plant growth), 64 Indoor air quality (IAQ), 76 Instrumentation, 63 Interstitial services space, 27, 162–6, 191–4, 214, 253–6

Light shelves, 211, 214, 216, 302 Lighting, 27, 36, 121, 122 indirect, xxiv, 36, 122 colour plate, 29 Maintenance, 71–4 Mechanical services, 97–112, 135 Meeting rooms, xxii, 10, 13, 322 Natural ventilation, 78 Noise abatement, xxiv, 110 Noisy equipment, xxiv, 10

Kit-of-parts methodology, 10, 288 Laboratories: generic, xxii, 4 module, 25, 26 multi-purpose teaching, 37, 38, 41, 45, 46 special, non multi-purpose, 37 system modular furniture, 41–5, 279–81, 287, 291, 316 colour plates, 1, 2, 4, 5, 14–16 see also Index of Laboratory Categories in Case studies Laboratory services: bollards, 42–4, 48, 139, 141 colour plates, 1, 2 controls, 48, 69, 106, 107 ducts, 30, 238–40 colour plate, 37 integration with benches, xxiv, 48, 90, 118, 316 colour plates, 14–16 pendant, 48, 63, 140, 316 colour plate, 3 reticulation, xxiii, 29, 48, 115, 238–40, 294, 295 colour plates, 13, 20, 52, 53 spine, 43, 48, 118 Laminar flow cabinets, 56 Layout, 31–6, 134 Lifecycle cost, 130

344 Index

Occupational Health & Safety (OH & S), 7, 81–8 Off-gassing, 103, 331 Ovens, 64 Pathology, 4, 5, 49, 85 PC (Physical Containment), 55 Peristitial space, xxiii, 27, 28, 248–52, 292, 293 colour plates, 42, 45 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE), 87 Pneumatic tube specimen distribution, 279, 282 Post-occupancy evaluation, 133–7 Power, 115–17 Professional interaction, xxi, xxii, xxiv, 158, 159, 191, 194, 211, 319–22 Program, 2–14 see also Brief Project design team, 16 Quantity surveying, 125–31 RCD (Residual Current Devices), 119 Reagent shelving, xxiv, 43,44 Refrigerators, 64 Regulations and standards, xxiii, 289, 290 RH (Relative Humidity), 103 Risk management, 84

Robotic specimen transporter, 49, 279, 282 colour plate, 44 Room data sheets, 17, 18 Safety showers and eye-wash, 36 Safety stations, 36, 73 Science & Technology Parks, 24 Security, 14, 68, 136, 168, 241–3 Shadowless indirect lighting, xxiv, 122 colour plate, 29 Shared facilities, xxi Site: planning for expansion, 25, 191–4 restrictions, 24 zoning of land use, 24 Smokers, 14 Snorkel exhaust (local extraction), 107–9, 111, 112 colour plate, 8 Solar energy, 78, 111 colour plate, 55 Solid surface bench tops, 331 Space relationships, 4, 6, 20, 282 Staff: car parking, 14 facilities, 12 interaction, xxi, xxii, xxiv, 158, 159, 191, 194, 211, 319–22 library: colour plate, 33 Staff write-up area, 7, 191–4, 210, 253–6, 267 Standards and regulations, xxiii, 27, 333–9 Storage: autoretrieval, 11, 45 colour plates, 50, 51 bulk, 11, 37 co-ordinated drawers and delivery carts, 45 compactus, 11, 45 colour plate, 6 sliding storage cupboard, 49, 186

specimen, 109, 110, 282 under-bench, 11, 44, 45, 186 colour plates, 30, 31 wall cabinets, 11, 45, 291 Sun control (shading), 27, 143, 146, 285, 308, 309, 322–5 colour plates, 46, 57, 62 Supervision of staff for safety, 150 colour plate, 49 Support facilities, 31–4 Surge protection, 115, 116 Technology parks, 24 Testing laboratories see Index of Laboratory Categories in Case studies, Quality Assurance (QA) University teaching and research see Index of Laboratory Categories in Case studies UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supplies), 116 VAV (Variable air velocity), 55 Video presentations, 13, 38 Virtual experiment, 38, 296–9 Visitors, 8, 14, 85 Visual acuity, xxiv, 36 Wastes: dilution pit, 73 disposal, 73, 91–6 hazardous, 85 liquid, 73, 91–6 pump-out, 35 solvents, 35, 73 vacuum extraction, 35 Water: break tank, 48 drinking water, 91, 95 supply, 48, 91–4 Wet and dry laboratories, 41, 314, 317, 319–22 Wheelchair access, 13, 43, 44, 55, 59 Work environment, 12, 25, 168, 319–22

Index 345

Workbenches: adjustable height, 41, 43, 47, 58, 59 colour plate, 17 anti-vibration, 44, 45, 58 bench tops, 41, 72, 331 fixed, 44 island, 35, 295, 299 colour plate, 11 movable modular, xxiv, 41, 42, 43, 186 colour plates, 1, 2, 4, 5, 14–16, 48, 61 peninsula, 35 colour plate, 30, 31 split benches, 40 wall benches, 35, 118 see also Laboratories-System modular furniture Workflow diagram, 4, 5 Workstations (computer modelling), 322 Zero emissions, xxiii, 52, 55

346 Index

Index of Laboratory Categories in Case studies Incubator, start-up commercial enterprise, 13, 15, 24, 29, 31 colour plates, 36, 39, 40 Medical Research, 3, 4, 8, 10, 12, 14, 26, 30, 40, 42 Pathology, 33, 35 colour plates, 43, 44, 48 Quality Assurance (QA), 5, 11, 22, 23, 36 Research & Development (R&D), 6, 7, 9, 17, 18, 37, 39 University teaching and research, 1, 2, 16, 19, 20, 21, 25, 27, 28, 31, 32, 34, 38, 41 colour plates, 39, 40, 41